080524 - Indonesian Mines Reg - Decree of the Minister of Mines and Energy 555

1

DECREE OFTHE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

NUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995ON

GENERAL MINING OCCUPATIONALSAFETY AND HEALTH

TECHNICAL DIRECTORATE OF MINESTHE DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF MINES

1995

2

FOREWORD

In an effort to refine and complement legislative regulations in mining, the Decree of theMinister of Mines and Energy No. 555.K/26/M.PE/1995 was published on May 22, 1995on Occupational Safety and Health. The regulations on occupational safety and healthprevailing previous thereto were Mijn Politie Reglement (MPR) Number 341 publishedin 1930.

These occupational safety and health regulations are formulated to be capable ofanticipating any progress in the field of mining in Indonesia at this time as well as in thefuture. These regulations apart from being more up-to-date are also more complete as theregulation for underground occupational safety and health has been covered in detail,both in terms of coal and ore mines. These standards for occupational safety and healthalso exceed the standards of the previous regulations and they are expected to be capableof meeting practical demands in providing protection and instructions/information to allworkers in mining who face the problem of occupational safety and health.

The stipulations in these occupational safety and health regulations should be compliedwith by any worker in mining operations to prevent the occurrence of any accident.

Jakarta, September 1995DIRECTOR GENERAL OF MINES

signature/stamp

KUNTORO MANGKUSUBROTO

3

CONTENTS

DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MININGAND ENERGY NUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995

CHAPTER I

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9

PART ONE : INTERPRETATION 9PART TWO : PROHIBITIONS ON THE

ENTRY TO MINING OPERATIONS REGION 16PART THREE : MINING OPERATORS 16PART FOUR : SURVEYORS AND MINE MAPS 23PART FIVE : MINE BOOK 25PART SIX : GUIDELINES TO MINE OCCUPATIONAL

SAFETY AND HEALTH 26PART SEVEN : MINE WORKERS 27PART EIGHT : MINING FACILITIES 32PART NINE : HEALTH TREATMENT AND FIRST AID 33PART TEN : MINE ACCIDENTS AND DANGEROUS

OCCURRENCES 34PART ELEVEN : HEALTH 40

CHAPTER II

EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING 41

PART ONE : THE EXPLOSIVES MAGAZINE 41PART TWO : SURFACE MAGAZINES 43PART THREE : UNDERGROUND MAGAZINES 52PART FOUR : EXPLOSIVES STORAGE PROCEDURES 53PART FIVE : TRANSPORTATION 59PART SIX : BLASTING ACTIVITIES 60

4

CHAPTER III

WORKING ENVIRONMENT 64

PART ONE : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 64PART TWO : DUST 64PART THREE : NOISE AND VIBRATIONS 66PART FOUR : HAZARDOUS AND NOXIOUS MATERIALS 67

CHAPTER IV

SURFACE MINE INFRASTRUCTURE 69

PART ONE : STRUCTURES, BUILDINGS ANDACCESS WAYS AND EGRESS 69

PART TWO : LIGHTING 72PART THREE : FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL 73PART FOUR : TRANSPORTATION SAFETY 81PART FIVE : WORKSHOPS AND FACTORIES 105PART SIX : ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND

MACHINERY 114PART SEVEN : LIQUID FUEL STORAGE 128

CHAPTER V

DRILLING 134

CHAPTER VI

SURFACE MINES 141

PART ONE : SAFE WORKING PROCEDURES 141PART TWO : HYDRAULIC MINES 144PART THREE : EARTH MOVING EQUIPMENT 146PART FOUR : EVACUATION IN EMERGENCY SITUATIONS 150

5

CHAPTER VII

DREDGES 151

PART ONE : PERSON IN CHARGE 151PART TWO : PLACEMENT OF DREDGES 154PART THREE : DREDGE PONTOONS 156PART FOUR : INSPECTIONS 157PART FIVE : DREDGE SAFETY 158PART SIX : SAFETY EQUIPMENT 159PART SEVEN : MACHINERY AND ELECTRICITY 162PART EIGHT : SAFETY MEASURES 163PART NINE : TOWING A MINE DREDGE 165PART TEN : DOCKING OF MINING DREDGES 167PART ELEVEN : AUXILIARY FACILITIES 167

CHAPTER VIII

UNDERGROUND ORE MINES 168

PART ONE : MINE ADMINISTRATION 168PART TWO : MEANS OF EGRESS 173PART THREE : SHAFTS AND HOISTING 176PART FOUR : EMERGENCY SITUATIONS 189PART FIVE : IN-RUSHES, EMISSIONS AND OUT BURSTS 192PART SIX : GROUND CONTROL SUPPORT METHODS 194PART SEVEN : PROTECTION AT WORK SITE 200PART EIGHT : VENTILATION 202PART NINE : UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE 211PART TEN : TRANSPORTATION 213PART ELEVEN : TRANSPORTATION BY CONVEYOR 227PART TWELVE : RAISE CLIMBERS 232PART THIRTEEN : UNDERGROUND MINE ELECTRICITY 234PART FOURTEEN : LIGHTING 246PART FIFTEEN : FIRE PREVENTION UNDERGROUND

AND RESCUE ARRANGEMENTS 249PART SIXTEEN : WELFARE 262PART SEVENTEEN : MANPOWER TRAINING AND SUPERVISION 267PART EIGHTEEN : PROTECTION FROM NATURAL RADIATION 272

6

CHAPTER IX

UNDERGROUND COAL MINES 276

PART ONE : GENERAL 276PART TWO : PREVENTION OF COMBUSTIBLE GASES

AND DUST FROM IGNITING 281PART THREE : VENTILATION IN GASSY MINES 290PART FOUR : INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AT

WORK SITES 305PART FIVE : TRAINING AND SUPERVISION OF

MANPOWER IN UNDERGROUNDCOAL MINES 315

CHAPTER X

PENALTIES 316

CHAPTER XI

TRANSFER STIPULATIONS 317

CHAPTER XII

CLOSING STIPULATIONS 317

7

DECREE OFTHE MINISTER OF MINING AND ENERGY

NUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995ON

GENERAL MINING OCCUPATIONAL WORK HEALTHAND SAFETY

TECHNICAL DIRECTORATE OF GENERAL MININGTHE DIRECTORATE GENERAL OF GENERAL MINING

1995

8

THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY OFTHE REPUBLIC OF INDONESIA

DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGYNUMBER : 555.K/26/M.PE/1995

ON

MINES OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH

THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

Considering : a. that in accordance with Government Regulation Number 19, Year 1973 theregulation of safety and health in the field of mining is the authority of the Ministerof Mines and Energy;

b. that in accordance with the development of mining technology, not one of the safetyrequirements in the field of mining as laid down in Min Polite Regiment (MPR)1930 Number 341 can be maintained and must therefore be reviewed;

c. that given the very technical nature of Occupational safety and health regulationsentailing detailed rules requiring constant amendment in accordance with thedevelopment of technology, provision of the regulation of Occupational safety andhealth is sufficient in a Decree of the Minister of Mines and Energy.

Given : 1. Law Number 11, 1967 (Government Gazette 1967, Number 22, Addendum Number2831);

2. Law Number 1, 1970 (Government Gazette 1970, Number 1 Addendum Number2981);

3. Government Regulation Number 32, 1969 (Government Gazette 1969 Number 60,Addendum 2916) as amended by Government Regulation Number 79, 1992(Government Gazette 1992, Number 130, Addendum Number 3510);

4. Government Regulation Number 19, 1973 (Government Gazette 1973, Number 25Addendum Number 3003);

5. Government Regulation Number 27, 1980 (Government Regulation, 1980 Number47, Addendum Number 3174) and

6. Presidential Decree Number 96/M, 1993, March 17, 1993

DECIDES :

TO STIPULATE : DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGYON MINES SAFETY AND HEALTH

9

Chapter IGeneral Requirements

Part OneArticle 1

Interpretation

Within this Ministerial Decree the following shall mean :

1. Mining Activities means any place of operation intended to or directly related togeneral surveying, exploration, feasibility studies, construction, production orexploitation operations, processing or refining, transporting or selling, a, b and cclass minerals including the supporting services and infrastructure located aboveor below ground, whether on a single property or at remote locations.

2. Mining Company means any person or business granted the authority to carry outa mining operation based on a Mining Authority and Contract of Work.

3. Mine means the location of any mining activity carried out in order to extractminerals.

4. Surface Mining means any system of mining of minerals which is carried out onthe surface or from the surface of water.

5. Underground Mine means any system of mining to extract minerals which iscarried out below ground.

6. Technical Mine Manager means any person who is in charge of and who isresponsible for the implementation and compliance of occupational safety andhealth regulations at the mine.

7. Mine Worker means any person who works directly at the mining operation.

8. Mining Accident means any accident causing injury to any mine worker or anyperson permitted to enter the area of the mining activity.

9. Director General shall refer to the Director General of Mines.

10. Operator means the management of the company.

11. Mine Book means the record book of prohibitions, orders, and directives of theMine Inspector which must be kept by the Technical Mine Manager.

12. A Mine Inspector is a government authority supervising the implementation ofoccupational safety and health in mines..

10

13. Project Area shall mean any place stipulated by the Director General or ProvincialGovernor used for the mine facilities.

14. Explosives shall mean any chemical compound, mixture or device that is made,manufactured, or used to produce an explosion by a sustained chemical reaction.Explosives include black powder, nitro-glycerine, dynamite, gelatine, detonatingcords, safety fuses, detonators, ammonium nitrate, when mixed withhydrocarbons and other blasting agents.

15. Detonator shall mean any device containing a detonating charge that is used toinitiate explosives and includes but is not limited to electric detonators, plaindetonators, non-electric detonators (none) or delay detonators.

16. Magazine shall mean any building or container with specific technical and safetyfeatures for storing explosives.

17. Blaster means any person appointed by the mining company or the TechnicalMine Manager to carry out explosive work and who holds a current BlastingLicense (KIM)

18. Blasting work shall consist of mixing explosives, making a primer, loading, andstemming of blast holes, linking and connecting any explosion pattern, coupling ashot-firing circuit to a detonator circuit, a circuit tester or blasting machine,determining dangerous areas, ordering people to withdraw or shelter, and to takecover, testing circuits, firing blast holes, handling misfires, and controlling theimpact of explosions such as fly-rock, ground vibrations, noise, and air blasts.

19. Blaster Trainee means any person approved by the Technical Mine Manager toundergo blasting operations training under the close personal supervision of ablaster.

20. Blasting means any single or series of blasts carried out as part of one blast.

21. Magazine safety distance means the minimum distance at which the magazinemust be separated from other magazines, buildings inhabited by people, railwaylines and public roads and which shall depend on the amount and type ofexplosives stored.

22. Detonator sensitive explosive means any explosives that can be detonated by aNo. 8 blasting cap.

23. Primer sensitive explosives means any explosive that can only be detonated byusing a primer/booster charge together with a No. 8 blasting cap.

11

24. Explosive Ingredients means the standard materials which when mixed withcertain materials become primer sensitive explosives.

25. Main magazine means the magazine used as the storage facility for explosives thelocation of which is not too far from the mine and from which explosives are usedfor blasting.

26. Transit magazine means the magazine utilised as a temporary storage facilityprior to transportation to the main explosives magazine.

27. Temporary magazine means the magazine used during mining exploration workor mining development.

28. Container means the explosives magazine in the form of a container made frommetal plate.

29. Combustible material means any material which ignites, burns, supportscombustion or releases combustible vapour when subject to fire or heat.

30. Combustible gas means gas which is capable of ignitions at the normalconcentration of oxygen in the air.

31. Flash point means the minimum temperature at which sufficient vapour isreleased by a liquid to form a combustible vapour-air mixture near the surface ofthe liquid.

32. Fire resistance rating means the time in minutes or hours that a material willretain its protective characteristics and structure when exposed to fire.

33. Crane is any machinery or equipment operated mechanically, electrically orhydraulically that is able to be used as a lifting apparatus including rail, railway orother supplementary equipment, but not including raise climbers attached to amine shaft.

34. Chain block is any lifting apparatus, consisting of shackles, swivels, hooks,slings, eyebolts, chains and fittings which is used to lift and includes the clipsused to secure the wire.

35. Workshop means any place or workroom used to carry out repairs, maintenance,manufacturing, installation or testing of mining equipment and other technicalwork that supports mining activities.

36. High voltage electricity shall mean an installation with more than 300 volts undernormal work conditions (250 volts in the underground circuit).

12

37. Bangka drill means any auger type drill fitted with casing and core recoveryeffected by the platform which is assembled to the head of the casing. Thesystem for taking samples is operated by means of tamping from the platform.

38. Hydraulic Mine is one type of surface mine that uses water to dig and transportmaterials to the washing installation.

39. Earth moving equipment means any mechanical equipment used to move top soil,overburden and deposits of minerals during clearing, digging, and lifting andremoving operations, and includes bulldozers, shovels, draglines, scrapers andbucket wheel excavators but does not include transport vehicles such as dumptrucks.

40. Mining dredge means a dredge used for mining, including boats used as supportfacilities which is carried out on the surface of water, and shall hereafter beknown as dredge.

41. Head line means the mooring line attached to the bow of a dredge used to moorthe dredge.

42. Port and starboard line means the mooring line attached to the left and right sides(respectively) of the dredge to moor the dredge.

43. Stern line means the cable attached to the rear of the dredge.

44. Anchor cable means a cable used to moor the dredge, i.e. head line, port,starboard lines and stern lines.

45. Spill anchor means a chain anchor attached to the middle of the dredge.

46. Compartment / tank is the pontoon divided into water tight segments.

47. Pontoon is a closed compartment whose function is to make the dredge float.

48. Safety Hull means a series of small hulls designed to protect the maincompartment from collisions.

49. Ballast tanks means a compartment that can be filled with water to maintain thebalance of the dredge.

50. Man hole means the water tight hole in the deck used as an access way forinspection and repair work of the compartments.

51. Current tripping device is a device whose function is to cut off electrical currentsincluding any automatic or manual switches.

13

52. Concentric cables means a cable whose outer conductor is entwined around theinsulation of the inner conductor.

53. Flexible Cable means a cable designed specifically to be flexible when used.

54. Metallic cable casing means the iron or steel cable encasing the cable.

55. Tripping means an automatic interruption of an electrical current which operatesmechanically or electrically.

56. Raise is any tunnel with an inclination above the horizontal greater than 15degrees whose construction is carried out from bottom to top.

57. Winze is any tunnel with an inclination below the horizontal greater than 15degrees whose construction is carried out from top to bottom.

58. In rush is the sudden and high speed flow of water or mud.

59. Emission is the sudden release of noxious or combustible gas from any placeother than an abandoned working site into any area of an underground minewhich causes the conditions of the mine air at the said area to exceed ventilationrequirements.

60. Out burst is a violent outburst of gas together with solid rock in the mine.

61. Rock burst means an outburst of rock fragments caused by excessive pressureproducing an accumulation of energy, which does not include outbursts oremissions of pressured gas.

62. Hazardous area means any area below ground in a mine which is within 45 meters(measured in any plane) of the surface, any disused working, any stratumcontaining or likely to contain water, any material that flows or is likely to flowwhen wet.

63. Main fan means a fan that controls the entire airflow of a mine.

64. Booster fan means a fan which is installed in a main airway or a district airwayfor the purpose of boosting or increasing the quantity of air in that part of themine.

65. Auxiliary fan means a fan used to deliver air to work places off the mainairstream such as headings, drifts, and which usually makes use of ventilationtubing.

14

66. Main intake airway means the main airway of incoming fresh air beginning at ashaft or outlet. When an airway is split into two or more working areas, theairways through which it passes are known as intake airways.

67. Main return airway means the main airway of out-coming used air ending at ashaft or outlet. Airways in which the airflow is returning from two or moreworking areas into the main return airway are called return airways.

68. Transport system means any system of transport which operates wholly or partlyunderground (other than in a shaft) which carries men, materials or minerals.

69. Free Steered Vehicles means any powered vehicles not moving on tracks.

70. Rope Haulage System means any transport system where vehicles are attached toand moved by a rope, driven by a stationary haulage engine whether mechanicallyor gravity powered.

71. Raise climber means any powered machine or device using a pinion and fixedrack system for traction and used as a working platform in the course ofexcavating vertical or inclined raises. Raise climbers installed as permanentmeans of transportation between fixed levels are not included.

72. Flame safety lamp means any lamp which is so protected or enclosed as to makeimpossible the ignition of an atmosphere of combustible gas and dust outside thelamp.

73. Firedamp or methane means any mixture of flammable gases naturally occurringin a mine.

74. Combustible dust means any dust which when freely dispersed in air forms acombustible mixture.

75. Venturi ventilation means apparatus used to induce airflow into a duct by meansof a jet of compressed air or water and includes all types of ejector or blowers butshall not include any ejector or blower used in a firedamp drainage system.

76. Automatic Fire Damp Detector (AFD) means an approved device to continuallydetect the presence of firedamp and to give a visual or audible alarm at a presetlevel.

77. Firedamp monitoring system means an approved device to continuously detect thepresence of firedamp and to record the results at a location at the surface of themine or some other location as may be accepted by an inspector.

78. Bore hole means any hole drilled for the purpose of tapping firedamp anddraining it through firedamp drainage system.

15

79. Firedamp drainage is an activity in a mine carried out to collect the fire damp in amine prior to it being diluted and discharged from the mine.

80. Firedamp drainage system is a system for the drainage of firedamp excluding thedrainage of firedamp that accumulated behind road-side packs and merelyconsists of a pipe to convey the firedamp to a point where it can be discharged.

81. Calorimeter room means a place at the surface used to monitor firedamp or theheat levels thereof.

82. Armoured Flexible Conveyor (AFC) means conveyor equipment using a flexiblechain to convey coal from a working face when using a drum sheerer.

83. Bar means a girder or any form of cross support.

84. ‘Prop’ includes friction props of chocks.

85. Powered support means a support that works using hydraulic power or pneumaticpower.

86. Travelling roadway means any roadway used for the transportation of peoplefrom and to the work site and includes any roadway intended to be used as asecondary egress from the mine.

87. Roadway is any heading, cut-through, roadway between two pillars or road in theroom and pillar system or any road used for transportation.

88. Working face is the space between the excavation boundary and the nearest seriesof supports installed when the said supports are parallel and systematicallywithdrawn and or the space between the excavation boundary until a boundary upto 3.5 meters from a mined out area when the supports are not systematicallywithdrawn.

16

Article 2Scope

(1) This Ministerial Decree shall apply to all aspects of activities in miningoperations in the Mining Concession, Contract of Work, Work Agreement, areaor any other place designated as a project area by the Director General orProvincial (Level I) Governor in accordance with the authority vested therein.

(2) The Chief Mine Inspector may grant exemption of the implementation of thestipulations in this Ministerial Decree on the basis of such requests from theoperator or the Technical Mine Manager.

Part TwoArticle 3

Prohibitions on the Entry toMining Operations Region

(1) It is prohibited to enter or be found within the region of any mining operationapart from those who work therein or who are permitted.

(2) Those in possession of a permit to enter a mining operation region as required inparagraph (1), shall be accompanied by the Technical Mine Manager or anappointed employee who has full comprehension of the situation and conditionsof the area to be visited.

(3) Roads designated by the Technical Mine Manager shall be roads for specific useof mining operations and where the public is granted the right of use thereof, thesafety for the use of the said right shall become his/her responsibility.

Part ThreeMining Operators

Article 4Obligations

(1) The operator shall only commence mining activities after written notification hasbeen given to the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Within two weeks after one of the following activities, the operator shall send awritten report to the Chief Mine Inspector, namely:

a. commencement of exploration, excavation of any mine, and a new horizon orseam at the coal level in an underground mine.

17

b. commencement of a new shaft or outlet for any underground mine and

c. termination of activities or abandoning of any surface mine or any horizon orseam at the coal level, shaft or outlet from any underground mine calculated12 months from the date of the final activities, except where abandoned priorthereto.

(3) The operator shall provide any equipment, fittings, protective equipment,facilities and costs required for the implementation of these regulations.

(4) The operator shall supply free of charge any personal protective equipmentrequired in accordance with the type, nature and danger of the work carried outthereby as well as for any person who enters the mining operation site.

(5) Based on the considerations of the Chief Mine Inspector, the operator shallprovide appropriate accommodation at or close to the mining operation for theMine Inspector for the duration of his/her duties.

(6) The operator shall provide full assistance to the Mine Inspector in theimplementation of his/her duties.

(7) The operator shall stop mining work, whenever the Technical Mine Manager orappointed employee is not found on site.

Article 5Appointment of the

Technical Mine Manager

(1) Exploration or new exploitation shall only be commenced after the holder of theMining Authority has appointed a Technical Mine Manager.

(2) The operator shall appoint a Technical Mine Manager and obtain the approval ofthe Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The operator may submit an application to the Chief Mine Inspector to appointmore than one Technical Mine Manager where it is considered necessary or basedon the specific considerations of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) The operator may submit an application to the Chief Mine Inspector to appointmore than one deputy Technical Mine Manager where it is considered necessaryor based on the specific considerations of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) Implementation of the requirements of paragraph (3) and (4) shall be stipulated bythe Chief Mine Inspector.

18

(6) The Chief Mine Inspector may grant the Technical Mine Manager notice letters asrequested.

Article 6Qualifications for the

Technical Mine Manager

Technical Mine Managers shall be grouped into four classifications in the following order :

a. Class III B;b. Class III A;c. Class II andd. Class I

Article 7Class III B Technical Mine Managers

Class III B Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

a. mining systems : hydraulic mines, auger mines, open pit mines with singlebenches, the use of explosives, water jet suction dredges, open pit coal minesusing a manual system or exploration stage mines without drifts and open pitconstruction stage mines;

.b. mining companies : individuals, co-operatives and private Indonesian companies

and

c. qualifications :one of the following :

1) graduates of Mining/Machinery/Electrical Secondary Technical School(STM) shall possess an occupational work health and safety course certificatewith mining work experience of no less than four years, or

2) Bachelors or DIII and or Graduates shall possess an occupational work healthand safety course certificate with mining work experience of no less than 2years.

Article 8Class III A Technical Mine Managers

Class III A Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

19

a. mining systems : bucket dredges, open pit mines with benches, quarries, open pitmines with a production scale smaller than 1000 tons per day or exploration stageopen pit mines with drifts and underground construction mines.

b. mining companies : private Indonesian companies and State Owned Firms(BUMN) and

c. qualifications :one of the following :

1) graduates of Mining/Machinery/Electricity Secondary Technical Schools mustpossess an occupational work health and safety course certificate as well as aClass II Blaster Certificate for mines using explosives, or possess a dredgecourse certificate for mines using dredges or possess a Technical MineManager course certificate with mining work experience of no less than 6years, or

2) Bachelors or DIII or Graduates must possess an occupational work health andsafety course certificate and Class II Blaster Certificate for mines usingexplosives or possess a dredge course certificate for mines using dredges orpossess a Technical Mine Manager course certificate with mining workexperience of no less than three years, or

3) have particular experience as a Class III B Technical Mine Manager of no lessthan 5 years.

Article 9Class II Technical Mine Managers

Class II Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

a. mining systems : open pit mines with a production scale greater than 1000 tonsper day and underground ore mines;

b. mining companies : State Owned Firms (BUMN), Contracts of Work, and privateIndonesian companies and

20

c. qualifications :

1) Indonesian citizens must hold one of the following :

a) Bachelors and DIII graduates shall possess a Technical Mine Managercourse certificate, with open pit mine or underground ore mine experienceof no less than seven years, or

b) graduates who hold a Technical Mine Manager course certificate shallhave mining work experience of no less than five years, or

c) shall have held office as a Mine Inspector for no less than 10 years, or

d) possess a mining occupational work health and safety course certificate ortraining from abroad and have been accredited by the Technical MineManager accreditation committee with no less than 10 years mining workexperience.

2) foreign citizens (foreign experts) may hold one of the following :

a) possess a mining manager certificate accredited by the Technical MineManager Accreditation Committee, or

b) write or present a paper as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 10Class I Technical Mine Managers

Class I Technical Mine Managers shall meet the following criteria :

a. mining systems : underground coal mines, underground ore mines with an oreproduction scale greater than 1000 tons per day;

b. qualifications :one of the following :

1) Indonesian citizensmust hold one of the following :

a) Bachelors and DIII graduates who possess a Technical Mine Managercourse certificate, shall possess underground coal mine and orunderground ore mine work experience of no less than 10 years, or

b) shall have held office as a Mine Inspector for no less than 15 years, or

21

c) Class II Technical Mine Managers shall have five years of experience inthe said position.

2) foreign citizens (foreign experts) shall hold one of the following :

a) possess a mining manager certificate accredited by the Technical MineManager Accreditation Committee, or

b) write or present a paper as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 11Operational Supervisor

(1) The Technical Mine Manager in carrying out his duties and functions in the fieldof occupational safety and health in mining, machinery, electrical apparatus andits auxiliary equipment shall be assisted by supervisory officials who areresponsible for organisation of the different units at the mine.

(2) Where the operator has yet to appoint employees as required in paragraph (1) theTechnical Mine Manager shall assign or appoint the intended employee.

(3) Employees as required in paragraphs (1) and (2) in carrying out their duties shallbe known as operational supervisors or technical supervisors and shall report tothe Technical Mine Manager.

Article 12Obligations of the

Operational Supervisor

The operational supervisor shall :

a. be responsible to the Technical Mine Manager for the safety of every mineworker under his/her supervision;

b. carry out inspections, examinations, and testing;

c. be responsible for the safety, health, and welfare of every person assigned tohim/her and

d. prepare and sign examination, inspection and testing reports

Article 13Obligations of the

22

Technical Supervisor

The technical supervisor shall :

a. be responsible to the Technical Mine Manager for the safe installation and correctoperation and maintenance of any equipment that is part of his/her duties;

b. supervise and inspect all machinery and electrical equipment within the scope ofhis/her responsibilities;

c. make sure that investigations, inspections, and testing are always carried out onthe operation of machinery, electrical apparatus and equipment;

d. prepare and sign investigation, inspection and testing reports;

e. carry out investigations and testing of all machinery and equipment prior to use,after installation, re-installation or repair and

f. plan and enforce the implementation of the maintenance timetable as scheduled aswell as the repair of all mine machinery, transportation, road makers, and anyother machinery utilised.

Article 14Mine Inspection

(1) In order to ensure safe working conditions the Technical Mine Manager or anappointed employee shall carry out inspections :

a. during every mineral-getting shift, shall inspect no less than one time thework site of any person on shift and every road or travel way used by anyperson during the said shift;

b. during every shift, shall inspect every site before blasting operations;

c. every work day, inspect the access ways or ladder ways to be used that day;

d. every working face, work front, banks, and working slope as well as theimplementation of repair work where necessary;

e. blasting preparation as well as the condition of equipment and vehicles usedtherefor;

f. haulage and transport equipment;

g. mine roadways;

23

h. machinery safety devices and

i. any place considered dangerous.

(2) In carrying out inspections as required in paragraph (1), where anything is foundto be unsafe, the necessary action shall be taken.

Article 15

In order to ensure effective supervision and inspection of the work, the mine may bedivided into sections and each section shall be in the charge of a supervisory official.

Article 16

(1) The type and time of machinery, electrical apparatus and equipment inspectionreports shall be determined by the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) Such reports as required in paragraph (1) shall be forwarded to the TechnicalMine Manager.

Part FourSurveyors and Mine Maps

Article 17

(1) Only those persons in possession of a surveyor certificate recognised by the ChiefMine Inspector shall be appointed as a mine surveyor.

(2) Specifically for underground mines, the surveyor as required in paragraph (1)shall have underground mine experience and shall have been approved by theMine Inspector.

Article 18Obligations of the Surveyor

(1) The mine surveyor shall be responsible for indicating or determining the directionand boundaries for excavation in accordance with pre-determined plans.

(2) The surveyor shall make immediate notification to the employee responsible forexcavation work when such work is approaching (no less than 50 meters)potential dangerous sites such as water pockets, dangerous gases, rock bursts, andthe surface of the earth or supports that may endanger such excavation.

24

(3) To the extent that it does not conflict with the stipulations in this Decree, the minesurveyor shall not be responsible for the accuracy of measuring work alreadycarried out or approved by a previous mine surveyor or measuring work approvedin correction of any other surveyor. The said surveyor must however :

a. make every effort to take the necessary steps to ensure the accuracy of everymap, drawings or sections not yet made by him/her or under his/hersupervision and

b. shall report to the Technical Mine Manager, where he/she is in doubt as to theaccuracy of any map, drawing or section of the mine which was not made byor under the supervision of the mine surveyor, which could possibly impact onthe work and mining activities or the safety of people in the mine.

Article 19Maps

The Technical Mine Manager shall provide :

a. location maps that indicate the boundaries of the mining area, all above groundwork, buildings, electrical circuits, land roads, railway lines, lakes, rivers, tailingsdisposal sites, adits and shafts as well as other information determined by theChief Mine Inspector. For underground operations such maps shall indicate allunderground workings including shafts, tunnels, dams, ventilation doors andbulkheads;

b. mine plans for surface mines must indicate the planned surface situation includingthe location of mining and surface facilities. Underground mine plans shall showall sections of horizontal layers and underground workings including openings,shafts, and underground infrastructure as well as other information on a scale asstipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector and shall show the situation of theprevious six months.

c. a geological map that shows the boundaries of upper ground layer and alluvialsediment in the area: and

d. Mine maps that can be easily seen by employees, which show the main roads andexits from underground to the surface, as well as telephones and other means ofcommunication.

Part FiveMine Book

25

Article 20

Mine Book stipulations.

(1) Every mining operation shall possess a Mine Book the size and format of whichmust accord with the stipulations of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Mine Book as required in paragraph (1) shall be validated by the Mine Inspectorby numbering and initialling every page.

Article 21Mine Book Records

(1) Any violation of these regulations as well as specific stipulations such as orders,prohibitions and directives shall be recorded personally by the Mine Inspector.

(2) Without diminishing the requirements of paragraph (1), any notification given bythe Chief Mine Inspector to the Technical Mine Manager shall be recorded in theMine Book including a signature on a copy that matches the original.

(3) Provisions as required in paragraphs (1) and (2), shall be recorded by theTechnical Mine Manager in the Mine Book on the left hand side of the page.

Article 22Storage of the Mine Book

(1) The Mine Book shall always be available at the office of the Technical MineManager while a copy shall be kept at the office of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Mine Book may be read and studied by the mine workers.

26

Part SixGuidelines for Mine

Occupational Safety and Health

Article 23Occupational

Safety and Health Department

At every mining activity, based on the considerations of the number of workers and thecharacter or extent of work, the Chief Mine Inspector can oblige the mining authorityholder to establish a safety and health department which shall arrange the occupationalsafety and health at the mine and which shall be under the supervision of the TechnicalMine Manager.

Article 24Tasks of the Occupational

Safety and Health DepartmentThe occupational safety and health department shall be responsible for the following :

a. to collect data and record details of any accident or dangerous occurrence, thecondition before the accident occurred, the cause of an accident, accidentanalysis, and accident prevention;

b. to collect data concerning the areas and activities requiring stricter supervisionwith the intention of providing suggestions to the Technical Mine Managerregarding mining methods and working procedures, mining equipment, and theuse of detection equipment as well as personal protection equipment.

c. to provide information and instructions on occupational safety and health to allmine workers by means of meetings, lectures, discussions, films, publications,and the like;

d. where necessary, to form and train members of a Mine Rescue Team.

e. to formulate accident statistics and

f. to evaluate occupational safety and health.

27

Article 25The Occupational Safetyand Health Committee

In order to complete the tasks as required in Article 23, the mine safety and healthdepartment shall establish a committee with the following tasks :

a. to carry out regular joint inspections into every aspect of occupational safety andhealth as well as any related issues encountered at the mine and propose measuresaimed at overcoming such issues.

b. to organise joint inspections of work sites to enable the committee to fulfil itsfunction.

Part SevenMine Workers

Article 26Qualifications

(1) Mine workers shall meet the requirements of the nature of the position to be givento them and must be in mental and physical good health.

(2) It is prohibited for female mine workers to work in underground mines except forthose working in health services, those carrying out internships or research andwho have obtained a recommendation from the Technical Mine Manager.

(3) It is prohibited to assign a mine worker to work alone in any isolated place orwhere there are unexpected dangers (except where direct means ofcommunication with other workers in the vicinity have been made available).

(4) It is prohibited to employ mine workers who are sick or who due to any reasonare not able to work normally.

(5) Where an investigation by the Mine Inspector, Technical Mine Manager orUnderground Mine Manager, reveals that a mine worker is discovered to havewilfully violated this Ministerial Decree, the said mine worker may be subject topenalties in accordance with the prevailing stipulations.

28

Article 27Health Checks

(1) Mine workers shall be entitled to health checks which shall be the responsibilityof the company.

(2) Mine workers shall undergo regular health checks (comprehensive checks) by anauthorised doctor.

(3) Underground mine workers shall undergo health checks no less than two times ayear.

(4) Mine workers who work in areas that may endanger the lungs, shall undergospecial health checks.

(5) Based on the existing regulations, the Chief Mines Inspector may order frequenthealth checks for mine workers handling dangerous materials by an authorisedphysician.

Article 28Education and Training

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall have a plan containing programs for trainingnew workers, mine workers with new duties, training for dangerous situations andannual refresher training or other education and training as stipulated by the ChiefMine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager may conduct his own education and training asrequired in paragraph (1), alone or in conjunction with government authorities orother official bodies, and such education and training must be appropriate to theactivities and type of work at the mining operation.

(3) Every education and training program as intended in paragraph (1), shall obtainprior approval from the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 29

(1) Education and training programs as required in Article 28, shall at the very leastinclude subjects on the following :

a. the responsibilities of a mine worker;

b. the authority and responsibilities of a supervisor;

c. introduction to the work environment;

29

d. escape and emergency evacuation plans, fire warning and fire fighting;

e. health and safety aspects of duties to be assigned;

f. danger identification and avoidance;

g. the dangers of electricity and machinery;

h. first aid; and

i. the danger of noise, dust and heat and protective measures.

(2) Education and training programs as required in paragraph (1), for undergroundmines shall include additional subjects on the following :

a. safe working procedures;

b. care and use of mine lamps;

c. basic ventilation knowledge;

d. support rules and basic support practices;

e. mine evacuation procedures during an emergency situation;

f. the use of self-rescuers; and

g. any hazards as well as how to detect combustible and noxious gases

(3) Beside the lessons mentioned in Paragraph (1), additional subjects for educationand training may be required based on the activities and nature of work at themine.

Article 30

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall carry out education and training forsupervisors covering at the very least the following subjects :

a. occupational safety and health regulations;

b. safety management;

c. safety rules and safe working procedures

d. danger identification and avoidance;

30

e. emergency situation measures and rescue procedures;

f. self rescue and breathing apparatus;

g. the dangers of machinery and electricity;

h. fire prevention and control

i. first aid in an accident and;

j. the environmental impact of activities.

(2) In addition to the subjects as required in paragraph (1) specifically forunderground mine supervisors, the following additional subjects shall be covered:

a. safe working procedures;

b. the care and use of mine lamps;

c. basic ventilation knowledge;

d. support rules and basic support practices;

e. mine evacuation procedures during an emergency situation;

f. the use of self-rescuers and breathing devices and

g. any hazards as well as how to detect combustible and noxious gases

Article 31Attendance List of the Mine Workers

(1) The attendance of every mine worker shall be recorded or any other means maybe used to record the time and workplace.

(2) The record as required in paragraph (1), shall be carried out at the mine office orany other place in the proximity of the mining operation.

31

Article 32Obligations

(1) Mine workers shall comply with occupational safety and health regulations.

(2) Mine workers shall carry out their work in accordance with safe workingprocedures.

(3) While at work mine workers shall :

a. consider and safeguard their own safety as well as that of others who may beaffected by their actions and

b. take immediate measures and or report immediately to the supervisor anysituation which they consider may lead to danger.

(4) Mine workers who witness or hear of any deviation from the implementation ofwork as intended in paragraph (3), shall notify the supervisor on dutyimmediately.

(5) Mine workers shall use and maintain personal protective equipment in theimplementation of their duties.

(6) Provide factual information when requested by the Mine Inspector or theTechnical Mine Manager.

(7) Mine workers shall be entitled to voice objections to their superiors where healthand safety requirements are not being met.

Article 33Actions Required to Prevent Hazardous Occurrences

Every mine worker shall :

1) Consider and safeguard his own health and safety as well as that of others whomay be affected by his/her actions or his/her absence at the workplace;

2) Carry out given instructions in the interests of his/her own safety and that ofothers;

3) Use safety and personal protective equipment correctly;

4) Report immediately to his/her direct superiors any situation which he/she believeswill lead to danger and which cannot be overcome him/herself and

32

5) Report every work or work related accident or injury.

Article 34

(1) Mine workers who see any danger which they believe will cause immediatedanger to any other worker shall inform the other worker.

(2) Any mine worker informed of the presence of danger shall move awayimmediately.

(3) The previous shift supervisor shall inform the following shift supervisor of thepresence of any dangers in a written report.

Part EightMining Facilities

Article 35Mine Office

(1) A mine office shall be built at or in the vicinity of any mining operation or part ofit where mining work is done regularly.

(2) Mine offices as required in paragraph (1) shall be provided with maps related tothe general mining operation.

(3) At or in the vicinity of the mine office shall be provided a place to post :

a. notices required by legislative regulations and

b. notices which are required by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 36Accommodations

Mining operations located in remote areas shall provide accommodations for the mineworkers that is both appropriate and meet health requirements.

33

Part NineFirst Aid

Article 37Health Treatment and

First Aid

(1) A fully equipped health and first aid station shall be provided at or in the vicinityof the mine office.

(2) The health and first aid station as required in paragraph (1), shall meet thefollowing requirements.

a. adequate space;

b. be easily reached;

c. easily accessible by stretcher;

d. sufficient lighting and ventilation;

e. separated from areas used for other purposes and

f. used only for first aid treatment.

(3) Based on specific considerations, the Chief Mine Inspector may grant writtenapproval to deviate from the provisions in paragraph (2).

(4) An ambulance or such specific vehicle shall be made available and ready forimmediate use when required.

Article 38Supervision of the Health and

First Aid Station

(1) The first aid station shall be supervised by a nurse or health expert or by a personwho possesses at the very least an First Aid Certificate.

(2) The supervisor of the first aid station shall be available at any time. When thesupervisor is not able to always be present, the appointment of a capablereplacement must be provided for.

Part Ten

34

Mine Accidentsand Dangerous Occurrences

Article 39

An accident is a mining accident when the following conditions are given :

a. the accident must have actually occurred;

b. must have caused injury to a mine worker or any person granted a permit by theTechnical Mine Manager;

c. must be the result of activities of the mining operation;

d. must have occurred during the working hours of the mine worker injured or at anytime for any person granted a permit and

e. must have occurred within the area of the activities of the mining operation or theproject area.

Article 40Classification of Mining

Accident Injuries

Mining accidents shall be recorded and classified into the following categories :

a. Minor

Any injury resulting from a mining accident which causes the mine worker to nolonger be able to carry out his/her normal duties for more than one day and lessthan three weeks, including Sundays and holidays;

b. Serious

1) any injury resulting from a mining accident which causes the mine worker tono longer be able to carry out his/her normal duties for more than three weeksincluding Sundays and holidays;

2) any injury resulting from a mining accident which causes the mine worker tobecome an invalid and who can no longer carry out his/her original duties and

3) irrespective of any duration of absence, any mining accident causing one ormore of the following injuries :

35

a) Fractures of skull, spine, pelvis, lower arm, upper arm, leg or foot.

b) Internal haemorrhage or unconsciousness caused by oxygen deficiency;

c) Severe wounds or lacerations likely to cause permanent disability;

d) Any dislocation of any joint which had never previously occurred;

c. Fatal.

any accident causing the death of a mine worker within 24 hours calculated fromthe time the accident occurred.

Article 41Reporting Requirements

(1) Regardless of how minor the nature of the injury, any injury of a mine workershall be reported to the first aid or health care station for medical examination andtreatment before leaving the work.

(2) Injury reports and the medical treatment thereof as required in paragraph (1) shallbe recorded in a book provided specifically for that purpose.

(3) When a mining accident occurs which causes a serious injury or death, theTechnical Mine Manager shall forthwith notify the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 42

(1) Mining accidents shall be investigated by the Technical Mine Manager or anyappointed person within 48 hours, and the findings of the said investigation shallbe recorded in the accident book.

(2) Mining accidents shall be recorded in a specified form and must be sent to theChief Mine Inspector.

Article 43Notification of Dangerous Occurrences

(1) Dangerous occurrences that may be life endangering or which may obstructproduction shall be reported as soon as possible by the Technical Mine Managerto the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall take immediate measures to eleminate thedangerous occurrence as required in paragraph (1) of this Article.

Article 44

36

Specifications of aDangerous Occurrences

Dangerous occurrences at open pit mines, mining and drilling dredges are defined asfollows :

a. Collapse of, overturning of or the failure of any load bearing crane or liftingappliance;

b. pressure vessels :

explosion, collapse or bursting of any closed vessel in which the interior pressurewas above or below atmospheric pressure;

c. electrical short circuit or overload attended by fire or explosions that resulted inthe stoppage of the plant involved for more than 24 hours;

d. explosion or fire :

an explosion of fire occurring in any plant or place which resulted in the stoppageof the plant or suspension of normal work in the place for more than 24 hours,where such explosion or fire was caused by the ignition of process materials,by-products or finished products.

e. escape of hazardous substances :

the sudden or uncontrolled release of one tonne or more of highly flammable orpoisonous substances, gas or liquid from any system, plant or pipeline ;

f. collapse of any scaffolding :

complete or partial collapse of any scaffolding the height of which exceeds 5meters from the floor ;

g. the collapse of any building or structure;

h. explosions :

premature or unintended detonation of explosive materials;

i. pipelines :

damage which may cause human injury or serious damage to property;

j. accidents caused by the overturning of vehicles carrying hazardous materialsalong mine or production roads.

37

k. accidents caused by any breathing apparatus being worn that causes the wearer tobe incapable of breathing freely, or the failure of such breathing apparatus tofunction causing the wearer to suffer oxygen deficiency;

l. accidents involving buildings or equipment coming into contact with un-insulatedhigh voltage overhead electrical lines ;

m. any accident caused by a collision between a locomotive and any other vehicle;

n. the collapse of a coal bunker.

o. any passenger water craft, working barge or mining dredge that sinks oroverturns;

p. any incident where any person is injured as the result of an explosion or thedetonation of explosives or explosive equipment which causes the victim toreceive treatment for his/her injuries.

q. any incident where any object is thrown beyond the boundaries of the mine as theresult of any blasting activities and in which any person is affected or who may beexposed to danger and

r. any stockpile which becomes unstable or any fire or other incident whichindicates that any stockpile is not safe or indicates signs of being unsafe.

Article 45

Dangerous occurrences related to underground mines are defined as follows :

a. any burning of gas underground;

b. any underground fire;

c. any surface fire which threatens the operation of the hoist or haulage equipmentinstalled in the shaft or any mechanically operated equipment used forunderground ventilation;

d. outburst of gas together with coal or other solids into mine workings exceptwhere such bursts are carried out intentionally;

e. any breakage of ropes, chains, couplings, slings, guide rope, suspensions gear orany other equipment related to the transportation of people through the shaft oroutlet;

38

f. any breakage of ropes, chains, couplings, slings, guide ropes, suspension gear orany other equipment related to the transportation of people underground, or anyconveyor designed to transport people which experiences damage of the belt,slings, or any other equipment related to the said conveyor, while carrying people;

g. any conveyance which turns over while carrying people;

h. except where to carry out scheduled maintenance, any stoppage of any ventilationequipment, which causes a significant reduction in ventilation for more than 30minutes in any lamp mine, or for a period of two hours in any other mine(auxiliary fans are not included in this requirement);

i. the collapse of any hoist head frame, hoist engine room, fan machine room orbunker;

j. breathing apparatus :

1) any breathing apparatus or any other apparatus which has a similar use, or anyindividual rescue equipment being used which fails to work safely as designedand

2) when upon use or during use of any breathing apparatus or any individualrescue equipment in the mine, any person receives first aid treatment causedby a health problem or suspected bad health.

k. any accident caused by the use of explosives and any other mine accident whereany person suffers injury caused by the detonation or exploding of materials orblasting equipment or which causes any person to receive first aid treatment inthe mine ;

l. inrush of gas or water :

1) any inrush of noxious or flammable gas from old workings, or

2) any inrush from any source of water or material which flows when wet.

m. any incident caused by an underground locomotive (not being used for shuntingor testing purposes), which stops suddenly not caused by safety devices ornormal breaking equipment, the occurrence of which may cause an accident.

n. the use of evacuation equipment in an emergency situation : any incidentnecessitating the use of any apparatus or arrangements provided for emergencyegress under the requirements of the “means of egress” regulations, except fortraining purposes and

39

o. the collapse of safety pillars or support systems which causes the disruption ofnormal work over a period of more than 24 hours.

Article 46Investigation of Mining Accidents

and Dangerous Occurrences

(1) For investigation purposes, the Technical Mine Manager is not permitted tochange the state of the site, and/or the condition of disrepair of equipment causedby any accident or dangerous occurrence, except in order to provide aid.

(2) Where it is considered necessary in the interests of the continuance of work, thescene of the accident or dangerous occurrence may be changed with the approvalof the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 47Mining Accident Statistics

(1) Mining accident statistics shall be submitted annually based on the frequency andseriousness of accidents that befall mine workers and which shall be calculated by:

a. the number of accident victims divided by the total number of man hoursworked x 1,000,000 and

b. the total number of lost days divided by the total number of man hoursworked x 1,000,000.

(2) Accident statistics as required in paragraph (1), shall be forwarded by theTechnical Mine Manager to the Chief Mine Inspector no later than one monthafter the end of the calendar year.

40

Part ElevenHealth

Article 48Change Room

(1) At specific divisions of work, based on health considerations, mine workers shallchange their clothing and clean their bodies before leaving their place of work.

(2) In the implementation of the requirement as specified in paragraph (1), theOperator/Technical Mine Manager shall provide a change room and a showerhouse both of which must always be kept clean.

Article 49The Provision of Water

(1) Water which is provided to clean and wash the body shall be clean; used watershall be disposed of into waste facilities.

(2) Drinking water that meets health requirements shall be available free of charge ina sufficient quantities for mine workers during working hours.

(3) Drinking water containers shall be clean and be equipped with a proper coverwhich is capable of closing automatically.

Article 50Toilets

Toilet facilities shall be provided at the mine and manufactured in such a way as to meethealth requirements.

Article 51Alcoholic Beverages

(1) It is forbidden to consume alcoholic beverages or any intoxicating beverage whileat work.

(2). Mine workers under the influence of alcohol shall be prohibited from working.

41

Chapter IIExplosives and Blasting

Part OneThe Explosives Magazine

Article 52Explosives Magazine Permit

(1) Explosives stored at the mine may only be stored in a magazine for which apermit has been obtained and which has a specified capacity as stipulated by theChief Mine Inspector in writing. Where the explosives magazine is locatedoutside the area of the activities of the mining operation and which will be usedfor mining activities, written approval shall be obtained from the Chief MineInspector.

(2) The use of explosives for any other activity shall be approved by the Chief MineInspector.

(3) The explosives magazine permit application as required in paragraph (1) shallhave attached :

a. 1 : 100 scale construction drawings of the explosives magazine showing aerialand side views as well as anything else required in accordance with themaximum capacity of the explosives magazine being applied for and

b. 1 : 5000 scale location maps of the explosives magazine showing safedistances.

(4) Applications for underground explosives magazines shall be accompanied bymaps and specifications showing the construction plans and location.

(5) Detonators shall not be stored in any magazine in which other explosives arestored, but shall be stored separately in a separate magazine where storage ofdetonators is permitted. Detonator magazines must be of the same construction asexplosives magazines.

(6) The requirement to obtain an explosives magazine permit shall be stipulated bythe Chief Mine Inspector.

(7) The period of validity of the explosives magazine permit is:

a. a two year temporary explosives magazine permit;

42

b. a five year transit explosives magazine permit;

c. a five year main explosives magazine permit.

(8) The Mine Inspector may cancel an explosives magazine permit for any explosivesmagazine that no longer fulfils the requirements.

(9) Where mining activities cease or are stopped for a period of more than threemonths, the Technical Mine Manager shall notify the Chief Mine Inspector andthe magazine kept on continuous guard.

Article 53General Requirements

for Explosives Magazines

(1) Surface explosives magazines shall meet the environmental safe distancerequirements.

(2) Where two or more magazines are located in the same area, each magazine shallmeet the minimum safe distance requirements.

(3) Where the distance between two or more magazines fails to conform to therequirements of paragraph (2), safe distances as specified in paragraph (1) shallapply for the total number of explosives stored in one unit or group of magazines.

Article 54Security at the Explosives Magazine

(1) Every explosives magazine shall be equipped with :

a. a thermometer placed in the storage room;

b. “smoking prohibited” and “authorised persons only” signs ;

c. only one entrance ;

d. fire extinguishers located at readily available locations outside the magazine.

(2) The explosives magazine shall be surrounded by lighting and be guarded by atrustworthy person twenty four hours a day. A guard post shall be built outsidethe magazine and must facilitate easy supervision of the magazine surroundings.

(3) A security fence equipped with a lockable gate shall be installed around theexplosives magazine.

43

(4) Entry to the magazine shall only be permitted when using a explosion prooflamps.

(5) It is prohibited to wear metal soled footwear, carry lighters/matches or any othergood that can produce sparks in the magazine.

(6) The detonator sensitive explosives magazine shall be surrounded by a berm twometers in height and one meter in width at its highest point. Where the entrancedirectly faces the magazine door, a berm shall be built so that entrance can onlybe made from the side.

(7) Where the explosives magazine is built by excavating solid materials, the bermbuilt on all sides shall be in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (6).

(8) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) the following stipulations shallapply for Ammonium Nitrate and ANFO :

a. magazines with a capacity of less than 5,000 kilograms shall have automaticfire fighting systems, and

b. magazines with a capacity of 5,000 kilograms or more shall additionally beprovided with hydrants outside the magazine which is connected to a highpressure water source.

Part TwoRequirements for Surface

Explosives Magazines

Article 55Arrangement of Rooms

(1) Magazines in the form of buildings to store detonator sensitive explosives shallconsist of two rooms. :

a. a rear room for the storage of explosives and

b. a front room for the receipt and issue of explosives.

(2) The rear room door shall not directly face the front room door and both doorsshall be equipped with strong locks.

(3) Rooms of explosives magazines for other types may consist of one room but aspecific place shall be provided for the examination and/or counting ofexplosives. The location shall be in the vicinity of, but not in the same building.

44

Article 56Temporary Explosives

Magazines

(1) Detonator sensitive explosives magazines :

a. magazines in the form of a building :

1) must be constructed from fire resistant materials;

2) must be constructed with a roof as light as possible;

3) must be constructed with solid walls;

4) shall be provided with ventilation holes at the upper and lower part of thebuilding;

5) must have only one door;

6) must be fitted with a lightning conductor with a grounding resistancelower than 5 ohms;

7) must be free of combustible material within a radius of 30 meters;

8) must have a floor made from non sparking materials and

9) must not have exposed metal within three meters from the floor.

b. magazines in the form of containers :

1) must be constructed from metal plate with a minimum thickness of 3millimetres;

2) shall be provided with ventilation holes at the upper and lower part of thebuilding;

3) the interior must be layered with wood;

4) must be constructed in such a way so that rain water is kept out;

5) shall have only one door and

6) must be fitted with a lightning conductor with grounding resistance lowerthan 5 ohms.

45

c. the capacity of temporary explosives magazines shall not exceed :

1) 4000 kilograms for magazines which are buildings and

2) 2000 kilograms for magazines which are containers.

(2) Primer sensitive explosives magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),except letter a item 3) and shall have a capacity of no greater than 10,000kilograms and

b. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),except letter b item 3) and shall have a capacity of no less than 5000kilograms.

(3) explosive ingredient magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),except letter a item 3) and shall have a capacity of no greater than 10,000kilograms and

b. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),except letter b item 3) and shall have a capacity of no greater than 10,000kilograms.

Article 57Transit Magazines

(1) Detonator sensitive explosives shall not be permitted to be stored in a transitexplosives magazine and shall be stored directly in the main magazine.

(2) Primer sensitive explosives magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of Article 56paragraph (1), except letter a item 8) of this regulation and shall have acapacity of no greater than 500,000 kilograms and

b. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1),except letter b item 3).

(3) Explosive ingredients magazines :

46

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of Article 56paragraph (1), except letter a items 3) and 8) and

b. magazines which are containers or tanks shall only be placed in a location forwhich a permit has been obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector and the saidexplosive ingredients shall be stored in the original containers. The capacityof each container or tank shall not exceed 20,000 kilograms and the capacityof each magazine shall not be greater than 2,000,000 kilograms.

(4) Magazines which are in a building and for the storage of explosive ingredientsshall meet the requirements of Article 56 paragraph (1), except letter a items 3)and 8) with the following additional stipulations :

a. (I) the floor shall not be made from wood or any material that absorbsAmmonium Nitrate.

(ii) the building and surrounding areas shall be dry and

(iii) the interior of the magazine as well as the pallets shall not be madefrom galvanised iron, zinc, copper or lead.

b. the capacity of the magazine shall not exceed 2,000,000 kilograms.

Article 58Main Magazine

(1) Detonator sensitive explosives storage magazines shall meet the requirements ofArticle 56 paragraph (1) letter a and have a capacity of no greater than 150,000kilograms.

(2) Primer sensitive explosives magazines shall meet the requirements of Article 56paragraph (1) letter a and have a capacity of no greater than 500,000 kilograms.

(3) Explosive ingredients magazines :

a. magazines which are buildings shall meet the requirements of Article 56paragraph (1), except letter a item 3) of this regulation and shall have acapacity of no greater than 500,000 kilograms;

b. magazines which are tanks shall meet the following requirements :

1) the tank shall not be made from copper, lead, zinc or galvanised iron;

47

2) the upper area of the tank shall be fitted with an opening for use as aninspection hole and a special place shall be fitted for the operator to carryout inspections;

3) the discharge pipe shall be located at the bottom of the tank and

4) the upper area of the tank shall be fitted with a valve to release excessiveair pressure.

c. magazines which are containers shall meet the requirements of Article 56paragraph (1) except letter b) item 3).

Article 59Safe Distance

(1) The method for the determination of safe distance for detonator sensitiveexplosives magazines shall be as follows :

a. every 1,000 No. 8 detonators shall be equivalent to 1 (one) kilogram ofdetonator sensitive materials. Detonators with a force exceeding that of No. 8detonators shall meet the manufacturer’s requirements and

b. every 330 meters of detonating cord with specifications of 50 to 60 grainsshall be equivalent to 4 kilograms of detonator sensitive explosives.

(2) Magazine safe distance as required in Article 53 paragraph (1), Article 56paragraph (1) and Article 58 paragraph (1) shall be determined as follows :

48

Minimum Safe Distances for theLocation of Detonator Sensitive

Explosives MagazinesDISTANCE (IN METERS)

ALLOWABLE CAPACITY (INKILOGRAMS)

I II III

1 2 3 4 5

1 50

100

500

1,000

60

71

120

152

24

29

48

56

45

43

90

113

2 2,000

3,000

4,000

5,000

6,000

7,000

8,000

9,000

10,000

191

219

240

260

263

266

270

282

293

63

71

75

78

81

83

84

86

87

142

164

180

194

206

217

227

236

244

3 15,000

20,000

25,000

30,000

339

383

420

455

102

114

126

137

280

308

331

352

49

4 40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

509

545

557

567

581

597

609

153

164

167

170

174

180

183

388

418

444

467

489

509

527

5 125,000

150,000

647

700

195

225

567

650

Notes :

I. Buildings inhabited by people, hospitals, other buildings/offices.

II. Combustible liquid storage facilities, tanks, workshops and highways.

III. Railway lines, public streets or roads.

(3) Magazine safe distance as required in Article 53 paragraph (2), Article 56paragraphs (2) and (3), Article 57 paragraphs (2) and (3), as well as Article 58paragraphs (2) and (3) shall be determined as follows :

50

Minimum Safe Distances BetweenExplosives Magazines.

MaximumAllowableWeight for

Minimum Distance Between DetonatorSensitive Explosives Magazines and

Minimum DistanceBetween

DetonatorDetonatorSensitive

Explosives

ExplosiveIngredientsMagazines

Primer SensitiveExplosivesMagazines

SensitiveExplosivesMagazines

(kilograms) (meters) (meters) (meters)1 2 3 450 1 4 550 1.5 3.5 8

300 2 6 10500 2 7 12800 2.5 8 14

1,000 3 10 151,500 3 11 172,000 3.5 12 193,000 3.5 13 214,000 4 14 245,000 4.5 16 266,000 4.5 17 278,000 5 18 30

10,000 5.5 19 3212,500 6 21 3515,000 6 22 3717,500 7 24 3920,000 7 25 4125,000 7.5 27 4530,000 8 30 4835,000 8.5 31 5140,000 9 33 5545,000 10 36 5850,000 11 38 6160,000 11 40 6870,000 12 44 7580,000 13 48 8190,000 14 52 88100,000 16 57 95125,000 18 67 111150,000 21 76 120

(4) Magazine safe distance as intended in article 57 paragraph (4) shall be determinedas follows :

51

Safe Distances forExplosive Ingredients Magazines

Object

Safe Distance forMagazines with Permitted

Capacities (Meters)Less than 50

TonsBetween 50 - 150

TonsBetween 150 - 2000

TonsWorkshops andother work places

8 12 15

Main roads 8 8 15

Public places 15 25 50

Mining operation 8 15 50boundaries

Explosive ingredientmixing sites 10 10 10

Other hazardous 8 15 15items (fuel tanksetc.)

(5) Magazine safe distances as specified in paragraph (4) shall also apply to thedetermination of distances between magazines as intended in Article 35 paragraph(1), Article 56 paragraph (3), Article 57 paragraphs (2) and (3), as well as Article58 paragraph (3).

52

Part ThreeRequirements for Underground

Explosives Magazines

Article 60

(1) Underground magazines shall be built in a location that is dry, free from thedanger of fire, far from the main intake airway, protected from the possibility ofrock fall and flooding, and shall be separated from work sites in the mine.

(2) The magazine shall be constructed sufficiently sturdy with even walls and befitted with air vents which allow sufficient air flow.

(3) The location of underground magazines shall maintain a minimum straight linedistance of :

a. 100 meters from any mine shaft or any other explosives magazines;

b. 25 meters from any work site;

c. 10 meters from any raise or shaft which is used for people and transportationand

d. 50 meters from the location of blasting operations.

Article 61Arrangement of Rooms

Underground magazines shall meet the following requirements :

a. be dry and level;

b. have only one door that is both strong and lockable

c. have two rooms joined by a lockable door :

1) the front room near the entrance door shall be used to receive and to issue ortake explosives, and to inspect and count explosives to be used. This roomshall be fitted with a counter or desk and a explosives record book and

2) the rear room shall be sufficiently spacious and be used solely for the purposeof storing explosives.

Part Four

53

Explosive Storage Procedures


(1) Explosives shall be stored in their original packaging and the date of the deliveryto the magazine shall be recorded clearly and legibly on the packaging withoutmoving the said packaging.

(2) Detonators shall be stored separately from other explosives in a detonatorsensitive explosives magazine.

(3) Detonator sensitive explosives shall neither be stored in magazines for primersensitive explosives nor in magazines for explosive ingredients.

(4) Primer sensitive explosives may be stored in a detonator sensitive explosivesmagazine but shall not be stored in magazines for explosive ingredients.

(5) Explosive ingredients may also be stored in a primer sensitive explosivesmagazine and or in a detonator sensitive explosives magazine.

(6) Ammunition and other types thereof shall only be stored along with otherexplosives in an explosives magazine when stacked separately and any partthereof made from metal shall be coated with copper or aluminium plate orcovered with concrete to a height of three meters from the floor.

(7) The room temperature for the explosives room for :

a. explosive ingredients must not exceed 55 degrees Celsius and

b. detonator sensitive explosives must not exceed 35 degrees Celsius.

Article 63Magazine Employees and

Explosives Security

(1) The Technical Mine Manager of every mine at which explosives are used shall :

a. ensure that explosives are securely stored at the mine;

b. appoint a capable person as an administrator of explosives at the mine and thesaid person shall possess at the very least a Class II Blaster Certificate andshall comprehend all the regulations for explosives and

54

c. ensure that a sufficient number of explosives magazine administrators areappointed, in order to ensure good supervision of the magazine.

(2) The magazine and explosives shall only be handled by an administrator 21 yearsor older, who has experience in handling and using explosives and who haswritten authority issued by the Technical Mine Manager to act as the explosivesmagazine administrator. His name shall be registered in the Mine Book.

(3) The explosives magazine administrator shall carry out checks on the receipt,storage and issuing of explosives.

(4) The explosives magazine administrator shall ensure that the explosives magazineis always locked except when carrying out checks, inventories, and the receiptand issuing of explosives.

(5) No unauthorised person shall be permitted to enter an explosive magazine, exceptfor Mines Inspectors and Police.

(6) Only shotfirers and persons in charge of the explosive magazine are permitted tohandle explosives.

Article 64Explosives Record Book

(1) An explosives log book shall be provided in the explosives magazine containingthe following :

a. the names, types and total amounts of explosives as well as the date of receiptthereof and

b. the location and amount of explosives in storage.

(2) A log book shall be provided in the explosives magazine to be systematicallyupdated and in which the following details shall be recorded :

a. the name and signature of the administrator granted authority to receive andissue explosives whose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

b. the total amount of every type of explosives and or detonator entering orleaving the explosives magazine;

c. the date and time explosives are issued or are returned;

d. the name and signature of the employee receiving explosives;

55

e. the location of the blasting area or the intended use of explosives beingrequested/issued.

(3) a. The Technical Mine Manager shall forward quarterly reports to the ChiefMine Inspector regarding the stock and use of explosives and

b. the format of the quarterly report as intended in item (a) of this paragraphshall be determined by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) The requirements as intended in paragraphs (1) and (2) of this Article shall bekept in archives for no less than one year.

Article 65The Receipt and Issue of Explosives

(1) When taking explosives, an employee shall reject or return any explosivesconsidered damaged or hazardous or not fit for use.

(2) The receipt and issuing of explosives shall be carried out in the front room of theexplosives magazine and during such activities the adjoining door shall be closed.

(3) The types of explosives required shall be issued from the magazine in accordancewith the order of the date of receipt.

(4) Explosives and detonators issued from the magazine shall be in good conditionand the number shall not exceed the number required in one work shift.

(5) Unused explosives at the end of a work shift shall be immediately returned to themagazine. Re-opening the packaging of returned explosives shall not benecessary, where the said explosives remain in the same original packaging orboxes as at the time of issue.

(6) Damaged explosives shall be immediately be safely destroyed in accordance withthe requirements of existing regulations.

(7) Data on damaged explosives shall include the amount, type, brand, and anyvisible damage shall be reported to the Chief Mine Inspector for remedyproposals.

(8) Safety fuses shall be inspected at the time of receipt to check the possibility ofdamage and check the speed of ignition. Following a specific period of timesafety fuses shall be re-inspected to ensure that the said safety fuses are in goodcondition and be checked for their speed of ignition. The proper ignition speed ofsafety fuses per one meter is between 90 and 110 seconds or as per the factoryspecifications.

56

(9) Empty packaging or other packaging materials shall not be stored in theexplosives magazine or in the detonator magazine.

(10) Opening the packaging of explosives and detonators shall be carried out in thefront area of the explosives magazine.

Article 66Storage of Detonator Sensitive Explosives

(1) Where detonator sensitive explosives are stored in a magazine which is a buildingthe said explosives shall :

a. be kept in the original packaging and

b. be placed on a bench no less than 30 centimetres in height from the floor and :

1) be stacked no more than 5 boxes high, 4 boxes across and lengthwaysaccording to the size of the building.

2) wood supports of no less than 1.5 centimetres thickness shall be laidbetween each layer of boxes.

3) the distance between stacks shall be no less than 80 centimetres and

4) a space of at least 30 centimetres shall be kept between the various stacksand the wall of the magazine.

(2) Where stored in a magazine in the form of a container detonator sensitiveexplosives shall:

a. be stacked/piled neatly ensuring the free flow of air around the stacks.

b. not have a storage capacity exceeding 2,000 kilograms.

57

Article 67Storage of Primer

Sensitive Explosives

(1) Where primer sensitive explosives are stored in a magazine which is a building,the following stipulations shall be met :

a. shall be kept in the original packaging;

b. packaged explosives whose weight is approximately 25 kilograms shall bestored in accordance with the requirements in Article 66 paragraph (1);

c. packaged explosives weighing around 1,000 kilograms :

1) shall be stored with the original wood pallet;

2) the receipt and issuing of the said explosives shall not be carried outmanually and

3) shall be stored in stacks with the following requirements :

a) the stacks shall be no higher than the height of 3 (three) packages;

b) an empty space of at least 75 centimetres shall be kept between thestacks and the walls of the magazine and

c) an aisle free from obstacles shall be provided in order that liftingequipment may work freely and safely.

d. to exceed the stack requirements of paragraph (1) letter c item 3, priorapproval shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector and

e. no lifting equipment may be left in the magazine without an operator.

(2) Where primer sensitive explosives are stored in a magazine that is a container thefollowing requirements shall be met :

a. shall be kept in the original packaging;

b. packaged explosives weighing around 25 kilograms shall be stored inaccordance with the requirements in Article 66 paragraph (1) and

c. shall have a capacity not exceeding 5,000 kilograms.

58

Article 68Storage of Explosive Ingredients

(1) Storage in magazines that are building :

a. the requirements of Article 66 paragraph (1) will apply to packaged explosiveingredients weighing 30 kilograms , except that the height of stacks shall notexceed 10 sacks while the width must not exceed 8 sacks;

b. the requirements of Article 67 paragraph (1), letter c will apply to allexplosive ingredients weighing more than 1,000 kilograms, and

c. motorised lifting equipment shall not be left in the magazine without theoperator.

(2) Storage in magazines that are containers :

a. shall be stacked neatly in order to ensure the free flow of air around the stacksand

b. shall not exceed 20,000 kilograms.

(3) Storage of explosive ingredients in the original containers shall meet thefollowing requirements :

a. the container shall be placed only at the permitted location as required inArticle 57 paragraph (3) letter b and c;

b. containers shall be piled orderly and properly in order that the doors can beopened.

c. prior approval shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector to createstacks of more than two containers.

(4) Explosive ingredients in the form of liquid or in gel form may only be stored in amagazine in the form of a tank.

Article 69Storage of Detonators

(1) The stock of detonators shall equal the stock of explosives.

(2) Damaged detonators shall be immediately destroyed following the requirementsof the prevailing regulations.

59

(3) It is prohibited to stored detonators along with other explosive materials.

Article 70Underground Storage

(1) All explosives kept underground shall be stored in explosive magazines. Wherethe amount of explosives is less than 50 kilograms such explosives may be storedin a container as specified in Article 60 paragraph (3).

(2) Explosives stored in underground explosives magazines shall not exceed thequantity needed for two days and two nights, and the amount shall not exceed5,000 kilograms.

(3) Where no underground magazine is made available and where usage exceeds 50kilograms in a period of less than 24 hours, a temporary explosives magazineshall be provided and it shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 71Magazine Inspections

At least once per week, the contents of explosives magazines shall be inspected in detailby the Technical Mine Manager or an authorised employee, and the findings shall beregistered in the explosives log book.

Part FiveTransportation

Article 72Transportation Rules

(1) Explosives shall be delivered and stored in the magazine within 24 hours fromtheir arrival in the mining operation activities area.

(2) It is prohibited to transport explosives to or from an explosives magazine oraround the mine, except in the original unopened or sealed container usedspecifically for that purpose. When there is any balance remaining in theexplosive container, it shall be returned immediately to the explosives magazine.

(3) The Chief Mine Inspector shall issue technical directives to regulate thetransportation, moving or forwarding of all types of explosives and detonatorswithin or outside the mining operational area.

60

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall formulate company regulations providing forthe transportation, moving and forwarding of explosives in accordance with thetechnical directives as intended in paragraph (1).

Part SixBlasting

Article 73Regulations for the Implementation

of Blasting Activities

(1) The Chief Mine Inspector shall issue technical directives regulating theimplementation of blasting work at the mine.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall formulate company regulations providing forthe implementation of blasting work at the mine as required in paragraph (1).

Article 74Equipment and Materials

(1) At every mine where explosives are used equipment and materials required toensure the safe implementation of blasting activities shall be provided.

(2) Equipment provided by the Technical Mine Manager shall be used duringblasting work.

(3) Any Technical Mine Manager or employee handling explosives at any time shall :

a. ensure that all equipment, including vehicles used for any work related toblasting is :

1) appropriate for the intended purpose thereof and

2) stored, inspected and maintained to ensure continued safe use.

b. ensure that the said explosives are handled safely.

(4) All blasting machines at the mine shall be equipped with a removable handle orkey without which it cannot be operated.

Article 75Appointment and Qualifications

of the Blaster

61

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint a person skilled and experienced inblasting work.

(2) Person as required in paragraph (1) shall be no younger than 21 years old andpossess a Blasting License issued by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The Blasting License shall only be valid for mines stated on the said license andthe name of the blaster shall be registered in the Mine Book.

(4) The permit will only be granted to a certified blaster.

(5) The Director General shall appoint a permanent committee for the examination ofblasters.

(6) The Director General shall create stipulations relating to the following :

a. working procedures of the examining committee;

b. the implementation of examinations;

c. qualifications of blaster course attendants;

d. blaster examination costs;

e. the classes of Blaster Certificates;

f. materials for the examination of blaster.

(7) Every blaster certificate granted by an authority in Indonesia or abroad may begiven recognition by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(8) Any certificate granted recognition as specified in paragraph (8) shall be equal invalue to a Blaster Certificate and may be used to obtain a Blaster License.

(9) Any blaster in possession of a Blasting License for any mine shall return the saidpermit via the Technical Mine Manager to the Chief Mine Inspector no later thanone month after the party concerned is no longer employed.

62

Article 76Blaster Courses

(1) In order to obtain experience in blasting work, the Technical Mine Manager shallprovide education facilities to any person who will be assigned to blasting workparticularly those who have yet to show their capabilities as blasters.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall take safety measures to ensure thatprospective blasters work under the continuous strict supervision of a blasterappointed for the purpose thereof.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager shall formulate a training program to be given toprospective blasters and shall ensure that the said program is carried out properly.

Article 77Blasting Work

(1) The Technical Mine Manager at any mine shall develop procedures for the use ofexplosives that cover:

a. the proper use and safety of explosives and

b. the specific requirements for the use of explosives as specified by the ChiefMine Inspector.

(2) The blaster who is assigned to carry out blasting or who supervises blasting workshall ensure that every stage of the said work is carried out safely and inaccordance with the regulations specified by the Chief Mine Inspector

(3) It is prohibited to carry out blasting work except by a blaster.

(4) It is prohibited to fill a blast hole or blast a previously blasted hole, except for thepurpose of handling a misfire in accordance with the specific requirements.

(5) It is prohibited to remove a detonator lead, safety fuse or any other system from ablast hole already loaded, and which is charged with a primer.

(6) It is prohibited to smoke or ignite flames within 10 meters of explosives.

(7) It is prohibited to use safety fuses for blasting at underground ore mines after thedate to be determined by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(8) Blasters who handle or supervise blasting shall ensure that no explosion results inexcessive blasting vibrations.

63

Article 78Sleeping Blasting

(1) Sleeping blasting may only be carried out in accordance with the followingrequirements:

a. no detonator shall be used in the blast hole and

b. the area to undergo the sleeping blasting shall be secured.

(2) Approval shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector where a detonator is tobe used in a blast hole in the implementation of a sleeping blast.

Article 79Misfires

(1) Where misfires occur the assigned blaster shall contact the supervisor who shall:

a. prohibit any person from entering the said hazardous area except the blaster orany other appointed person;

b. take appropriate measures to determine the cause thereof and handle the saidmisfire and

c. appoint an employee where necessary to take security measures or to preventthe theft of explosives or triggers thereof.

(2) An incident shall be deemed to be a misfire where :

a. pre-blast testing indicates irreparable broken continuity, or

b. a blast hole or part thereof fails to explode at the point of blasting.

64

Chapter IIIThe Working Environment

Part One


(1) The Technical Mine Manager of any mine has the duty to ensure that personnelare not exposed to health risks (due to airborne contaminants or harmful physicaland chemical agents).

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall develop a program for measuring airbornecontaminants, sampling for hazardous solids, as well as monitoring for noise,lighting and vibrations at the mining work site and any other place in or aroundthe mine.

Part TwoDust

Article 81Prevention

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. take necessary measures to minimise the occurrence of dust caused bydrilling, blasting, crushing of ore and rock material, and other work activitiesin the mine, as well as create company policies for dust suppression orcontrol.

b. require mine workers to wear the appropriate respiratory protective devices;

c. create company procedures on dust control at every work site, every loadingand stockpiling site, where ever materials are moved, every crushing site andany transport road which may be hazardous due to the impaired visibility.

d. establish company procedures regarding mechanical ventilation for workareas without airflow, dead-end shafts and any other place with poorventilation.

(2) At any time ore or rock material is loaded into trucks or moved at any work sitethe said load shall be kept moist with water or adequately covered to prevent dustbecoming airborne.

65

(3) Any equipment used to reduce dust shall only be operated or moved by anauthorised employee.

(4) Where according to the Mine Inspector dust caused by mining work may harm orendanger health and impair visibility, the said Mine Inspector may stipulatemeasures to be carried out to prevent, reduce dust or protect workers frominhaling such dust. The said stipulations shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

Article 82Testing

(1) The Chief Mine Inspector may stipulate requirements for dust concentrations atevery work site including on the type of equipment used, the calculable dustparticle size and the allowable threshold values for dust types.

(2) The analysis methods to determine the free silica content in dust shall beapproved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 83Personal Protective Equipment

(1) Protection of workers from exposure to contaminated air shall be carried out asbest as possible by means of pollution prevention, eradicating dust usingventilation fans or by means of diluting it with clean air. Where such controlmeasures are yet to be carried out, workers at the said site shall wear appropriaterespiratory protective devices.

(2) Where respiratory protective devices are used, respiratory selection, maintenance,training, fitting, supervision, cleaning and use thereof shall meet the requirementsissued by a recognized authority.

Article 84Combustible Dust

(1) Combustible dusts shall be cleaned away and not be allowed to accumulate on thesurface of any electrical equipment, buildings or any other facilities.

(2) The accumulation of airborne combustible dusts shall be prevented from reachinghazardous levels.

(3) A schedule for the cleaning and disposal of piles of accumulated combustibledusts shall be stipulated and implemented.

66

Part ThreeNoise and Vibrations

Article 85

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall take steps to reduce noise and vibration toacceptable levels and shall make hearing protective equipment available.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide for limitations on employee workinghours in accordance with the work place noise levels when hearing protectiveequipment is being worn.

(3) Any worker exposed to noise that exceeds threshold levels shall wear hearingprotective equipment.

(4) The Chief Mine Inspector shall stipulate the limits to be used as the criteria ordirective regarding noise and vibration levels permitted in the work placeenvironment.

(5) Based on the environment of the work place the Chief Mine Inspector shall makeprovisions for the following :

a. a work place noise and vibration level measurement programme shall beinstituted and implemented.

b. the measuring carried out and the methods used in the said programmeincluding equipment and the analysis method used;

c. the time and frequency of measurements and

d. the location at which measurements are taken.

67

Part FourHazardous and Noxious Materials

Article 86Handling, Storage and Labelling

(1) Where acids or corrosive or noxious chemical compounds or other substanceswhich may endanger workers are produced, moved, used or stored in any workarea, the Chief Mine Inspector shall develop working guidelines to reduce thedanger to the smallest possible degree for the handling or storage of the saidmaterials.

(2) At any location where materials as described in paragraph (1) can be found,conspicuous signs warning of the danger shall be posted and precautionarymeasures shall be taken.

(3) Any bottle or any other receptacle containing acids or noxious chemicals, shall belabelled according to the contents thereof.

(4) Materials that can create hazards if accidentally liberated from their containersshall be stored in a manner that minimises the danger..

(5) Chemicals, including concentrated acids and alkalis, shall be stored in a mannerto prevent accidental contact between the said substances or with any othersubstance which may cause serious reactions or which may produce hazardousvapours or gases.

(6) Water or solutions at the processing mill or laboratory shall be considered aspoisons except where labelled “Potable Water”.

(7) The handling of chemicals shall be carried out in accordance with the proceduresor instructions from the manufacturer. Any employee handling such chemicalsshall be given instructions regarding the danger as well as the methods oftreatment where injury occurs.

Article 87Hygiene and Health

(1) The Mine Inspector may request medical checks of workers, where noxious anddangerous materials are used, particularly at the processing plant when there ispotential for endangering worker health.

(2) Glass and other laboratory equipment shall not be permitted to be used as eating,drinking or cooking utensils.

68

(3) At any work place at which hazardous and noxious mixtures are used orproduced, neutralising agents and washing agents shall be made available insufficient quantities and number and stored in a conspicuous and reachable placeand a eye rinsing water tap must be installed. The packaging of the neutralisingagents and washing agents shall be labelled including instructions for the use ofthe contents thereof.

(4) At the work place as required in paragraph (3), every supervisor and a number ofworkers shall be trained in the administration of first aid specific to eye cleansersand neutralising agents, at the very least one person per working shift.

Article 88Prevention

(1) All hazardous materials and solutions shall be handled with care to reduce thepossibility of spillage.

(2) Containers of liquid ammonium or any chemical substance which may vaporiseand any chemical substance with hazardous vapours s shall not be filled beyond ¾of their capacity in order to avoid the formation of excessive pressure.

(3) Every spillage shall be cleaned away and disposed of immediately. Spillage ofrapidly reacting or hazardous chemical substances shall be cautiously rinsed orneutralised and cleaned away immediately.

Article 89Personal Protective Equipment

(1) Where precautionary measures as stipulated in the company regulations cannotcompletely provide for the total eradication of hazards, workers who remainunprotected from the said hazards shall wear personal protective equipment.

(2) Workers who handle and mix dangerous chemicals shall always wear respiratoryprotection and appropriate gloves.

(3) Additional precautionary measures shall be carried out when handlingconcentrated lime solutions, pulp and hazardous chemicals to prevent directcontact with the skin.

(4) Protective clothing for mine workers in laboratories shall be provided free ofcharge and shall be kept clean and hygienic.

Article 90

69

Other Precautionary Measures

(1) Reactive materials shall be stored in a sufficiently spacious room to prevent thebuild up of heat.

(2) Assay rooms or any other room in which noxious gases may be formed shall havea proper ventilation system.

(3) Extreme caution shall be taken when handling combustible chemicals or mixingacid solutions.

Article 91

(1) Vapours, mist, smoke and exhaust gases shall be suppressed and kept to a levelnot exceeding the prevailing Threshold Limit Value prior to disposal.

(2) Poisons used for or produced during any mining and processing activity shall belabelled in such a way as to clearly describe the type of hazard and the necessaryprecautionary measures.

(3) Radioactive materials shall always be properly sealed in order that workers areprotected from the danger of ionising radiation.

Chapter IVSurface Mining Infrastructure

Part OneStructures, Buildings,

Access Ways and Egress

Article 92

(1) Every structure and building at the mining operation shall be built sufficientlystrong and sturdy and must be maintained to ensure continued safety.

(2) A safe access way shall be provided to every work site in or at any structure orbuilding.

(3) When any part of a structure or building such as the roof cannot support theweight of any worker carrying out maintenance, conspicuous warning signs shallbe installed. A platform appropriate for use as a safe path shall be provided.

70

(4) When the traffic way or access way is obstructed by obstacles such as conveyorsor pipelines, an appropriate and permanent means of traversing such obstaclesshall be provided.

Article 93Protection against Possible Falls

(1) When any person works from a height exceeding 2.5 meters, protection againstthe possibility of a fall shall be provided by means of a fence or hand railing.Where such means of protection are impractical, safety belts or safety harnessesshall be worn or a safety net must be installed.

(2) When any person must work atop or inside a building and where due to height orlimited space the use of scaffolding, fencing or safety nets is impractical, a sturdyanchor shall be used to suspend a safety harness, suspended floor or hangingscaffold.

Article 94Gantries

(1) The gantry shall be equipped with a gangway the width of which shall not be lessthan 1 meter and the floor of which must have no holes or open panels. Wherethe height of a gangway exceeds 1.5 meters above the floor, a fence or railingshall be provided along the open side and the said gangway shall be fitted withcontinuous kick boards the height of which shall not be less than 10 centimetres.

(2) If a gantry is used for both transport and walking, the two ways shall be separatedand only authorised persons shall be allowed in the transport way.

Article 95Stairways, Hatchways

and Wall Openings

(1) Any entry (open hole or hatchway) in the floor of buildings or gantries shall befenced with standard hand railings and toe boards or provided with trap doorsopening upwards which protect the hole when open.

(2) Every stairway consisting of four or more steps shall be equipped with hand railsand standard sized toe boards.

(3) Access ways to ledges or platforms which make falling possible from a heightexceeding 1.2 meters, shall be protected by a latch chain, drop bars or gates andwarning signs shall be posted.

71

Article 96The Use of Ladders

(1) Portable ladders shall only be used as a temporary means of reaching a work siteand shall not be used as a platform.

(2) Only portable ladders that conform to safety standards shall be used. Any laddersthat shows signs of damage or cracks shall not be used. All ladders shall bechecked regularly and maintained.

(3) Portable ladders shall be placed on an even and sturdy base and be rested againsta sufficiently sturdy support and the upper extremity shall protrude no less than 1meter above the floor, except where equipped with safety railings. All laddersshall be stood at a sufficiently safe incline to prevent sliding and shall be tied atboth the upper and lower extremities. The floors above and below the laddersshall be free of obstacles while the ladders are being used.

(4) It is prohibited to use ladders in a horizontal position as a platform, gangway orscaffolding.

(5) Ladders shall be stored away immediately after use.

Article 97Silos and Bunkers

(1) Doorways or other hatchways used to enter silos, hopper or bunkers shall belocked at all times and the keys shall be held by the appointed supervisor.

(2) Where the delivery chute becomes clogged, workers shall not be permitted toenter the silo or bunker except where the supervisor has already made aninspection to determine whether or not materials have become stuck against thewalls of the said delivery chute.

(3) Open silos or bunkers with bottom discharge shall be provided with metalgratings completely covering the top opening. The metal gratings shall besecurely fixed and prevent persons from falling into the interior but allowobservation or probing of the material inside.

(4) Silos or bunkers containing combustible materials shall be made from fire proofmaterials. Every light installed inside or above the bunker shall be fireproof. It isprohibited to use electric heaters in silos or bunkers. Special safety measuresshall be taken where any material stored within the silo or bunker is capable ofproducing noxious gases, combustible gases or any gas that may cause healthproblems, and mixtures of dusts which may be explosive.

72

(5) Repair and maintenance work shall only be carried out when the silo or bunker iscompletely empty.

(6) Where it is necessary for a person to enter any silo or bunker that remains un-emptied, such action may only be carried out upon the order of the assignedsupervisor who shall guarantee that all feed points are closed and locked. Entryinto the silo or bunker shall only be from above and the worker shall remain at alltimes above the material contained therein. A safety harness shall be worn at alltimes and the safety cable shall be kept taut except in the case of automaticlocking cables.

Part TwoLighting

Article 98General Lighting

(1) Where any place is not sufficiently lit by sunlight, such a place shall be providedwith lighting.

(2) Lighting systems shall be maintained and cleaned regularly.

Article 99Use of Open Flames

It is forbidden to use open flames at any place where flammable or combustible dust, gas,vapours or dry wood are found. It is prohibited to use or place open flames in any placewhere they may come into contact with workers or the equipment they are using.

Article 100Emergency Lighting

(1) In places such as an engine room, openings, loading and unloading docks and thelike thereof, which without light may be hazardous, emergency lighting insufficient amounts shall be provided.

(2) The Mine Inspector may stipulate regulations on the provision of additionallighting or emergency lighting for every site.

Article 101Portable Lamps

73

Portable lamps shall be provided in sufficient numbers for the purpose of inspection andexamination in areas where no lighting is available.

Part ThreePrevention and Control

of Fire

Article 102Classification of Fire

Fire shall be classified as follows :

a. Class A fire: a fire caused by the ignition of combustible material except metal.

b. Class B fire: a fire caused by the ignition of combustible liquids and gases.

c. Class C fire: a fire occurring on electrical equipment caused by an electricalcurrent.

Article 103Extinguishing Fires

(1) Any worker observing any fire around him/her shall take immediate measures toextinguish the said fire.

(2) Where the measures required by paragraph (1) of this Article are not possible, thesupervisor shall be informed immediately and all workers that may be endangeredshall be informed and instructed to escape. A fire alarm shall be set off.

Article 104Prohibitions on Smoking

and the Use of Open Flames

(1) It is prohibited to smoke or use open flames when using, transporting, storing orhandling flammable liquids or gases including oil lubricants.

(2) Signs prohibiting smoking and the use of open flames shall be installed clearly atfire or blasting hazardous areas.


74

(1) Fire fighting equipment ready for immediate use shall be provided at each miningcompany to:

a. extinguish the fire at an early stage;

b. extinguish the fires beyond their early stages.

(2) Fire extinguishers shall :

a. be provided in a type, size and number capable of extinguishing all classes offire and

b. be strategically placed, within easy reach, be clearly marked, be maintained,and ready for use.

Article 106Selection of Fire

Extinguishers

(1) Selection of fire extinguishers shall be appropriate to the class of any fire whichmay occur :

a. Class A : fire extinguishers for Class A fires;

b. Class B : fire extinguishers for Class B fires, but may also be used for Class Afires and

c. Class C : fire extinguishers for Class C fires, but may also be used for ClassA and Class B fires.

(2) The class, capacity and validation shall be inscribed on every fire extinguisher.

75

Article 107Placement of Fire

Extinguishing Equipment

(1) Portable fire extinguishers shall be hung or placed on an conspicuous andreachable shelf. The top shall not exceed 1.5 meters in height and the bottomshall not be lower than 80 centimetres from the floor.

(2) When fire extinguishers are not conspicuous, signs indicating the location of anddirection towards the said equipment shall be installed and shall be free fromobstacles.

(3) Spare fire extinguishers shall always be kept in a pre-determined place.

Article 108Maintenance

(1) Fire extinguishers and any other equipment for the extinguishing of fires, allsupplementary equipment as well as any materials used in emergency situations,shall always be maintained for ready use.

(2) Fire extinguishers shall always be fully filled to be ready for immediate use at anytime. Any worker using the said fire extinguishers shall report such use in orderthat the fire extinguishers can be refilled.

(3) When refilling fire extinguishers, they shall first be completely cleaned.

(4) The date of refilling and the signature of the employee shall be recorded in a logbook and or on a label affixed to all fire extinguishers.

(5) All fire extinguishers shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions.

(6) Where used as part of a fire fighting system, hydrants shall always be maintainedfor ready use.

(7) Where using outside fire fighting teams Siamese connections shall be providedthat are suitable for use with all hydrants.

76

Article 109Inspections

(1) Fire extinguishers shall be inspected at least once per month to guarantee thatsuch extinguishers are full and ready for immediate use.

(2) At least once per year the working mechanisms, the amount and state of theextinguishing agent, condition of the hose nozzle, and tank shall be examined todetermine that the said fire extinguisher will operate effectively.

(3) Fire extinguishers shall be hydrostatically tested to a minimum of 20 kilogramsper square centimetre, or 1.5 x the operating pressure, every five years oraccording to the manufacturer’s specifications.

(4) A visual inspection for damage to any water pipe, valve, outlet, hydrant or hoseused as part of a fire fighting system shall be carried out at least every threemonths, and tests to guarantee that the said fire extinguisher remains in goodworking order shall be carried out at least once a year.

(5) Fire suppression systems shall be inspected at least once a year to guarantee thatthe said system is functioning well.

(6) Employees who carry out inspections or testing as provided for in theseregulations shall certify that the inspection or testing has been carried out and thedate it was made.

(7) Notices regarding the hydrostatic testing as required in paragraph (3) of thisArticle shall be kept on file until the said fire extinguisher is re-examined or is nolonger used.

Article 110Housekeeping

(1) Cleanliness and orderliness at the work place shall be maintained both in andaround the mine or buildings as well as any other place of work.

(2) It is prohibited to stockpile solid or liquid wastes in large amounts which maycause a fire hazard.

(3) Waste and rags containing flammable or combustible liquids shall be placed in acovered fire proof receptacle made from metal.

(4) Spills or leaks of flammable or combustible liquids shall be immediately cleanedor controlled to avoid a fire hazard.

77

(5) Used carbide receptacles shall be immediately cleaned. It is prohibited to smokeor use open flames when washing such receptacles. Disposal of carbide residuesshall conform to prevailing regulations and legislation.

Article 111Fire Hazard Areas

(1) Where, based on the opinion of the Technical Mine Manager or any authorisedemployee, a fire hazard may be created at a working place by smoking or the useof open flame lighting, matches (lighters) or any other apparatus which producesheat or fire, the Technical Mine Manager or authorised employee shall declare thesaid area to be fire hazardous.

(2) It is prohibited to smoke, to carry or use open flame lighting, use matches/lightersor any other apparatus which produces heat or fire in fire hazardous areas.

(3) At any such fire hazardous area warning signs shall be installed and maintainedfor the duration the said area is deemed fire hazardous.

Article 112Storage of CombustibleLiquids and Materials

(1) Petroleum, lubricating oils, grease and other combustible oil products and liquidsshall be stored in a closed receptacle and separated from other materials.

(2) The facility for the storage of lubricating oils and grease, and any other type of oilshall be constructed to be fire resistant and be sufficiently ventilated.

(3) It is prohibited to store petrol, lubricating oils, grease, and any other type of oiltogether with combustible materials. Where storage in one building cannot beavoided, a fire resistant partitioning wall shall be installed.

Article 113Heat

Any source of heat which may cause fire shall be separated from combustible materials.

78

Article 114Battery Charging Room

(1) The battery charging room shall be ventilated with sufficient air flow to preventthe accumulation of hydrogen gas.

(2) It is prohibited to smoke, use open flames or carry out any other activity whichmay cause fire in the battery charging room.

(3) Signs prohibiting smoking or the use of open flames shall be installed clearly inthe battery charging room.

(4) When possible electrical equipment shall not be installed in the battery chargingroom.

Article 115Buildings or Rooms for the Storage of

Flammable orCombustible Liquids

(1) Surface buildings or rooms for the storage of flammable or combustible liquidsincluding grease, shall be sufficiently ventilated to prevent the accumulation ofignitable vapours/gases.

(2) The said building or room shall have a degree of fire resistance of no less thanone hour.

(3) The storage of flammable or combustible liquids in buildings or rooms with thepotential for fire endangering human life shall be fitted with early fire detectionequipment and a fire alarm warning any person threatened by a fire.

Article 116Storage of Oxygen Cylinders

and Combustible Gases

(1) It is prohibited to store oxygen cylinders in any room in which flammable orcombustible gases or liquids or grease are stored. All oxygen cylinders shall bestored in an upright position.

(2) Gauges and regulators used on oxygen, acetylene, and liquified petroleum gascylinders shall be clean and free from lubricants and grease.

79

(3) During the transportation of oxygen, acetylene and liquefied petroleum gascylinders not in current use or when welding work is complete, the cylinder valveshall be closed and the safety cover attached.

Article 117Preparation for Pipe or

Container Welding

Before welding cutting or applying heat with an open flame on pipe lines or containersthat have contained flammable or combustible liquids and solids, the said piping orcontainer shall :

a) be dried, be ventilated and cleaned of remaining oils;

b) the covering shall be opened to prevent the increase of pressure when exposed toheat;

c) be filled with inert gas or water where possible and

d) be examined to determine the presence of ignitable gases using detectionequipment prior to work being carried out on the said piping or containers andwhenever worked upon regular examinations shall be carried out.

Article 118Refuelling Internal Combustion Engines

All internal combustion engines shall be turned off when being refuelled.

Article 119Blacksmith Shop

(1) Blacksmith shops shall be at least 60 meters from underground openings and faninstallations used for intake air.

(2) Blacksmith shops shall be equipped with exhaust vents over every forge andventilated to prevent the accumulation of products of combustion.

(3) At the end of every working shift, the blacksmith shops and surrounding areashall be inspected to determine the presence of any smouldering fires.

(4) Heating equipment shall be properly positioned so as not to cause a fire whenoverheating occurs. Where considered necessary protective apparel for sparksshall be provided.

80

Article 120Fire Extinguishers for Specific Work

(1) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided in close proximity to diesel orelectric engines or any engine driven by electricity.

(2) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be an integrated part of any portable weldingequipment. It is prohibited to perform welding or cutting work unless a fireextinguishers is provided at the work place.

(3) When destroying explosives, fire extinguishers shall be provided on site.

(4) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided in every motorised vehicle offour or more wheels.

Article 121Emergency Exits

(1) All buildings shall be provided with sufficient and well maintained means ofescape, easy to travel and having communication with all rooms regularlyoccupied by persons, including :

a. emergency exit stairs built to be fireproof and fitted with a fireproof door ateach story including any basement, and

b. a fire escape at the exterior of a building made from metal or any noncombustible material and fitted with railings and landings at any level directlyconnected to the interior via a metal door or any other fireproof material.

(2) Where any space, room or part of a building which due to the nature of theequipment or process found therein, presents the possible danger of fire or therelease of steam, the said building shall be fitted with no less than two separatelylocated and similar exits.

(3) It is prohibited to obstruct the exits from any building and doors to a stairwell orsmoke proof enclosure shall be open. All doors shall open towards theescapeway.

Article 122Fire Fighting Teams

(1) Mining companies possessing fire fighting equipment shall form fire fightingteams.

81

(2) Every member of any fire fighting team shall be given adequate training.

(3) The fire fighting team shall make regular inspections on all mining activities andfacilities.

(4) No less than one member of a fire fighting team shall be present at every workingshift.

(5) At surface work sites, apart from members as required in paragraph (4) of thisArticle, no less than 20 percent of the total number of workers and security staffshall understand and be capable of using fire extinguishers.

(6) Appropriate rescue equipment shall always be available to those who areexpected to need it, and instructions on the use thereof shall be given.

Article 123Fire Fighting Methods

and Systems

(1) The Technical Mine Manager or any authorised employee shall stipulate methodsfor fighting fires, evacuation and rescues in emergency situations, and carry outregular training.

(2) The system or method for fire fighting shall be stipulated in order to be able toprovide immediate warnings to any person who may be exposed to any firehazard.

(3) Fire hazard signals shall always be well maintained in a condition ready forimmediate use and be tested regularly.

Part FourSafety in Transport Operations

Paragraph 1Railway Transport

Article 124

(1) The stipulations in this regulation shall apply to any vehicle designed to travel onrails and which is drawn by a locomotive.

(2) Railway transport used outside of the mining region which connects to publictransportation of goods and people shall comply with the regulations of therelevant authorities.

82

(3) Railway employees shall be in possession of all instructions regarding safety andthe work regulations that apply to rail transportation.

(4) It is prohibited to carry passengers on any rail travelling vehicle except shuntingguards or any person undertaking maintenance who boards the rail vehicles orlocomotive as part of his/her duties as a rail worker.

(5) Every worker shall comply with the train transport operation regulations createdby the Technical Mine Manager (Transport Regulations), including the followingprohibitions :

a. it is prohibited to carry people inside rail vehicles transporting minerals orequipment except for the transportation of the injured;

b. it is prohibited to board or alight from any moving train;

c. it is prohibited to travel on the outside of any rail vehicles except where suchrail vehicles are fitted with a foot board and hand railings and

d. it is prohibited to travel between coupled rail vehicles or between trains.

Article 125Safe Systems of Transport

The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the specifications of the transportationsystem are made and a duplicate is forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector. Suchspecifications shall include :

a. a map of the transport network, including gradients, the radius of curves and otherimportant data;

b. a detailed description of the amount and type of equipment to be used withtechnical details.

c. applications for permits for passenger transportation shall be accompanied by afully detailed code of operating practice and the Chief Mine Inspector mayundertake amendments prior to granting the permit.

83

Article 126Transport Rules

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall prepare transport rules that cover thefollowing :

a. track construction, elevation, gradient, rail size, points and the like;

b. curve radius and elevation, including check rails where the radius is less than25 meters;

c. the rail connection system, number of bolts or welding details;

d. details of track side clearances or freeway which must not be less than 60centimetres from any part of the vehicle, shall be safe for goods whichprotrude and swaying at bends;

e. provision of manned or automatic gates or barriers or other safety measures atroad or pathway crossings or for railway tracks that pass through residentialareas;

f. prohibition of, or arrangements for pushing of trains or the simultaneouspushing and hauling of trains including communications between drivers.

g. lighting requirements where operating after sunset or during periods of poorvision caused by bad weather.

h. front and rear warning lights shall be attached. When shunting, the rear lightsshall be removed, where the shunter precedes the said train.

i. stipulations and operation of safety equipment, coupling poles, sprags and thelike. Handling, controlling or moving rail vehicles along rail tracks, pointsupervision and operation;

j. the qualifications, experience and age to become locomotive drivers no lessthan 21 years old for drivers and 18 years old for guards and shunters.

k. details of fixed signals as well as other signalling system methods and codes,both visual as well as with audible, both inside or outside the locomotive ortrain;

l. rail vehicle coupling and loading as well as stipulations on maximum loadsand train length;

m. speed limits and rules for curves or hazardous places;

84

n. special prohibitions or regulations for the transportation of hazardousmaterials;

o. shunting or overtaking a train on adjacent tracks;

p. measures to prevent derailment of rail vehicles and runaways as well asmeasures that must be carried out when such incidents occur to preventaccidents involving workers or members of the community;

q. collision precautionary measures;

r. regular inspection of all train tracks and signals as well as drainage channelsand the inspection and maintenance of locomotives, rail vehicles and othermechanical equipment;

s. the movement and control of vehicles by hand and

t. safe methods to return derailed vehicles to the tracks.

(2) Additional regulations for electric rail or electric trolley wire systems,

a. independent continuity connection across all rail joints. The minimum heightto overhead power lines shall be no less than 5 meters.

b. precautionary measures where workers are underneath overhead power lines.

c. prohibitions on loading or adjusting loads on locomotives or trains standingbelow live conductors;

d. precautionary measures against short circuiting or the arcing of electrical firesto surrounding metal objects and

e. means for isolation of overhead power lines or live rails and measures thatmust be taken when overhead power lines are broken.

(3) Transport rules as specified in these regulations must be available to the MinesInspectors, a copy posted at the mine office and a copy must be issued to everytransport worker employed on the system. The Mine Inspector shall have theauthority to require any changes in the transport rules which he considersnecessary to ensure the safety of the operation.

Article 127Locomotives

85

(1) Steam locomotives or compressed air locomotives including ancillarycompressors and brake engines shall fulfil the requirements of pressure vesselsand pressurised machinery.

(2) Where two locomotives are coupled with linked controls the two shall beconsidered as one unit, whereas where two locomotives without linked controlsare used in tandem, a code of signals between drivers shall be specified.

(3) During operation the locomotive driver shall remain at the controls and shall becapable of reaching the brakes and shall always monitor pressure in the brakingsystem.

(4) Where a locomotive is left unguarded or left idle for a long period of time, theparking brakes shall be used and all controls must be set at neutral. Dieselengines or petrol driven engines shall be turned off, electricity in electriclocomotives shall be cut off and pantographs or conductor arms shall be releasedfrom live power lines.

Paragraph 2Aerial Tramways

Article 128

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall be responsible for all installations and theequipment thereof as well as any buildings related to aerial tramways.

(2) Aerial tramway installations may only be constructed where the Chief MineInspector has approved the route and details of the said installation.

(3) Aerial tramways for the transport of mine workers to or from their work site shallrequire the permission of the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 129Maintenance and Inspections

(1) Stipulations for people boarding aerial tramways for the sole purpose ofinspection and maintenance of any part of the said installation, shall be made withthe condition that the following requirements are fulfilled :

a. a special cable car shall be used that :

1) cannot be tipped;

86

2) is enclosed for 1.2 meters above the floor in order to prevent any person orarticle projecting outside the conveyance;

3) is fitted with sturdy hand railings that are easily reached by any personinside;

4) is properly made so as to prevent passengers being caught on any part ofthe suspension wheel and

5) is fitted with doors that cannot be opened outwards.

b. it is prohibited to board an aerial tramway vehicle alone. The maximumnumber of people boarding together in any aerial tramway vehicle shall bestipulated by a Supervisor responsible therefor.

c. only one vehicle shall be used at any time for the transportation of people;

d. communications equipment between passengers and the operator shall beprovided and

e. it is prohibited to transport people during bad weather.

(2) A daily inspection and maintenance schedule shall be carried out by a persondesignated therefor whose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book by theTechnical Mine Manager.

Article 130Construction of the

Aerial Tramway

(1) Positive action type braking and the equipment thereof shall be of a type whichoperates automatically when the electrical current is interrupted, to prevent theaerial tramway cables and vehicles moving in reverse.

(2) Every connection on the rail cables should be designed to offer minimumresistance to the passage of trolley wheels.

(3) The towers or pylons shall be protected from the possibility of being damaged byswaying conveyances.

(4) A bridge, safety net or any other means of protection shall be built where aerialtramways cross over any road, railway line, pathway or buildings.

(5) Direct communications shall be available between the terminals and immediatestations.

87

Article 131Cables, Pulleys and Aerial

Tramway Vehicles

(1) Hauling cables shall have a safety factor of no less than five times, and the trackcable shall have a safety factor of four times the maximum calculated load undernormal operating conditions.

(2) All cables shall be examined and lubricated regularly in accordance with themaintenance schedule.

(3) Details of inspections, lubricating, replacement or repair of any cable shall berecorded in the cable book by an employee whose name shall be recorded in themine book.

(4) Based on the records in the cable book, the Technical Mine Manager shallevaluate the safe life of the ropes and replace them accordingly. The life of ropesshall not exceed 5 years for hauling cables and 15 years for track cables exceptotherwise stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) No rope used in a ropeway shall be knotted or spliced except for the purpose ofjoining an endless rope or for forming a thimble splice.

(6) Support pulley wheels on all tramways shall be maintained to rotate freely and toensure the haul ropes work properly in the groove.

(7) Any rope clamps on any aerial tramway vehicle that ceases to hold securely shallbe immediately replaced.

Article 132Aerial Tramway Operation

(1) Cable towers or pylons which exceed 20 meters in height above the surface of theearth, shall at the highest point be equipped with a red warning light. Cabletowers and pylons above 40 meters shall be equipped with a red warning light atthe mid section. The pylons shall also be painted in alternating red and white.All lights shall be lit when dark and during bad weather.

(2) Every pylon shall be fitted with a lightning conductor which shall always be ingood working order.

(3) Aerial tramway vehicles shall be evenly loaded and the capacity of which mustnot be exceeded. Goods being transported shall not project above the top of thesaid aerial tramway vehicle.

88

a. the feeding chutes shall be regulated so as to prevent spillage during filling;

b. aerial tramway vehicles already loaded shall be operated slowly to preventswaying;

c. aerial tramway vehicles shall be cleaned regularly cleaned of sticking materialto prevent imbalance of the aerial tramway when empty.

(4) The driving engine of any aerial tramway installation used to transport peopleshall be continuously attended when in operation.

(5) It is prohibited to be below an aerial tramway or any object which is suspendedfrom any lifting appliance.

Article 133TRANSPORT RULES FOR ROPEWAYS

The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate transportation regulations that cover safeworking procedures for any aerial tramway system and copies thereof shall be given toany person assigned to any part of the operation of the said aerial tramway system.

Paragraph 3Track Tramways and Inclines

Article 134

(1) This section shall apply to any mining transportation system for vehicles thattravel along tracks, are hauled by cable and any type of motive power includinggravity.

(2) It is prohibited to assign any person to work on any transport system, exceptwhere the said person has been given instructions regarding safety and operationof the said transportation system.

(3) No person shall be carried by, nor ride upon any vehicle or any other part of thesystem except where permitted by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Any application for a special permit to transport people shall be lodged by theTechnical Mine Manager including detailed specifications of the transportationsystem, mechanical and electrical equipment and a code of operating practices tobe adopted.

89

(5) The Chief Mine Inspector may require modifications to any part of the system orcode of practice to ensure safety of persons carried.

Article 135(Track Tramway) Transport Rules

(1) To ensure the safe operation of any transportation system, the Technical MineManager shall develop detailed transportation regulations covering any aspectrelated to the operation of transportation and which shall include specialregulations for :

a. the construction standards for the rail tracks, the rail gauge, gradients, curveradius, track supports, check rails at curves, rail connections, drainagechannels.

b. the minimum clearances between the vehicle and any track side fixtures orobstruction which shall not be less than 60 centimetres and must allow forswinging of the vehicle;

c. preventive measures where the transportation system crosses roads ortravelways;

d. maximum speeds;

e. maximum loads and the maximum number of vehicles in any train;

f. the need for lighting to work after sunset or in reduced visibility in badweather;

g. warning lights at the front of the locomotive;

h. the use of safety equipment

i. pushing the tram cars by hand and shunting or overtaking;

j. signalling methods and codes used;

k. the age and qualifications of locomotive drivers and transport employees shallnot exceed 21 years and 18 years respectively;

l. the transportation of loads in large amounts or hazardous materials;

m. precautionary measures against derailed and runaway rail vehicles to preventdanger to workers and others and

90

n. daily inspections of all rail tracks, signals, and drainage channels as well astesting of the driving machinery, rail vehicles and all mechanical, electricalequipment, ropes, chains and attachments.

(2) Transport rules must be available to the Mine Inspector, the copies shall bedisplayed at the mining office, and shall also be forwarded to any transportworker working on the said transport system.

(3) The Mine Inspector shall have the authority to make amendments to thetransportation regulations, where in his/her judgement such amendments arenecessary to ensure safe operation of the said transportation.

Article 136Signals and Other

Precautionary Measures

(1) Any transport system operating both on the surface and partly underground in amine shall comply with the stipulations and requirements in the surface miningregulations and every signal ruling shall be consistent with the entire system.

(2) Every system shall be controlled only by audio or visual signals sent to thedriver’s position on the machinery, and at the same time be repeated at everymidway station or terminal. Copies of the signalling regulations shall bedisplayed at any place from where signals are normally transmitted.

(3) Every crossing of roads or pedestrian pathways shall be equipped with safetybarriers or other safety devices which shall closed whenever the transport systemis passing and audio or visual warning signals shall be given during the durationof the crossing.

(4) Safety equipment for runaway tram cars shall work automatically.

91

Article 137Self Acting or Gravity System

(1) Any system operated by gravity and controlled by means of braking equipment onthe operating drum or pulley shall meet the following additional stipulations :

a. the operating brake must be separated from the parking brake and both shallbe capable of supporting the maximum load and capable of stopping thesystem at maximum speeds and loads.

b. the operating brake shall be of the dead-man type which automaticallyassumes the stop position unless held off by the brakeman;

c. the engine and the braking gears shall be made sufficiently strong and beprotected from collisions with vehicles that may damage the said system;

d. during any loading or unloading, the brakes shall always be in use;

e. loading and unloading work on any transport vehicle that makes use of thegravity system shall not be carried out simultaneously at the top or bottomsections and

f. the brake operator shall only operate the transport vehicle upon receipt of thesignals from the two stations.

Article 138Cables and Pulleys

(1) In any system which operates partly underground, the rope safety factors shallmeet the safety factors for shaft hoist cables. For other systems, the haulingcables shall have a safety factor of no less than 5 times the maximum calculatedload.

(2) All cables shall be inspected and lubricated regularly in accordance with therequirements of the maintenance schedule, and the findings of such inspectionsshall be recorded in the rope book by an employee whose name is recorded in theMine Book.

(3) The hauling cable shall be sufficiently supported throughout the length of thesystem by idler pulleys which shall be maintained to rotate freely and wherenecessary the haul rope must be guided onto the pulleys.

(4) At every curve, bends or undulations support pulleys shall be installed to preventthe rope rubbing any fittings or swinging dangerously.

92

Paragraph 4Other Vehicles

Article 139General Application

This section shall apply to any vehicle driven mechanically or the like thereof includingvehicles hauled by trailers that are used as mining equipment but which are not :

a. designed to be used on rail tracks or along cables;

b. controlled by a pedestrian and

c. motorcycles.

Article 140Vehicle Construction

and Equipment

(1) The construction and equipment of vehicles that operate on public roads shallmeet the requirements issued by the authorised authority.

(2) All vehicles shall be constructed in such a way as to meet the standards foroperating load and shall only be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions.

(3) Vehicles with a gross weight (including trailers and loads) exceeding 16 tons shallbe provided with dual braking systems to prevent failure on one axle from beingtransferred to any other.

(4) Trailers with a gross weight exceeding 750 kilograms or more than half theweight of the towing vehicle shall be fitted with their own braking system whichshall operate automatically and where the gross weight exceeds 3500 kilogramssuch trailers shall be fitted with a braking system that can be controlled from thetowing vehicle.

(5) Every transport vehicle or trailer having a rear end ground clearance exceeding 75centimetres shall be provided with a protective guard at that height as to preventother vehicles or objects from being caught or from running into theundercarriage.

93

(6) Brakes installed in any vehicle shall be capable of stopping the vehicles whenfully loaded and be capable of safely controlling the vehicle in steep areas whenclimbing or descending.

(7) Any vehicle equipped with limited rearward visibility shall be provided withaudible reverse warning which automatically sounds whilst reverse gear isengaged.

(8) The windows in the driver cabin shall be fitted with safety glass and shall alwaysbe clean. Vehicle windows which may be hit by rock particles shall be fitted withsafety shields on the outside.

(9) It is prohibited to make any changes to the vehicle cabin that may obstruct thedrivers view.

(10) It is prohibited to drive the vehicle between sunset and sunrise or at any time ofreduced vision in bad weather, except where fitted :

a. with sufficient lighting which enables the driver to see ahead and behind to asafe distance;

b. with lights or signals that shine sufficiently to indicate the size of the vehicleand

c. with danger warning lights.

(11) The cabin of every vehicle shall be provided with safe doors and where the heightof the cabin floor exceeds 1.8 meters from the ground, two safe exits shall beprovided for the driver.

(12) All vehicles shall be provided with 2 rear view mirrors and on large vehicles withlimited rear visibility additional rear-view mirrors shall be provided.

(13) The vehicle cabin shall be designed or equipped with equipment that is capable ofprotecting the driver from excessive noise, dust or exhaust fumes.

(14) Every vehicle or trailer used at the mine that is equipped with a tipping body shallbe fitted with devices to prevent the body collapsing from the raised position.These devices shall be independent of the tipping mechanism and shall not beoperable from inside the cab.

(15) Vehicles operating in areas where there exists the potential for overturning orfalling objects shall :

a. be fitted with a strong cabin construction;

94

b. be fitted with safety belts both for the driver and any passenger and

c. be fitted with hand grips for any passenger.

Article 141Roadways

(1) All roadways to be used by vehicles at mines shall be provided with clear signs.No vehicles shall operate except on designated transport roads.

(2) The minimum radius and maximum road inclination shall be in accordance withthe capabilities of the vehicles being used.

(3) Adequate berms shall be built at open edges of roads along steep slopes.

(4) Roadway surfaces should wherever practicable be coated to hold back erosionand or to prevent sliding.

(5) All straight roads should be crosslevel and any elevation on the outside of thecurves shall not be such as to effect the stability of high or loaded vehicles.

(6) Sufficient illumination shall be provided in working areas and at strategic placeson haul roads to ensure the safety of pedestrians, particularly where haul roads

cross travel ways.

(7) Any haul road passing under any overhead obstruction shall have clear noticesgiving warning of the obstruction and the vertical clearance. Warning notices andbarriers shall be provided where any overhead electricity line crosses a haulroad.

Article 142Driver Qualifications and Obligations

(1) A person may operate a vehicles at a mine where the following requirements havebeen fulfilled :

a. must be no less than 18 years of age;

b. must have been appointed by the Technical Mine Manager to drive specificvehicles and

c. must have been given training and have been declared a competent driver bythe Technical Mine Manager.

95

(2) A driver of any vehicle equipped with a tipping body shall ensure that if the bodyis raised for any purpose other than routine unloading it shall be secured by theindependent devices provided.

(3) The driver shall make use of any equipment provided at the unloading dock toprevent the said vehicle from overturning, rolling or moving.

(4) Any driver at any mining operation shall comply with the traffic signs asstipulated by the Technical Mine Manager.

(5) Before leaving the vehicle, the driver shall be sure that the vehicle is turned offand locked and safe thus preventing accidental motion.

(6) Prior to travelling along descending roads, the vehicle shall always be drivenslowly and using the lowest gear at all times, except where the said vehicle isbeing towed.

(7) A driver shall not set any vehicle in motion before giving audible warning andensuring that no person is in the danger area of the vehicle.

(8) At the beginning of every work shift every driver shall undertake an inspection ofthe outer parts of the vehicle and test the controls and particularly the brakingcapability.

Article 143Inspections and Maintenance

A maintenance schedule of all vehicles at the mine shall be formulated which regulatesthe inspection, maintenance and repair of all vehicles.

Article 144Safe Working Procedures

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall regulate traffic at the mine and install thenecessary traffic signs to inform drivers of :

a. the direction of traffic;

b. speed limits;

c. vehicle height limits;

d. inclines and descents;

96

e. parking and non parking areas and other matters related to the safety of thesystem of transport.

(2) During loading and unloading work and work involving tipping of loads, roadways shall be one way.

(3) Drivers may overtake other vehicles along designated roads.

(4) Mine workers permitted to walk or to be along any transport road or at anyloading or unloading site shall wear brightly coloured fluorescent coats.

Article 145Stockpiles

(1) Whenever waste or minerals are stockpiled, such work shall be supervised toensure that the stockpiling vehicle remains only in designated areas.

(2) Over edge tipping by vehicles should be avoided and a berm or heap of materialmaintained at the tip edge.

(3) Where over edge tipping is permitted stop blocks should be provided to preventvehicles from overturning or over running the tip edge.

(4) Stockpiling work shall be supervised by a stockpiling supervisor who shalldesignate stockpiling sites, supervise vehicles moving in reverse and shall beresponsible for the inspection of the sturdiness of the stockpiling cliff edge.

(5) Stockpiling work shall be avoided when dark or at times of an unclear field ofvision except where lighting is provided which guarantees safety and a clear fieldof vision.

(6) The driver shall remain in the vehicle at the stockpiling area.

(7) Only stockpiling supervisors shall be permitted to be at the stockpiling area andthe said supervisor shall bear a brightly coloured fluorescent coat.

Article 146Transport Rules

(1) At every mine the Technical Mine Manager shall determine Transport Rules andthe installation of traffic signs regarding the following transport operatingprocedures :

a. methods for the safe use of vehicles;

97

b. traffic direction, speed limits, load limits;

c. hazardous or unusual loads;

d. vehicle service and towing or pushing vehicles;

e. the distance between vehicles on transport roads;

f. loading and unloading;

g. rules for pedestrians;

h. tire handling;

i. passengers and the transportation of workers and

j. training and driving permits.

(2) Transport Rules must be available to the Mine Inspector. The Chief MineInspector has the authority to make changes to any Transport Rule if he considersit necessary for the safety of the operation.

Paragraph 5Belt Conveyors

Article 147

(1) It is prohibited to use production conveyors to transport people.

(2) Where conveyors are used to transport people approval shall be obtained from theChief Mine Inspector.

(3) Where conveyorways are used as regular travelways, such travelways shall beadequately illuminated and fences shall be provided to protect persons frommaterial that may fall from the belt. Such travelways shall be at least 700 mmwide.

(4) It is prohibited to wall along a conveyor except where necessary for the purposeof maintenance work and the conveyor shall be turned off and the source of thecurrent locked out.

(5) It is prohibited to traverse an operating conveyor except at places designatedtherefor. Overpasses equipped with hand railings shall be provided at 500 meterintervals along the length of the conveyor system.

98

Article 148Stopping and Warning Devices in an

Emergency Situation

(1) Every operated conveyor shall be fitted with an emergency cord at easily reachedlocations along the length of the conveyor, the function of which shall be to stopthe conveyor when pulled.

(2) Where the entire length of the conveyor is visible including from the operatingbooth, the operator shall look to ensure that all persons are in a safe place prior tooperating the conveyor. In other cases, an audible or visual warning system shallbe installed and sounded or operated prior to the conveyor being operated.

(3) Where the conveyor is operated by means of remote control or automatically, thesaid conveyor shall be operated in order from the sending end to the receiving endof the system and every conveyor system shall be fitted with warning signals priorto operation.

(4) All automatic, tele-automatic and remote control systems shall be fitted with ainter-locking system to cut electricity where damage occurs during the operation.

Article 149Safety Guards

(1) The head pulley and tail pulley on conveyors shall be fitted with a safety guard ofa height no less than the height of the head pulley or tail pulley.

(2) Overhead belt conveyors shall be provided with safety guards. No person shall beallowed to be below such belts except for maintenance and cleaning operations..


(1) It is prohibited to manually shift a drive belt while in motion unless the machinesare provided with a mechanical shifter.

(2) Belts shall not be guided onto power-driven moving pulleys with the hands excepton slow moving belts especially designed for hand feeding.

(3) It is prohibited to clean any pulley and conveyor by hand where the said conveyoris in operation. Remote lubricating facilities shall be provided.

(4) It is prohibited to grease any belt by hand when in operation, except where usingremote greasing methods.

99

(5) It is prohibited to clean under any conveyor in operation except where the sectionhas been fenced off for safety.

Article 151Conveyor Bridges

and Overburden Spreaders

(1) Structural members of conveyor bridges, overburden spreaders, excavatingmachines together with ladders and platforms shall be cleaned prior to thecommencement of every working shift.

(2) Conveyor bridges and overburden spreaders should be equipped with measuringinstruments, limit switches, signalling and intercommunication devices, whichshall always be in good working order. In addition to automatic brakes the bridgeundercarriages shall also be fitted with hand brakes.

(3) Conveyor bridges and overburden spreaders shall be fitted with automaticinstruments to measure wind velocity and direction continuously which shall beconnected to an emergency signalling system and the pulley or support chainscontrol system of the overburden spreader.

(4) Conveyor lines on conveyor bridges and overburden spreaders shall be providedwith servicing platforms guarded on both sides. Effective guards shall beinstalled around every counterweight located close to traffic roads or travel-ways.

(5) When overburden spreaders of the walking or rail-walking type are in motion, itis prohibited for transport vehicles, machinery or any other equipment or personto cross under the bridge cantilever.

(6) It is prohibited for any conveyor bridges to approach any building or miningequipment or transport equipment to within a distance of 1 meter or to operate ina position above other mining and transport equipment.

(7) The vertical distance between the end of the dumping cantilever of any conveyorbridges and the crest of any stockpiling stack shall be no less than 3 meters. Foroverburden spreaders of the cantilever belt conveyor type which moveperiodically, the said distance shall not be less than 1.5 meters. Where the saidstockpile shows signs of collapsing or sliding, the conveyor bridge shall beimmediately moved from the danger area.

(8) In bad weather, storms, heavy rain or fog, or when visibility is less than 25meters, the passage of workers or work on the conveyor bridge should besuspended. Conveyor bridge railway tracks shall not be used when they are underwater.

100

(9) When undertaking repair work on conveyor bridges, it is prohibited tosimultaneously disassemble the automatic brakes and hand brakes.

Paragraph 6Water Transportation

Article 152

(1) Every application to use waterways or piers located in any waterway system forthe transportation of people, goods or minerals at the mine, shall be forwarded tothe Chief Mine Inspector, and shall include :

a. copies of permits issued by the authorised authorities and

b. detailed maps and location maps of the pier.

(2) Any matter not covered in the regulations issued by the authorised water trafficauthorities shall be provided for by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Except where otherwise stipulated by authorised water traffic authorities,responsibility for construction standards, the maintenance and safety of watervehicles operated by mining companies in waterways, shall reside with the ChiefMine Inspector. Such water vehicles shall comply with these regulations and anyother requirements considered necessary in the interests of safety.

Paragraph 7Air Transportation

Article 153

(1) Every application to use air transport for the purposes of transporting people atmines, or goods or stipulations on airport facilities for airlines or helicopters shallbe forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector, and must include the following :

a. copies of permits issued by the authorised authorities and

b. detailed maps and location maps of the airport.

(2) Any matter related to air transportation or mining airports not provided for in theregulations of the related air traffic authorities shall be the responsibility of theChief Mine Inspector.

101

Paragraph 8Cranes

Article 154Construction, Equipment and Erection

(1) Every crane shall be of sound construction, suitable material free from defect andof an adequate strength for the intended loads and shall be well maintained.

(2) Every crane shall be fitted with :

a. a safe means of access and egress for the operator from the cabin installed inthe said crane and ;

b. danger indicators to warn people endangered of any moving crane.

(3) Every crane that is electrically operated shall be fitted with :

a. means by which the power conductors for the crane can be safelydisconnected from the source of electrical supply and

b. an electric switch or circuit breaker which is capable of disconnecting theelectricity safely from inside the cabin despite being at maximum powerexcept where the collectors can be safely released.

(4) Any crane powered mechanically and used as a lifting tackle at the mine, shall befitted with an efficient catch or brake.

(5) The safe work load of every crane shall be written clearly on the said apparatus.

(6) Every crane shall be fitted with an automatic load indicator or other device whichindicates the working loads at the corresponding jib angles and radii of the load.

(7) Loading machines or excavators used as cranes shall in the case of :

a. front bucket types, have eyebolts permanently fitted, tested and marked withthe safe working load, and

b. back hoe types, have eyebolts permanently fitted, and tested at full outreachconditions and be marked with the safe work load at that radius.

(8) Forks and transport trucks and the like thereof which are capable of lifting workloads higher than the height of the operator, or are operated in areas where stocksare higher than the operator’s head shall be fitted with additional overheadguards.

102

(9) It is prohibited to build or rebuild any cranes once dismantled or relocated exceptwhere carried out by a competent person assigned and in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.

(10) Every rail or railway track upon which moves any crane must be of an adequatesize, shall be properly laid and shall have an even track surface and be wellmaintained.


(1) The work place of every crane shall be levelled, cleaned and inspected by theperson responsible therefor.

(2) It is prohibited to use cranes or lifting tackle except in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with the lifting capacity thereof.

(3) It is prohibited to over burden any crane beyond its work load capacity, except forthe purposes of testing and only where carried out by a capable person.

(4) Where more than one crane is needed for one lifting operation, a responsibleperson shall be appointed to ensure that no crane is loaded beyond its work load.

(5) Any crane which is capable of moving when transporting a load shall be locatedon a solid or asphalt surface and be operated at the lowest gear position(maximum of 3 kilometres per hour) and the load shall be located directly in frontof the driver. It is prohibited to drag loads using cranes.

(6) Where the outrigger or stabiliser is attached to the crane vehicle, the saidoutrigger shall be firmly attached when lifting, slewing or lowering any load.

(7) Whenever a load is being lifted, the movement of the crane vehicle shall followthe orders of a special employee assigned therefor.

(8) Where audio signals or hand signals cannot be used, the means of communicationbetween the special employee and the driver shall be radio communication.

(9) Where an overhead travelling crane can be controlled from the ground using apendant switches, the path way for the operator shall be clearly marked and mustalways be free of obstructions.

Article 156Precautionary Measures

103

(1) No person shall be lifted by a crane nor ride on loads being moved by a crane.

(2) The stipulations as required in paragraph (1) shall not apply to persons beinglifted for special purposes by a crane equipped for man-riding and under a schemeof operation approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) It is prohibited other than the operator to be in the crane, except due to hisfunction he has to be on the crane for repair, testing or maintenance. It isprohibited to hoist any person by a crane undergoing repair, testing ormaintenance.

(4) Where repair, testing and maintenance work is being carried out on the crane, theoperator shall comply with the orders of the person appointed to carry out suchwork.

(5) It is prohibited to be under any suspended load and within the swing radius of anyload.

(6) It is prohibited to operate any crane where the hoisting cable has broken wires inone lay which exceeds 5% of the total found in the rope, or where there existsdamage which clearly reduces the strength of the rope.

Article 157Working Near Overhead

Power Lines

(1) Extreme caution shall be taken when operating mobile cranes near overheadpower lines and such work shall be lead by a person who shall be responsible forsupervision of the said work and who shall be located on the ground. Such workmay only be carried out during the day time or during good weather.

(2) No part of the crane or the load thereof shall be permitted to be close to overheadpower lines which voltages higher than the proximity as follows :

Cable Voltagein Kilovolts

Minimum Distance

up to 66

more than 66

3.0 meters

5.0 meters

104

(3) It shall only be permitted to pass overhead power lines at permitted crossings.The boom jib shall first be lowered and the lifting controls shall be locked or betied to prevent the boom jib from unintentionally moving while the cranes ispassing underneath the said overhead power lines.

(4) When any crane is forced to pass under overhead power lines at any place otherthan a permitted crossing, the driver of the crane shall first obtain a permit fromthe Technical Mine Manager.

(5) When the boom jib comes into contact with overhead power lines, the driver ofthe cranes shall remain on the crane until the boom jib is free or until electricity iscut. The driver of the crane shall be certain that no person is on the groundtouching the said crane and where the driver is forced to alight, it shall be done byjumping and not by stepping.

Article 158Inspections and Testing

(1) The shaft of the hoist drive of a crane shall be inspected by a person competent inusing ultrasonic methods to determine whether or not the shaft is in goodcondition prior to first time use, and periodically at the same frequency, or greaterthan that stipulated by the manufacturer of the said crane.

(2) Equipment that may affect the safe operation of the crane shall be tested,maintained and inspected by a competent person prior to the said crane beingoperated for the first time and periodically at the same frequency or greater thanthat determined by the manufacturer of the said crane.

(3) The operator shall inspect the outside of the crane, the functioning of the workload indicator and safety devices prior to the commencement of work at thebeginning of the work shift.

(4) Inspections of every crane shall be carried out by a competent person namely :

a. for tower cranes no less than after working seven days or after any stormaffecting the stability of the said crane and

b. for other types of cranes no less than after seven days and after moving orrelocation of the work site for stationary cranes.

(5) Every crane and item of lifting tackle at a mine shall be thoroughly examined andtested to prove its safe working load at intervals not exceeding 12 months by an

105

authorised mechanical expert or test house appointed by the Technical MineManager the name of which shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(6) Any person or body appointed as specified in paragraph (5) shall issue a testingdescription and make a report of any damage found, which shall be recorded inthe Mine Book. Where damage is found that may affect the safety of the use ofthe crane or lifting tackle, it is prohibited to use the said apparatus until thedamage has been repaired and re-testing is carried out.

Part FiveWorkshops and Factories

Article 159General Stipulations

Every workshop shall be operated and maintained in a clean and orderly condition so asnot to endanger safety and health as well as not to affect or pollute the environment.

Article 160The Arrangement of

Equipment and Facilities

(1) Space between machines, mechanical equipment, benches or working tables andany other working equipment shall be sufficiently wide and free from obstructionsin order that workers may move easily and freely.

(2) One side of any stairway shall be provided at least with a hand railing or sturdysupport. Portable stairs shall be tied or attached safely.

(3) Floor hatches and stair platforms shall be fitted with a frame and a safety fence 90centimetres in height. Decks and stairways shall be free from obstructions orslippery objects to prevent hazards.

(4) Permanently open receptacles and containers containing hot or dangerous liquidsubstances shall be set apart using a partition or wall with a height of no less than1.5 meters. Clear warning signs shall be installed at the said place.


Against Fire or Explosion

(1) It is prohibited to utilise fires at workshops, except where fire is a necessary partof the nature of the work and adequate safety equipment shall be provided.

106

(2) In a workshop, clothes soiled with petroleum or other flammable liquids shall bestored in a place where they do not create a possible fire hazard.

(3) When combustible liquid substances are poured from a receptacle, theconstruction of the said receptacle shall be fire proof and have a capacity of nomore than 20 litres. It is prohibited to keep more than ten containers ofcombustible liquid substances in one workshop.

(4) Whenever, in a workshop, work is done that may cause danger of explosion, thenthe room and other adjoining rooms must be free of fire and open flames and onlyilluminated with gas-tight lights. Open flames or non gas-tight lamps shall not beallowed within a distance of at least 10 meters of such a room. Such rooms shallbe well ventilated, if necessary by mechanical means.

(5) It is prohibited to smoke or carry fire starting materials into any workshop asrequired in paragraph (4) of this Article.

(6) Goods and materials in workshops shall be so arranged, not to obstruct workerescape routes in case of a fire.

(7) Every workshop shall be equipped with fire extinguishers in sufficient numbers.

Article 162Precautionary Measures AgainstDangerous Gases and Vapours

(1) Workshops shall be fitted with a good ventilation system and the spread of anydangerous gas or vapour which threatens the safety and health of workers shall beprevented. When, as the result of a process dangerous gases and vapours cannotbe prevented, a ventilation system shall be designed and installed so as to removethe said gaseous vapours.

(2) It is prohibited to enter any work room in any workshop which may containdangerous gas or vapours prior to carrying out a safety inspection and only afterthe said room has been declared safe.

Article 163Safety Equipment

(1) Any potentially hazardous moving part of any machine or transmission equipmentshall be fitted with safety devices.

(2) Any rotating part of any machine which rotates at high speed shall be safelyenclosed. The RPM of the said machine shall not be higher than that stipulated

107

(3) Every worker shall wear safety glasses when :

a. operating machines that cause hot sparks or flying metal fragments.

b carrying out any work that may emit blinding or eye-damaging light.

Article 164Using Power Engine

and Machines

(1) Before starting power engines clear warning signals shall be given to any workerwho may be affected by any hazard caused thereby. Machines that startautomatically shall be fitted with an audible warning signal or other hazardindicator.

(2) Machines installed at point distant from the driving engine shall be provided withemergency stops, in order that every person may immediately stop the machine orengine whenever necessary.

Article 165Grinding Machines

(1) Grinding wheel shall be :

a. equipped with safety rings on installation;

b. protected with a safety cover and

c. equipped with a glass shield..

(2) The size and shape of grinding wheels used shall conform to the standards of themanufacturer.

(3) The rotation speed of the grinding wheel shall not exceed the manufacturer’sspecifications..

(4) Any person using a grinder shall wear safety glasses.

Article 166Painting Work

108

Any room or place where painting is done shall be enclosed and have good ventilationusing a fan, exhausting to the outside. The lighting provided shall be airtight andworkers shall wear corresponding masks.


(1) Workers exposed to the hazard of radiation from welding light caused by weldingwork or from cutting shall wear protective glasses and other safety equipment.

(2) When welding or cutting operations emit harmful vapours from liquid metals anadequate ventilation system shall be installed or any person not protected from thesaid hazardous liquid metal vapours shall wear respiratory protective equipment.

(3) It is prohibited to weld or cut where any person is not protected from weldinglight, except where the said person is wearing eye protection or is protected bymeans of screens.

(4) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided on site while welding or cuttingwork is being carried out.

(5) It is prohibited to weld, cut or heat metal close to any combustible or flammablematerial or where any combustible gas is present.

(6) During welding, cutting or heating of metals, the flame shall be kept away fromthe gas cylinder, regulator valve or hose.

(7) Immediately after finishing welding or cutting work, the gas/oxygen cylindervalve shall be closed and any pressure in the regulator valve, hose, torch systemshall be expelled before leaving the work site. A thorough inspection shall becarried out for the presence of any remaining flames prior to leaving the workplace.

(8) The Technical Mine Manager or any appointed person shall issue a permit forwelding or cutting work at any place where conditions are such that unusual fireor explosion hazards may exist. The said permit shall only apply on the day ofissue and caution against fire must be taken until the said permitted work iscompleted.

Working with Welding Equipment

Article 168Welding with Compressed

or Liquefied Gas

109

(Oxygen and Acetylene or Propane)

(1) Gas cylinders shall be handled with caution, shall not be allowed to fall or collidewith one another and must be well protected against excessive heat or coldness.

(2) Gas cylinders shall be stored with caution and tied firmly in order to preventdropping and shall not be stored close to any source of fire or any combustiblematerials, particularly oil and grease.

(3) Full and empty gas cylinders shall be stored separately and empty cylinders shallbe identified. Gas cylinders shall be used in the order received.

(4) Compressed gas/oxygen cylinders, regulator valves, hoses and other cylinderequipment shall not be touched or polluted with oily or greasy clothes, and shallbe kept well away from oil, grease or combustible material. Cleanliness shall beexercised in the maintenance of the equipment.

(5) Lifting or moving gas cylinders shall be done with caution by means of specialequipment and must not be dragged or rolled. When moving gas cylinders bymeans of a hoist, a secure lifting deck shall be used.

(6) When gas cylinders are not in use, the valve protective cover shall be tightlyclosed.

(7) Gas cylinders shall only be used where the said gas cylinder is fitted with thenecessary safety devices, particularly a pressure regulator valve.

(8) After opening the safety valve cover and before fixing the pressure regulatorvalve, the valve shall not be pointed at any person. Before opening it shall becleaned from any dirt and dust. The valve must be in a closed position beforeopening the pressure regulator valve, even when the cylinder is empty. The valveshall be opened slowly with the key provided and the key shall be hung on thecylinder during any operation.

(9) All compressed or liquefied gas welding work systems shall undergo inspectionand testing prior to use. Where any cylinder is suffering a leakage which cannotbe stopped by closing the valve or by tightening the connection, the said cylindershall be emptied in the open air, far from any source of flames. Repair of thedamaged cylinder shall only be carried out by an authorised workshop.

Article 169Welding and Cutting Containers

110

(1) It is prohibited to weld or cut any container that was used for the storage ofexplosives or any flammable substance except where the following steps havebeen taken :

a. the substance and any fume (from liquid metals), gas vapour or dust in thecontainer shall be removed, or

b. the substance and any fume (from liquid metals), gas, vapours or dust in thecontainer shall be rendered non-explosive or non-flammable.

(2) It is prohibited to put any explosive or ignitable substances into any container thathas just been welded until the said container has sufficiently cooled to prevent therisk of ignition of the said substances.

(3) Before welding any holes in oily and greasy containers, the container shall befilled with water and vented.

Article 170Open Containers

(1) Every tank, drum or other container holding a liquid substance, the top edge ofwhich is less than 1.5 meters above any floor, gantry or platform, must besecurely covered or fenced to a height of at least 1.5 meters, to prevent personsfrom falling into the container.

(2) It is prohibited to enter any container as specified in paragraph (1) of this Article,except where adequate precautionary measures have been taken to ensure that :a. the said tank is empty and the inlets thereto are closed and locked;

b. the said container has been flooded and/or ventilated to neutralise liquidresidues or the possible presence of caustic, irritant substances or anyflammable vapours;

c. all maintenance work on the interior of any container shall be continuouslysupervised by a supervisor and

d. any person entering a container shall be wearing a safety belt or safety harnesssecured outside the container and shall be monitored by a supervising person.

Article 171Stockpile Inspections

(1) Stockpiles of ore or any other material shall be inspected by a person authorisedto ensure that work place conditions are safe before any person is permitted towork at or close to the said stockpile.

111

(2) No person shall be allowed to work on or near any mineral stockpile that mayendanger his safety.

Article 172Overhead Protection

It is prohibited to work at any place where any person is working overhead, except wheresafety measures against falling objects have been taken, in accordance with the nature ofthe said work.

Article 173Passageways

(1) All passageways or other walking surfaces in a plant shall be wide enough toenable any person to move freely and shall be well maintained and free fromobstructions.

(2) Any opening in any floor or on any other surface of a building or plant which isused by people shall:

a. be protected by means of a safety fence no less than one meter in height, or

b. be securely covered using planks or any other material capable of supportingany load likely to be imposed theron.

Article 174Protection Against Fire Injury

(1) Any person working in a plant who handles molten material shall be providedwith personal protection and other appliances to protect the said worker frombeing injured by fire or affected by heat radiation.

(2) Such persons as mentioned in paragraph (1) are obliged to use the personalprotection and other appliances and take care of the equipment.

Article 175Rescue Equipment

(1) At any place in a plant where an accumulation of noxious or destructive gases orvapours occurs, detection equipment shall be provided in specific places as wellas approved type respiratory breathing devices and portable resuscitatingapparatus in adequate numbers.

112

(2) On every work shift there shall be one or more employees who are trained inusing breathing and resuscitation equipment.

(3) The employees specified in paragraph (2) must be designated by the TechnicalMine Manager.

Article 176Pouring Hot Materials

(1) Molten metals or hot materials must not come into contact with any cold, moist orrusty surfaces where such contact may cause an explosion.

(2) The ladle or slag pot shall be inspected before molten material is placed therein.

(3) When molten metals are transported by means of mechanical equipment, thecontainers shall not be filled above 10 cm below the rim.

(4) When the requirements in paragraph (3) is not fulfilled, the said container mayonly be moved after the supervisor has warned the person carrying out the movingas well as every person in the area.

(5) Warning signs shall be given when molten metal is being poured and prior tocontainers filled with molten metal are moved.

(6) The operator of any excavating equipment used for molten metal must obtainauthorisation from the supervisor of a blast furnace before beginning to dig anyslag pot.

Article 177Transporting Molten Metal

Equipment which is used for the transportation of molten metal shall be fitted withwarning signals to be sounded by the operator when the said means of transport is inmotion, or shall have warning signals that operate automatically and the said signals shallsound whenever the said means of transport is operated.


at Furnaces

(1) No person shall go above the casting floor of an operating furnace without thepermission of the supervisor or employee responsible for the said work. Thesupervisor shall ensure that the person assigned to keep guard outside is always

113

present to issue warning signals or to give assistance when there are hazardousgases or any other hazards.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply when the place of work islocated far from any operating furnace and where direct access to outside thebuilding is made available.

(3) Ready-to-use safety belts shall be provided at an easily reached place near the topstructure of a furnace in a plant.

(4) The charging door of a furnace must be provided with a safe working platformequipped with hand-rails at least one mete in height. The platform shall besupported to shield the floor plate from excessive heat. A ladder way or stairwaymust be provided from the base to the top of the platform.

(5) Two-way communication or a telephone shall be provided from the furnace top orany other dangerous place to the cast house, supervision room or any place inwhich a person is always on duty.

(6) When a charge becomes frozen or jammed in a furnace hopper and a person isrequired to dislodge the charge into the furnace, a guard rail shall be provided toprevent the person from slipping on to the hopper. Safety harness shall be wornduring such operations.

Article 179Supervision of HazardousWork Around the Furnace

(1) Every supervisor shall personally attend or appoint a competent person tosupervise any work around a blast furnace that might involve special accidenthazards.

(2) When working beyond routine inspection duties and carrying out minor repairs tothe furnace top :

a. smelting furnaces shall be extinguished and the area surrounding the saidfurnace shall be free from any person working;

b. a work order shall be obtained from the supervisor;

c. before undertaking repair work, the said work place shall be inspected for thepossibility of the presence of hazardous or noxious gases and the saidinspection shall be repeated as required to protect the workers and

114

d. breathing equipment, a safety cord and any necessary additional aidequipment shall be provided.

Part Six

Electrical Equipmentand Machinery


(1) Except where the Chief Mine Inspector creates requirements or standardsdifferent to those stipulated in this Regulation, all electrical installations shallfulfil the stipulations of the General Regulations of Electrical Installations(PUIL), other stipulations related thereto and Indonesian National Standards(SNI).

(2) All standards and definitions as found in the regulations as required in paragraph(1) shall also be effective.

(3) The high voltage electrical system layout and the development programme forevery mine shall be submitted to the Chief Mine Inspector with detailedexplanations and any changes or additions shall be reported as they occur.

(4) Any electrical apparatus on the surface of a mine which controls or is on the samecircuit as any apparatus underground shall comply with the requirements of theregulations for underground electrical systems.

Article 181Persons in Charge

and Competent Persons

(1) All electrical work shall be supervised by an electrical expert whose name shallbe recorded in the Mine Book.

(2) Electrical work shall only be carried out by a person who possesses electricalknowledge and experience.

Article 182Safe Working Systems

and Equipment

115

(1) All electrical systems shall be such construction as to prevent any danger arisingfrom its use and shall be maintained in a safe condition.

(2) All activities including maintenance of the system or any work near the systemshall be carried out properly to avoid any danger.

(3) Any protective equipment provided to comply with these regulations shall besuitable for its duty, maintained in safe condition and properly used.

Article 183

Electrical equipment shall be protected against :

a. mechanical damage;

b. the effects of weather, natural hazards, temperature and pressure;

c. the effects of moisture, soiling, dust or corrosive conditions, or

d. flammable or explosive substances including dust, gaseous vapours.

116

Article 184Insulation and Protection

of Conductors

(1) All cunductors in an electrical system which may give rise to danger shall beeither:

a. covered with insulating matereal and completely protected or

b. so placed or protected as will prevent any danger.

(2) Where conductors such as resistance banks are difficult to protect individually,any collective fencing shall be of metal, firmly connected to the electricalearthing system and so installed to prevent any contact with live parts.

Article 185Grounding or Other

Precautionary Measures

(1) Precautionary measures shall be taken, either by means of grounding or by anyother means. to prevent any hazard from occurring when any open conductivesection of the system becomes live as the result of incorrect use of the system orfailure of the insulation

(2) If a circuit conductor is connected to earth or to a similar common point, nothingwhich may give rise to danger by interfering with or disconnection of thatcommon point shall be placed in that conductor.

(3) The main ground connection of the grounding system shall be designed by anElectrical Engineer and shall have an adequate capacity and low resistance.Multiple ground connections shall be interconnected and at equal potential.

Article 186Connections

Every connection in a system shall be so constructed as to be mechanically andelectrically suitable for use and shall not cause any danger in normal conditions.

117

Article 187Power Surge Safety Devices

(1) Every electrical installation shall be fitted with efficient and well placed powersurge safety devices.

(2) A trailing cable that conducts electricity to mobile equipment shall be fitted withits own safety devices to prevent over loading or short circuiting.

Article 188Circuit Breakers and

Isolating Devices

(1) Appropriate equipment shall be provided to cut off the electrical current to andfrom any electrical equipment which will ensure the separation of any electricalequipment from any source of electricity, and shall include appropriate methodsof identifying circuits.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply to electrical equipment which isitself a source of electrical energy; however adequate safety measures shall betaken to prevent any danger.

(3) Apart from circuit breaker switches, each electrical appliance shall have localmeans of isolating all parts of the circuit of that appliance. The high and lowvoltage sides of a transformer shall be equipped with its own independent meansof isolation.

(4) Light bulbs or other small appliances protected by a single fuse not exceeding 10amps capacity may be collectively protected by one switch.

(5) Any main relay station and any important surface relay station or any relay stationthat controls underground circuits shall all be interconnected by telephone.

(6) Any branch of an electrical system shall be fitted with isolating switches in orderthat the branch can be isolated from the main system.

Article 189Circuit Breakers to

Underground Circuits

(1) A main switch to cut electricity to any underground mine that receives electricityfrom any surface source shall be installed on the surface.

118

(2) Appropriate procedures shall be made for the handling of switches as required inparagraph (1), including communication equipment to enable the main switch tobe used in a dangerous situation.


Prior to Working OnDeactivated Electrical Equipment

Prior to working on or working close to any electrical equipment that has been turned off(deactivated), precautionary measures shall be taken such as locking the main switch andfollowing the stipulations laid down by the electrical technician.

Article 191Working On or Close to Live Power Lines

(1) It is prohibited to work on or close to any bare live power lines, except underspecial circumstances. Safe working guidelines as created by the Technical MineManager shall be followed.

(2) Special safety rules shall be made to carry out work involving electrical welding,shall be created by an electrical technician and approved by the Technical MineManager.

Article 192Working Space, Access

and Lighting

(1) Adequate lighting shall be installed in all working spaces and access waysincluding any area around electrical equipment which is in operation.

(2) All fixed electrical appliances shall be housed in a closed room or suitable houses,unless exception is granted by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Electrical equipment shall be protected from dripping water and seepage.

(4) Electrical equipment shall be kept clean and dry.

(5) Electrical equipment located in any place exposed to coal dust shall be protectedby dust proof covers.

Article 193

119

Authority to OperateElectrical Equipment

(1) The Technical Mine Manager or the person in charge of the electrical divisionshall appoint a mine worker to operate and supervise electrical equipment.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply to any electricalequipment/machinery fitted with automatic safety devices.

Article 194Installation of Signs

on Electrical Equipment

(1) All electrical equipment and devices shall be fitted with information written on alabel made from an anti rust metal plate which displays the power, voltage andcurrent, the name of the manufacturer and the serial number.

(2) In the case of electrical motors aside from those specified in paragraph (1), therevolutions per minute shall also be displayed.

Article 195Circuit Diagrams

(1) A schematic diagram of the circuits of any system operated at a mine with avoltage in excess of 300 volts (250 volts for underground mines) shall beprepared and show every setting of any protective devices.

(2) All such schematic diagrams shall be kept at the mine office and made availableto the Mine Inspector at any time.

(3) Copies of schematic diagrams related to the use of switchgear in excess of 300volts (250 volts for underground mines) shall be displayed at the location of thesaid master switch.

Article 196Electric Locomotives

(1) The fuses or any other safety equipment on an electric locomotive and feedersshall be in a good condition and be inspected regularly by an employee whosename shall be registered in the Mine Book.

(2) It is prohibited to install automatic circuit breakers which exceed the work loadstipulated by the manufacturer.

120

(3) Locomotives shall only be left unattended where the switch key and controlhandle have been removed from the sliding bar and released.

(4) Electrical circuits which originate from trolley wires shall be connected safely toa grounding circuit.

Article 197Telephones

(1) It is prohibited to use any telephone while there is lightning.

(2) Any telephone in exposed locations shall be in a water proof case the metal frameof which shall be earthed.

(3) All telephones on a circuit common with underground telephones shall complywith all reqirements for underground telephones at the mine.

Article 198Lightning Safety Devices

(1) A suitable surge diverter shall be provided at the incoming end of all supplies to amine.

(2) When it is deemed necessary safety electrical installations shall be fitted withlightning conductors with an adequate safety capacity.

(3) Lightning conductors shall be inspected every six months or after every severecase of lightning.

(4) For any telephone or power circuit connected to any underground system, thelightning conductor shall be not more than 80 metres from the undergroundentrance.

(5) The connection of any lightning conductor to ground shall be separated from anymine earthing system by at least 3 meters in air and 15 meters in ground.

121

Article 199Safety of Overhead

Power Lines

(1) The distance between the ground and any overhead power line shall not be lessthan :

a. 5.8 meters across public and normal roads or 5.0 meters otherwise forvoltages up to 300 volts AC (600 volts DC) and

b. 6 meters across public roads and 5.8 meters otherwise for voltages above 300volts AC (600 volts DC)

(2) Warning signs or safety barriers shall be installed on overhead power lines whichcross transport roads and shall be installed no less than 12 meters from the nearestelectrical cable/line in every direction of approach.

(3) It is prohibited to carry out excavation, stockpiling or soil moving work within adistance of 25 meters of any electrical line, trolley wire/buried cable, exceptwhere the current in the said power line has been cut off or where the TechnicalMine Manager or technician has so permitted and has given instructions onworking procedures and safety.

Article 200Trailing Cables

(1) Trailing cables shall be attached to machines or vehicles in a manner to protectthe cable from damage and prevent strain on the conductors.

(2) Surplus trailing cable to vehicles and similar equipment shall be stored neatly onreels installed on the said vehicle or in a cable holder which is capable ofprotecting the trailing cable from the possibility of mechanical damage.

(3) Where any trailing cables unavoidably cross haul roads, they should either besuspended with the clearance as per the stipulations intended for overhead powerlines or protected using metal protectors strong enough to prevent damage causedby passing vehicles.

(4) It is prohibited to leave unattended any vehicles powered by a trailing cable whilein operation.

(5) Trailing cables which power vehicles shall contain an integrated groundconductor of adequate capacity.

122

(6) When handling high voltage trailing cables insulated gloves and shoes shall beworn.

Article 201

(1) Electrical technicians shall ensure that any laser used at the mine shall be of atype approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Electrical Engineer shall issue a code of practice for the safe use of lasers.

Article 202Hand Held Equipment

No hand-held tool at a mine shall operate at a voltage in excess of 125 volts DC and 220volts AC.

Article 203Warning Signs

(1) Every place containing fixed electrical apparatus other than electrical cables,junction boxes, remote control switches, telephones and signals, shall be providedwith clear notices which can be understood by every worker including :

a. directions to restore consciousness after an electrical shock as well as how tosafely remove a person from contact with an electrical source.

b. notices containing direction as to the procedures in case of fire and

c. notices prohibiting any person from handling or touching the said electricalequipment except those authorised to do so.

(2) Warning signs shall be installed that indicate any equipment which is operatedautomatically as well as signs which indicate the location of a telephone or anyother means of communication.

(3) Any electrical equipment including junction boxes of cables with a voltage inexcess of 1200 volts shall be clearly marked with warning notices displaying thevoltage of operation.

(4) A sign prohibiting open flames shall be installed at the door of any chargingstation.

123

(5) All switches and circuit breakers for equipment shall be clearly labelleddisplaying what equipment is controlled by or is protected by the said switchesand circuit breakers.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (5) shall not apply to light switches, conveyorcontrol switches as well as any signal control switch on the said equipment.

(7) Warning signs shall be made from durable materials be installed in visible placesand be well maintained.

Article 204Inspections, Testing

and Maintenance

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the Engineer in charge specifiesand carries out the scheme of inspections, testing and maintenance that willensure safe operation of all electrical installations.

(2) Electrical installations shall be examined by an expert on a regular basis atintervals not exceeding six months. The findings of the tests shall be recorded inthe Electricity Book.

(3) Every change made to any electrical installation shall also be recorded in the saidbook as well as on the electrical installation blueprints.

Article 205Duties and Responsibilities

(1) Any person not in charge of tending and supervising electrical appliances,apparatus or wiring, is prohibited from tending or touching the same.

(2) Repair or other operations to low voltage appliances, apparatus or wiring beingunder current may not be done except by, or under the supervision of, expertpersonnel applying the necessary safety measures.

124

Paragraph 2

Machinery


Machinery including every part thereof and the working gears of any equipment shall beinstalled and lodged firmly to solid foundations and must be well maintained.

Article 207Machinery/Engine Rooms

(1) It is prohibited for anyone to enter or to be inside a machinery/engine room,except concerned personnel.

(2) The restriction mentioned in paragraph (1) shall be clearly marked and installed atthe entrance to the machine room.

(3) Every machine room shall be fitted with an adequate lighting and ventilationsystem and shall be kept clean.

(4) It is prohibited to store used cloth and combustible materials or hazardous liquidsin any machine room.

Article 208Placement of Machinery

(1) Machinery must be placed in a room so as to ensure a sufficiently wide walkwaybetween the machinery and the walls and which is free from obstructions.

(2) Pipelines for air, steam, water and any other substances shall be properly installedand protected.

Article 209Safety Equipment

(1) Moving parts of all machinery must be provided with adequate and suitablefencing.

(2) Fly wheels, transmission gears, belt and transmission chains, axle and axle drivesand other rotatating parts that may cause danger must be in cage or fencedsecurely.

125

(3) Parts of machines with a high velocity rotation that can break apart and fly awaymust be covered and well fenced.

(4) When any machine operates without a safety fence or safety equipment duringtesting, warning signs shall be installed and safe working procedures shall befollowed.

(5) Any elevated runway or staging used for the purpose of inserting oil or for anyother similar purpose the height of which exceeds 1.2 meters from the floor shallbe fitted with a hand railing.

Article 210Handling Machinery

(1) Any person working close to any moving machine shall wear tight clothing.

(2) Machines starting with a prime mover shall be able to stop and start separately.

(3) It is prohibited to install or release the transmission belt of any machine which isin operation.

(4) Any machine operated by means of a prime mover shall only be operated orstopped after warning signals have been given to every mechanic or machineoperator on duty.

(5) Machine operators are forbidden to leave the machine in operation under theirsupervision in operation unattended.

(6) It is prohibited to operate any machine, apparatus or transmission equipmentwhich may endanger the safety of any person through electrical hazards ormoving parts. Before undertaking repair work on any apparatus powered byelectricity, the person to perform the said work shall be certain that all switches orpower supply switches to the said apparatus are off and tagged or locked.

Article 211Maintenance of Machinery

(1) It is prohibited to apply grease or lubricants to any machine that is in operation,except where the said machine is fitted with an automatic grease applicator or agrease or oil remote applicator.

(2) Cleaning of axle drive while the machine is running shall only be done usingspecial equipment.

126

Article 212Warning Signs

Clear and conspicuous warning signs shall be installed at any place close to anydangerous apparatus or equipment.

Article 213Inspections

(1) All machinery and equipment shall be inspected regularly in accordance with theschedule as required by the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) The findings of the inspection as intended in paragraph (1) shall be recorded in abook or on record cards.

Paragraph 3

Compressors


(1) The air intake for compressors must be as clean and as dry as possible.

(2) All compressors shall be fitted with an air filter.

(3) The temperature of compressed air in the compressor shall not exceed 40 degreesCelsius below flash point of the lubricating oil used. Reliable thermometers shallbe fitted appropriately for measuring that temperature.

(4) Whenever the compressed air temperature exceeds the limit specified inparagraph (3) of this Article or some defect is found in the cooler, then thecompressor must be stopped by the operator (if it can not stop automatically).

(5) The flow of compressed air from the compressor to the place of use shall be keptas dry and cold as possible.

127

Article 215Construction andSafety Equipment

(1) Compressed air vessels under very high pressure must have a safety factor of atleast 5 times the maximum design pressure.

(2) All pipe construction and connections must always be able to withstand the airpressure and flow.

(3) Every compressor and vessel shall be fitted with safety devices to ensure stabilityat the permitted maximum pressure. Such devices include pressure gauges,temperature monitors and safety valves that are capable of releasing pressurebuild up.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate the maximum operating air pressurewhich shall be written clearly on every compressor and compressed air vessel.

Article 216Lubricants

(1) The compressor lubricating oil must be of high quality with flash point higherthan 200 degrees Celsius.

(2) The Mine Inspector may take used lubricant samples from the compressor to testits flash point at the cost of the mining company concerned.

Article 217Inspections, Testingand Repair Work

(1) Every year or no less than every 8000 work hours, the compressor shall beinspected and where necessary repaired.

(2) The results of the inspection and repair work as required in paragraph (1) shall berecorded in a book provided therefor along with opinions and suggestions.

(3) Once every five years, the interior of pressure vessels with a diameter of no lessthan 1 meter and which are used for compressed air of maximum 8 atmospheresmust be inspected.

(4) Where necessary based on the findings of the inspection as required in paragraph(3), the capacity of the vessel shall be tested by pressuring water inside to at leastthan 3.5 atmospheres higher than the permitted air pressure in the said vessel.

128

(5) The Technical Mine Manager shall make a report of the findings of the testing forthe Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 218Steam Boilers

All equipment, system of installation and utilization of steam boilers at a mine mustconform with the existing regulations for steam boilers.

Part Seven

Stockpiling Liquid Fuels

Article 219

(1) Liquid fuel storage facilities with a capacity as required in Article 221 paragraph(2) shall obtain a permit from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Liquid fuels shall be classified as follows :

a. flammable liquid fuels shall be liquid fuels which have an ignition pointbelow 37.8 degrees Celsius and steam pressure of not more than 2.84kilograms per square centimetre and

b. combustible liquid fuels shall be liquid fuels which have an ignition pointequal to or above 37.8 degrees Celsius.

Article 220

(1) Flammable liquid fuels as specified in Article 219 paragraph (2) letter a shall beclassified as follows :

a. Class I A fuels which have an ignition point below 22.8 degrees Celsius and aboiling point below 37.8 degrees Celsius;

b. Class I B fuels which have an ignition point below 22.8 degrees Celsius and aboiling point above 37 .8 degrees Celsius and

c. Class I C fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 22.8 degreesCelsius and a boiling point below 60 degrees Celsius..

129

(2) Flammable liquid fuels as specified in Article 219 paragraph (2) letter b. shall beclassified as follows :

a. Class II A fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 37.8 degreesCelsius and a boiling point below 60 degrees Celsius;

b. Class II B fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 60 degreesCelsius and a boiling point below 93 degrees Celsius and

c. Class II C fuels which have an ignition point equal to or above 93 degreesCelsius.

Article 221

(1) Liquid fuel storage facilities consisting of one tank or a collection of tanks for thestorage of combustible liquid fuels with a capacity of 5,000 to 40,000 litres, andfor flammable liquid fuels with a capacity of 1,000 to 10,000 litres shall notrequire a permit from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) For liquid fuel storage facilities consisting of one tank or a collection of tanks forthe storage of combustible liquid fuels with a capacity above 40,000 litres, and forflammable liquid fuels above 10,000 litres, a permit shall be obtained from theChief Mine Inspector.

(3) Permits for storage facilities as specified in paragraph (2) shall be valid for aperiod of five years and may be extended.

Article 222

Liquid fuel storage facilities as specified in Article 221 shall meet the requirements asstipulated in this Ministerial Decree.

Article 223

(1) At every liquid fuel storage facility location the following shall be provided :

a. “Smoking Prohibited” and “Authorised Persons Only” signs;

b. lighting

c. fire extinguishers and

d. lightning conductors.

130

(2) The foundations of tanks shall be constructed from concrete and be capable ofwithstanding the weight of the tank and the contents thereof.

(3) For liquid fuel storage facilities consisting of a collection of tanks, the distancebetween each tank shall be no less than 10 meters.

(4) Where the distance between tanks as required in paragraph (3) is less than 10meters each tank shall be fitted with a water spraying installation.

(5) Around storage tanks or collections of stockpiling tanks of liquid fuels a safetyembankment shall be made of cement or an earth mound which is capable ofaccommodating :

a. for locations with only one stockpiling tank = maximum capacity + 20centimetres and

b. for locations with a collection of stockpiling tanks = ½ x the sum totalcapacity of all the tanks + 20 centimetres.

(6) The grounding resistance of lightning conductors at liquid fuel stockpilingfacilities shall be measured every six months or after severe lightning.

(7) The top of liquid fuel tanks shall be fitted with a gas discharge outlet equippedwith no less than 3 layers of brass wire mesh.

(8) The casing of liquid fuel stockpiling tanks shall be inscribed with the capacity ofthe tank and the type of liquid fuel contained therein.

(9) The filling inlet shall be at a distance of no less than 10 meters from the dischargeoutlet at the liquid fuel stockpiling tank facilities.

(10) Liquid fuel stockpiling facilities as specified in Article 221 shall be equipped witha safety fence at a distance of 5 meters from the safety embankment and whichshall be fitted with a locked door.

(11) The electrical board and pump shall be located outside the safety fence.

131

Article 224Storage in Non

Permanent Containers

Where fuels are stored in a drum or any other like container and which has a capacity ofless than 5,000 litres for combustible liquid fuels and less than 1,000 litres for flammableliquid fuels, the said storage facility shall surrounded with a security fence and fitted witha lockable door.

132

Article 225Minimum Safe Distance

Liquid fuel storage tanks shall meet the minimum safe distance requirements as follows :

LiquidFuel

Tank Capacity Minimum Distancefrom the Safety Fence to

a Public Road

Minimum Distancefrom the Safety Fence

to BuildingsClass Litres Meters Meters

I-II B - 1,500

1,501 - 3,000

3,001 - 46,000

46,001 - 115,000

115,001 - 190,000

190,001 - 380,000

380,001 - 1,900,000

1,900,001 - 3,800,000

3,800,001 - 7,600,000

7,600,001 - 11,400,000

11,400,001 and above

1.5

3

4.5

6

9

15

24

30

40.5

49.5

52.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

1.5

3

4.5

7.5

10.5

13.5

16.5

18

II C - 40,000

40,001 - 114,000

114.0001 - 190,000

190,001 - 380,000

380,001 and above

1.5

3

3

4.5

4.5

1.5

1.5

3

3

4.5

133

Article 226Construction of Tanks

The construction of tanks for the storage of liquid fuels shall meet the followingrequirements :

a. must be made of materials that are capable of withstanding fire;

b. must be made from recognised plate metal;

c. must stand upright, sturdy and stable;

d. must be capable of withstanding any liquid stored therein and must not leak forthe period of storage and

e. the joints between the plates of the casing of the tanks shall be welded, be rivetedor bolted or a combination of the two.

Article 227

Underground storage facilities shall meet the following requirements :

a. storage tanks shall be made from anti rust materials or the interior and exterior ofthe storage tank shall be layered with anti rust material and shall be equipped witha discharge pipe.

b. storage tanks set in the ground shall be no less than 1 meter deep calculated fromthe top of the tank and the area around the tank shall be filled with sand;

c. storage tanks shall be capable of withstanding pressure to 7 atmospheres;

d. it is prohibited to set tanks below railway tracks or roads;

e. the filling inlet shall be no less than 10 meters from the discharge outlet and

f. open flames or lights shall not be permitted near or in the area of filling inlet.

134

Chapter V

Drilling

Article 228Procedures

(1) The Technical Mine Manager or a responsible person for any drilling operationshall prepare operating rules for each type of drill used.

(2) The Operational Supervisor and Technical Supervisor shall ensure that anydrilling work is carried out according to the operating rules.

Article 229Site Preparation and

Rig Erection

(1) Drilling sites shall be located at an adequately safe distance from overhead powerlines, underground cables or pipelines.

(2) Drilling sites shall be secure from entry by unauthorised people and only thosepeople permitted shall be allowed to enter the drilling site and emergency exitsmust be provided from the drilling site.

(3) Facilities for washing, changing and storing clothing and personal goods shall beprovided at the drilling site except where such facilities are provided at a nearbylocation

(4) Where drilling equipment is to be moved from one drilling location to anotherdrilling location the drill stem, other fittings and equipment shall be secured, andthe drill mast shall be placed in a safe position. When moving the drill to a newlocation, the drill operator shall be given assistance by other drill helpers

(5) It is prohibited to carry out any other work underneath or in the vicinity of anyderrick while being erected or dismantled, or at any time the drill mast is raised orlowered.

(6) Raising or lowering the drill mast or derrick shall be carried out when there issufficient light.

(7) Precautionary measures shall be taken to protect the derrick or drill mast fromdamage caused by strong winds during erection, dismantling or raising work.

135

(8) In the case of raising or lowering a portable derrick or drill mast the instructionsfrom the manufacture shall be followed exactly. It is prohibited to use a derrickor drill mast with a work load in excess of the maximum work load limit.

(9) Lighting shall be installed so that the drilling work site and pipe racks aresufficiently well lit and so as to avoid glare in the eyes of the drill operator.Where necessary, aircraft warning lights shall be installed at the top of the derrickor drill mast and which shall comply with aviation regulations. Lighting shall bepositioned and equipped to protect the light covers.

(10) Drilling rigs should be operated on a level surface and, if working on a bench, soarranged that the rig is located at a safe distance of not less than 3 meters from thebench crest. Wilst in operation, a drilling rig should be so arranged that itslongitudinal axis be perpendicular to the bench crest.

Article 230Designation of Dangerous Areas

(1) Where drilling work cuts through any layer or deposit which discharges anynoxious compressed or combustible gas or liquid substance, the Technical MineManager or employee in charge of the work shall immediately stop the drillingwork and designate a hazardous area.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate guidelines for precautionarymeasures to be taken at any area declared dangerous as specified in paragraph (1).

(3) Guidelines as required in paragraph (2) shall include a prohibition on smoking orthe use of open flames, restriction on the use of internal combustion engines,standards for the construction and use of electrical equipment, drilling hole shutdown methods in an emergency situation and shall state the number and type ofbreathing equipment and personal protective equipment that must be provided atthe drilling site.

Article 231

(1) For areas where exploration drilling is carried out a situation plan shall beprovided and continually updated on a scale of no less than 1 : 2500, and shallinclude astronomical lines of longitude and must include the condition of the areawithin a radius of 500 meters of any drill hole or up to the boundaries of themining concession where the distance to the boundary of the mining concession isless than 500 meters.

136

(2) The map as required in paragraph (1) shall show :

a. all buildings, plants and pipelines.

b. the location of all drill holes by consecutive numbers whether finished orproceeding.

c. all roads, rivers, and springs.

(3) The vertical section of every drill hole shall be shown on a scale of 1 : 1000 fordepth and 1 : 20 for width and the section’s data shall be updated once at leasteach month or immediately after a hole is completed.

(4) The sections as mentioned in paragraph (3) shall show :

a. all strata layers drilled through;

b. any mineral deposits;

c. water bearing strata;

d. the type of drill hole casing and

e. means of shutting off water.

(5) A daily log book shall always be provided at drilling work in which shall berecorded the following :

a. drilling procedures;

b. rock layer conditions;

c. the formation of drilled rock;

d. depths reached and the location of any deposit;

e. daily progress;

f. the diameter of drill holes and drill pipe used;

g. the manner of shutting off water bearing strata, and

h. results of testing the means of shutting off.

137

(6) If artesian water is struck, the situation plan and section and the drilling log bookin relation to the particular deposit shall be updated and copies sent to the ChiefMines Inspector forthwith.

(7) All drill holes no longer required shall be filled in using solid materials.

Article 232General Precautions

(1) Prior to the commencement of drilling activities, the drilling site shall beinspected to guarantee the safety of drilling work.

(2) Portable fire extinguishers of an appropriate type and size shall be provided inadequate numbers and shall be ready for immediate use and be well maintained.

(3) Safety helmets and shoes as well as any other personal protective equipment shallbe worn by workers at or in the vicinity of any drilling site.

(4) Prior to the commencement of work on any work shift, the mine workers shallcarry out an inspection and ensure that all equipment is safe for use. Any unsafeequipment or conditions and any preventative measure undertaken therefor shallbe recorded in the drilling log book.

(5) It is prohibited to operate or move any drilling rig, except where all workers are ina safe location.

(6) All moving parts liable to cause an accident or injury shall be properly guarded.Guards on all driving chains shall be strong enough to withstand the impact of achain breaking under load.

(7) All stairs, stairways, handrails, safety fences on platforms and on drilling rigsshall be maintained in good condition. It is prohibited to place, store or leavetools or materials lying on stairs, stairways or on any platform.

(8) It is prohibited for any operator to leave any drilling equipment unattended whilein operation.

(9) Drilling crews and all other persons shall be at a safe distance from any movingdrill stem. It is prohibited to pass over any moving drill stem.

(10) It is prohibited for drilling crews to hold the drill steel or place their hands on thechuck while drilling is being undertaken.

(11) In the event of a power failure, the drill controls shall be placed in the neutraluntil power is restored.

138

(12) Any drill hole not in use shall be covered or fenced off.

(13) It is prohibited to undertake any drilling work using the mud flush system unlessmeans are installed to give warning of loss of mud.

Article 233Precaution on Drilling Rigs

(1) The derrick or drill mast shall be inspected before being erected or installed.Tools and other small articles required for erections shall be tied or otherwiseprevented from falling. Heavy tools and equipment shall never be carried aloft byhand, hoisting equipement shall be provided.

(2) A recognised system of hand signaling shall be used during load handling andslinging, and which shall be given by a person appointed therefor. In nocircumstances shall the hoisting equipment be used to raise or lower personnel.

(3) Derrickmen shall wear safety belts at all times when aloft. The safety belt tailrope shall be securely tied to the derrick mast 3 metres directly above the workingplatform and arranged in such a manner that there is no danger of its fouling therunning gear.

(4) Where substructures are used, guard rails not less than 90 centimetres high andtoeboards 15 centimetres high shall be fitted around the rig floor. Walkways andplatforms shall have non-slip surfaces.

(5) Workers who are nervous of working at high levels shall not be sent up a derrickor mast. Persons working aloft at a derrick or mast shall wear safety belts andlifelines and they shall be equipped with a belt in which hand tools can be secured

(6) The rig floor area and the draw-works engine floor area shall have not less thantwo escape exits placed on opposite sides of the rig to give unobstructed escape.

(7) The safety line at every dangerous platform on any derrick shall be wellmaintained.

(8) Electric motors used to drive draw-works shall have a suitable device, in additionto the regular motor control, which can be used as a means of stopping the motorpromptly in case of emergency. Electric motors and other electrically operatedequipment shall be adequately grounded.

(9) A derrickman shall not be aloft and all personnel shall stand clear off the rig floorwhile work on stuck drill pipe or casing is performed. When a line is being runinto or pulled from a drill hole, workers shall be at a safe distance.

139

(10) A box or shelf shall be provided to store all drill bits and other tools.

(11) The crown block sheaves of portable derricks and masts shall be equipped withguards that will prevent the hoisting line being accidentally displaced from thesheave grooves.

Article 234Bangka Drills

(1) When collaring or deepening a drill hole the casing shall always be maintained ina vertical position.

(2) It is prohibited for more than two persons to be standing on the platform whenwhen collaring holes and it is prohibited for more than four people to stand on theplatform after the casing has been planted rigidly.

(3) A kick plate 15 centimetres in height shall be installed around the edge of anyrotating platform.

(4) Tools shall not be placed on any rotating platform.

(5) Given that on rotating drill machines, installation and dismantling of the drillingrig, as well as the cleaning of the mouth of the drill hole is carried out manually,the drill shall be secured and cut off from the electrical connection or the drivemotor.

Article 235Warning and Other Signs

Warning notices stating restrictions applicable to unauthorized persons, naked lights,smoking and other hazards shall be prominently displayed as well as signs indicating thelocation of fire extinguishers and first aid kits.

Article 236Hand Drills

Before any hand drill is moved from one work site to another work site, the compressorshall be turned off and the hose released.

Article 237Floating Drill Rigs

140

(1) The working deck on any floating platform shall be no less than 50 centimetresabove the surface of the water on high tide and shall be fitted with a safety fence,toe boards and other safety equipment. Floating platforms shall be constructed tobe watertight and shall be inspected no less than once a week.

(2) Every corner of the working deck shall be fixed to an adequately heavy anchor.The anchor lines shall be stretched taut and the length of which shall be five timesthe depth of the water. The bottom positions of the anchors shall be marked withbuoys.

(3) Every floating drilling rig shall be fitted with :

a. life vests for not less than 110% of the maximum total number of mineworkers on the deck and stored at easily reached and visible locations;

b. grappling hooks with handles the length of which shall be no less than 5meters and with a sufficient number of ropes the individual lengths of whichshall not be less than 25 metres.

c. no less than 3 life buoys with cords of no less than 25 metres.

(4) For the entire duration of work shift life-rafts with a capacity of no less than 150percent of the total number of mine workers on the said shift shall be provided.

(5) Where a large wave is thought or expected to occur, the floating drilling rig shallbe moved to a distance no less than 40 meters from the original drilling locationand from the original anchor site.

(6) A two way radio communication system shall be provided between the floatingdrilling rig and the land station.

Article 238Drilling Ships

(1) Every ship and supporting vessels used for drilling work shall comply withprevailing shipping regulations.

(2) The derrick or drill mast on drilling ships shall be fitted with :

a. the flag of the company and appropriate warning signs that shall be clearlyvisible during the daytime;

b. a red light at the top of the ship which shall be clearly visible at a distance ofno less than two nautical miles and

141

c. one or more normal lights installed between a height of 6 metres and 30metres above the surface of the sea and which shall be clearly visible from adistance of no less than 5 nautical miles in darkness.

(3) Lights as intended in paragraph (2) letter c shall be designed to be capable ofsending Morse code letter U (..__) simultaneously and continuously for 15seconds.

(4) Every drilling ship shall be equipped with an auxiliary electrical generator.

(5) Every drilling ship shall be equipped with safety equipment adequate enough tobe capable of extinguishing fires, rescues at sea and for drilling work.

Chapter VI

Surface Mines

Part OneSafe Working Procedures

Article 239General

(1) Any mine which is still in use or which has been abandoned and which may behazardous, must be guarded off with a safety fence of no less than 80 centimetresin height or warning signs shall be installed.

(2) Access ways into the working site of any mine activity shall be properlymaintained

(3) Every access way as required in paragraph (2) which has an inclination of morethan 40 degrees shall be equipped with a permanently installed stairs or ladder.Where a ladder is installed at a gradient of more than 75 degrees a back cage shallbe installed.

(4) Permanently installed stairs as required in paragraph (3) shall be both safe andsturdy.

(5) Permanent ladders which exceed 10 metres in length shall have a landing at every10 metre interval and the upper extremity of the said ladders shall protrude 90centimetres past each floor.

(6) A permit shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector for the use of cableways or vehicles which travel on rail for the transportation of people.

142

(7) The opening of any shaft, hopper, forge or the chute shall be guarded with asafety fence.

Article 240Working Methods

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall guarantee the stability of the mining slopes,the stockpiles and that other materials have all been taken into account in theplanning of the mine.

(2) Stockpiling of overburden shall only be done at a distance of no less than 7.5metres from the end of the bench above the mine.

(3) It is prohibited to undertake any undercutting activities at any working face,bench or gallery, except where approval has been obtained from the Chief MineInspector.

(4) All working faces shall be safe from overhanging rock, and at any time scaling isbeing carried out all workers at the location in question shall evacuate.

(5) When any work is required to be carried out manually at any working face whichexceeds 2.5 meters in height from the working bench, all mine workers shall wearsafety belts or safety harnesses.

(6) The working face of any surface mine at the upper area of any undergroundmining operation shall only be made after approval has been obtained from theChief Mine Inspector.

(7) It is prohibited to work or be on active stockpiles of shattered rock, except :

a. when ordered by a mine supervisor;

b. when discharge of rock to and from the stockpile has been stopped;

c. when it has been guaranteed that the chute at the base of the stockpile isclosed and

d. when the worker is wearing a safety belt connected to a rope of adequatelength which is firmly and safely attached to a fixed point above.

Article 241The Height of Working Faces

and the Width of

143

Working Benches

(1) The inclination, height and width of benches shall be both secured and wellconstructed to ensure the safety of workers from falling materials or objects.

(2) The height of benches for work being carried out on layers containing sand, clay,gravel and other loose material shall :

a. not exceed 2.5 meters when undertaken manually;

b. not exceed 6 meters when carried out mechanically;

c. not exceed 20 meters when carried out by means of a clamshell, dragline,bucket wheel excavator or any like equipment except where approval has beenobtained from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The bench height for work carried out on solid material shall not exceed 6 meterswhen undertaken manually.

(4) When excavation is carried out entirely by means of mechanical equipmentequipped with sturdy safety cabins, the maximum bench height for all types ofsolid material shall be 15 meters, except when approval has been obtained fromthe Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) A stability study of the slopes shall be carried out when :

a. the height of the benches at any bench mining system exceeds 15 meters and

b. the height of each bench exceeds 15 metres.

(6) The width of the bench working platform shall be no less than 1.5 times the benchheight or less determined by the equipment used. To ensure working safety, asafety berm shall be built at the open edge, and shall be inspected every workshift for the possible presence of cracking or stress marks or any other signs ofweakness.

144

Article 242

(1) When constructing any shaft, trenching or any like work, and the wall openingexceeds 1.2 metres, a support shall be installed or the said shaft, trenching etc.shall be made on an incline at a safe angle.

(2) The construction of any embankment or water dam either temporary of permanentshall be adequately strong and shall fulfil prevailing requirements.

Article 243Drainage and Dams

(1) Every surface mine shall have a drainage system designed with an adequatecapacity.

(2) In order to reduce water flow into open cut areas, diverting embankments anddrainage systems shall be constructed.

Part Two

Hydraulic Mines

Article 244General

Planning for hydraulic mines shall provide details on the water circulation system, waterchannels, dams and waste pools etc.

Article 245Dams

(1) All dams shall be constructed according to the designs of a competent technician.

(2) The width of the base of embankments made from sand material shall be no lessthan 6 times the height of the embankment and the angle of inclination of thewalls shall not exceed 60 degrees against the flat plane, or shall not exceed theangle of the stockpile of material contained therein.

(3) Any wood used in the construction of an embankment shall be sufficiently strongand shall be installed sturdily.

145

(4) Dams shall be equipped with a pipe or canal installation that is capable ofcarrying water and of limiting the surface of water to no less than 60 centimetresbelow the surface of the embankment.

Article 246Operation of the Monitor

(1) Manually operated monitors shall be equipped with an counterweight device.When being operated the monitor shall be continually controlled by an operator.The distance between the monitor and the walls of the mining bench shall be atthe very least, the same as the height of the said bench walls.

(2) The area within a radius of three metres of the monitor shall be free of wood, rockchunks and other obstructions.

(3) It is prohibited for any person to be in front of any monitor that is operating.

(4) Mine workers being trained to operate the monitor shall be supervised by anexperience mine worker.

(5) The water pressure of the monitor shall be adequate enough to spray the walls ofupper benches.

(6) The height of mining benches shall not exceed 6 meters, except where otherwisestipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 247Pumps and Pipes

(1) Water pumps installed above water shall be equipped with a mechanical device toraise the said pump when necessary.

(2) The end of ground pump suction pipe shall be suspended from a tripod or anyother instrument with a similar function and be equipped with a floating deviceand be fenced off.

(3) The ground pump room shall be equipped with sound indicating instrumentscontrolled by the pump operator.

(4) The pump room shall be covered by a roof and always be kept dry and clean.

(5) Spray pumps shall be fitted with indicator meters.

(6) Prior to operating a spray pump the pump employee shall first inform the monitoroperator.

146

(7) The end of the suction pipe of the spray pump shall be guarded off with a safetyfence and danger warning signs shall be installed.

(8) Mud pumps shall be properly installed and shall not be used as pathways forpeople.

Article 248Electricity and Machinery

(1) Every electrical motor, lights in the pump room, jig installation and classifiershall be waterproof.

(2) All electrical installations shall be equipped with proper grounding.

(3) Overhead power line poles and or standard light poles shall be located so as toavoid spaying by the monitor and shall not be placed close to the edge.

(4) Electrical cables shall not be laid over metal or steel pipes.

(5) Spot lights shall be installed at locations that are both dry and free from floodingand be behind the monitor and be directed at the mining face.

(6) Removable spot lights shall be fitted with leakage breakers.

Part ThreeEarth Moving Equipment

Article 249General

(1) The type and construction of earth moving equipment used at any mine shall beappropriate to the kind of work to be performed thereby, the work site conditionsand the nature of the soil or rock to be moved.

(2) Every modification made to the construction of earth moving equipment from thestandards of the manufacturer which may impact on the safety or stability of thesaid equipment shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

147

Article 250Operator Requirements

(1) Operators of earth moving equipment at any mining operation shall meet thefollowing requirements :

a. be no less than 21 years of age;

b. have been declared both mentally and physically in good health by a doctorand

c. be in possession of an operating license issued by the Chief Mine Inspector orby any other authorised employee on behalf of the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) The operating license as required by paragraph (1) letter c may only be grantedafter the person applying has successfully passed an operation examinationcarried out by the mining company concerned.

(3) The operating license shall only apply in the mining operations area where thesaid document was granted.

Article 251Prohibitions Against

Passengers

(1) The operator shall prohibit any person from being on any earth moving equipmentin operation, except for the purposes of inspection, supervision, maintenance,repair work or upon the instruction of an authorised trainer.

(2) It is prohibited for any person to board or to alight from any earth movingequipment which is still operating.

Article 252Parking Earth Moving Equipment

(1) It is prohibited to leave unattended any earth moving equipment except when theparking brake has been applied, the bucket or knives have been lowered to groundlevel and the machine turned off.

(2) When an earth moving equipment is parked on an incline, chocks shall be usedunder the wheels or the said equipment shall be directed toward the roadside orembankment and the bucket and knives shall be lowered to ground level.

148

(3) When an electrically operated earth moving equipment is to be left unattended,the master switch shall be turned off and all of the controls shall be set to neutraland the parking brakes shall be applied.

(4) When any earth moving equipment is parked at any place which may bedangerous to other traffic the parking lights shall be turned on as well as otherhazard indicators.

Article 253Inspections and Maintenance

(1) The machinery and any mechanical part on earth moving equipment shall beinspected prior to being operated and regular inspections must be carried out.

(2) The employee in charge of engineering shall appoint a technician and stipulate aschedule for inspections as required in paragraph (1).

(3) The findings of inspections and maintenance as required in paragraph (1) shall berecorded in a book provided, which shall be signed by the appointed technician.

(4) It is prohibited to cross or work underneath the boom or any part of an earthmoving equipment that is raised or suspended except when safety measures havebeen taken to prevent the lowering of the boom or any part of the equipment.

(5) It is prohibited to carry out lubrication of any earth moving equipment which isstill operating except where the said equipment is equipped with an automaticlubrication system.

(6) It is prohibited for any person to carry out repair work on any earth movingequipment which is still operating except where the said operation of theequipment is necessary for the purposes of repair and maintenance work and theperson undertaking the said work shall be positioned so as to not be exposed to ahazard and be equipped with the necessary equipment.

Article 254Equipment

(1) The soil conditions at the location where the earth moving equipment is operatingshall be adequately strong and in a safe and stable condition. To preventaccidental movement during loading, the loader shall be secured with safetychocks.

(2) The area within the work radius of any earth moving equipment shall be free fromobstructions and is prohibited for any person to be within the said area.

149

(3) Prior to operating any earth moving equipment, the operator shall first sound anaudible warning.

(4) Earth moving equipment shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions with regard to the work load, speed, engine Rpm’s and inclination ofwork sites.

(5) It is prohibited to swing the dipper or the bucket above the cabin of any transportvehicle until the operator has left the cabin and is in a safe place, except where thesaid vehicle is specially designed to protect the operator from falling objects.

(6) It is prohibited to use earth moving equipment to lift or transport hazardousmaterials.

(7) Where earth moving equipment is moving to another location, the diggingequipment or excavating bucket shall be lifted just above the ground so as not tointerfere with the operator’s view. In the case of draglines, the bucket shall bekept as close as possible to the boom.

Article 255Bulldozers

(1) Where bulldozers are working on steep cliffs precautionary measures shall betaken such as tying the bulldozer with a strong cable to prevent rolling or slidingover the edge.

(2) It is prohibited for any person to be in any area where bulldozers are clearingtrees and where trees may be falling.

(3) Bulldozers used for work as required in paragraph (2) shall be fitted with a sturdycanopy.

Article 256Precautionary measures

(1) It is prohibited to ride in the bucket of any earth moving equipment for thepurpose of transportation.

(2) It is prohibited to work or cross under the bucket of any loader which is operating.

(3) At night and at times of reduced vision earth movers shall be fitted with adequatelighting.

Part Four

150

Evacuation in anEmergency Situation

Article 257

(1) When any person assigned to take charge of any division of any mining activitybecomes aware of any impending dangerous situation, the said person :

a. must inspect or order the inspection of the conditions of the area threatened bydanger and must take precautionary measures;

b. must immediately order every worker in the said area to evacuate where thesituation cannot be secured;

c. after having carried out the stipulation as intended in letter b, shall theninform his/her direct superiors that a danger exists and that all workers haveevacuated.

d. it is prohibited to enter the said danger area until declared safe.

(2) Any mine worker who knows of or suspects impending danger shall :

a. order every person to evacuate the said danger area and

b. immediately inform the person in charge of the said danger area.

(3) The dangerous situation and any actions to overcome the situation already takenshall be recorded in the Mine Book.

151

Chapter VII

Dredges

Part OnePerson in Charge

Article 258Responsibility

(1) Every dredge must have a dredge master, who shall be responsible for thesupervision, direction and control of the dredge operation including otherworks/places within his supervision.

(2) The dredge master is responsibile for the safety and health of every person on thedredge as well as any other place under his/her supervision.

(3) The dredge master shall be assisted by several shift leaders who shall beresponsible for the operation of the dredge on every shift.

(4) It shall be prohibited for any dredge to operate without the dredge master and orthe work shift leaders on board the dredge.

(5) In order to be appointed to the position of dredge master and or shift leader thequalifications as stipulated by the Technical Mine Manager shall be met and thenames of those accepted shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

Article 259Dredge Code

Regulation Book

(1) On every dredge a Dredge Code Book and Dredge Log Book validated by theTechnical Mine Manager shall be provided and shall be in accordance with theformat as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Every mine worker on the dredge shall understand the contents of the DredgeCode Book.

(3) The following shall be recorded in the Dredge Code Book :

a. A copy of the Mining Dredge Order;

152

b. all orders, prohibitions, and instructions regarding the dredge that has beenrecorded in the Mine Book;

c. the findings of inspections and measuring carried out during every work shiftof every compartment and tank filled with water or fuel;

d. the results of measuring of the height of the free board at each corner of thedredge at each work shift;

e. the findings of inspections of the ballast pumps and the pipelines which shallbe carried out every weekly;

f. the findings of inspections carried out by the Technical Mine Manager or arepresentative or expert employee thereof.

g. emergency signals and work signals

(4) A copy of the Dredge Code Book shall be available at the mining office on shoreand all entries made in the original book shall be immediately recorded in the saidcopy.

Article 260Mine Workers on Dredges

(1) All mine workers who work on a dredge shall be capable of swimming.

(2) Mine workers who work temporarily or any person permitted by the TechnicalMine Manager or the dredge master who is not capable of swimming shall at alltimes wear a life vest while on the dredge.

Article 261Duties of theDredge Chief

(1) The dredge master shall notify immediately the Technical Mine Manager when :

a. a fire occurs which may interrupt the operations of the dredge;

b. any damage which may endanger the dredge and workers;

c. any listing of the dredge of more than 2 degrees;

d. bad weather which may endanger the dredge;

e. any accident involving the fall of a person around the dredge.

153

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall give a response to every report from thedredge master as required in paragraph (1) and shall issue immediate orders orinstructions for the safety of the mine workers and the dredge.

(3) Orders and instructions given as required in paragraph (2) shall put the safety ofthe mine workers in the first priority.

Article 262Dredge Requirements

(1) Every dredge shall be stable and sea worthy of operation.

(2) Every dredge shall have a control room and a room for the operator of theelectrical generator which shall be soundproof, and a dining hall that must meethealth requirements.

(3) Every dredge shall have a ballast pump which shall always be kept in goodcondition.

(4) The construction of the deck of the dredge shall be constructed so as not to allowwater to remain on the decks.

Article 263Dredge Operation Permit

(1) Based on the evaluation of a dredge inspection result the Chief Mine Inspectorshall issue a dredge operation permit which shall be valid for a period of ten yearsand it can be extended.

(2) Extension of the permit as specified in paragraph (1) may be granted after theimplementation of an inspection by the Mine Inspector or any expert staffappointed by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) It is prohibited to make any modifications to any dredge which may affect thestability of the dredge except where approval has been obtained from the ChiefMine Inspector.

154

Part TwoPlacement of Dredges

Article 264Mooring

(1) The head, bow, and stern lines of any dredge operating at sea or on land shalleach be properly fixed to the anchor or poles.

(2) Every connection on the mooring lines which uses connection clamps shall befitted with safety nuts and pins.

Article 265Installation and Control

of Mooring Cables

(1) Every mooring cable shall be free from any obstructions and shall be stretcheddirectly between the dredge and the anchors or poles.

(2) In the case of an obstruction that cannot be removed, the mooring cables shall beoverpassed by using safe methods.

(3) It is prohibited to do any work within a distance of less than 20 metres of themooring cables while a dredge is in operation.

(4) Before pulling up the mooring cables, the cable operator shall be certain that noperson is within a distance of 20 meters of the said cables.

(5) At least 2 rolls of mooring cable shall be left on the mooring cable drum when thesaid cable is pulled out to its maximum length.

(6) Making of the cable eyes shall only be done by a competent person speciallyappointed by the Technical Mine Manager.

(7) Every anchor or pole shall be marked clearly and visibly.

(8) Mooring cable lines at sea shall be clearly and visibly marked.

155

Article 266Mooring Cable Holder

(1) It is prohibited to be on the buoy mooring line while the swing winch is inoperation.

(2) Any employee working on a buoy mooring line or performing repair work on anycable at sea shall be supervised by two other employees in a rescue boat.

(3) All employees as specified in paragraph (2) must wear life vests.

(4) Rescue apparatus shall be provided on the rescue boat.

(5) The rescue boat shall not be necessary where the buoy or work barge as requiredin paragraph (2) is sufficiently stable and accommodating.

Article 267Mooring Lines Crossing

Roadways or Water Ways

(1) Warning signs shall be installed and precautionary measures taken where mooringcables cross roadways or water ways.

(2) Any mooring cable support where the cable crosses over any road shall beadequately strong and safe.

(3) Where mooring cables cross water traffic ways, the Technical Mine Managershall appoint an employee to ensure the safety of the waterway.

(4) Water traffic way users as specified in paragraph (3) may only be permitted topass after the mooring cables have been lowered into the water.

(5) Mooring cable as required in paragraph (4) shall be weighted down to enable thecable to be lowered more rapidly and deeply.

(6) Where any access-way to a dredge crosses any mooring cable, the Technical MineManager shall stipulate special safety rules therefor.

156

Part ThreeDredge Pontoons

Article 268Compartment Inspection Hatches

(1) Every compartment shall be fitted with an inspection hatch with a cover or doorwhich is capable of being closed tightly and of being water tight, and shall be atleast 50 centimetres in height having a diameter or width of at least 60centimetres, and be well maintained.

(2) When the construction of the dredge makes closing of the inspection hatchesimpossible the Chief Mine Inspector, following consultation with the TechnicalMine Manager shall stipulate other provisions for the inspection of hatches.

Article 269Compartments

(1) Every compartment shall be water tight and shall always be kept dry and clean,except where the said compartments are used to store reserve fuel or fresh water.

(2) It is prohibited to make any hole in the wall-plates between compartments, exceptupon the permission of the Technical Mine Manager.

(3) Permission to create a hole in the wall plates between compartments shall berecorded in the Mine Book.

(4) Safe working procedures with regard to paragraph (2) shall be stipulated by theTechnical Mine Manager and recorded in the Dredge Code Book.

(5) Upon completion of the work, any hole created in the walls of any bulkhead shallbe immediately closed.

(6) Every part of the pontoons on the port and starboard sides of the dredge as well asthose close to the bucket ladder shall be protected by means of a safety tank.

(7) It is prohibited to store any materials in any compartment for storing or for thestability of the dredge except where special permission has been obtained fromthe Chief Mine Inspector.

157

Article 270Ventilation of theCompartments

(1) The compartments on every dredge shall be provided with a proper air ventilationsystem.

(2) Every dredge shall be equipped with one or more blower.

(3) Air pressure in the last compartment of the air circulation system of any series ofcompartments shall be at least 20 centimetres water columns higher than the airpressure outside the said compartment.

(4) The height of the air pipe at the edge of the deck of any dredge in operation at seashall be at least 80 centimetres, and at any other place 40 centimetres.

(5) The height of the air pipe at the edge of the deck of any dredge in operation onland shall be at least than 60 centimetres, and at any other place 40 centimetres.

(6) Air pipes shall be provided with a watertight plug suspended from the saidventilation pipe readily available for use.

(7) Air pipes as required in paragraphs (4) and (5) shall be free from any obstacle,and shall be easily visible and reachable.

(8) A diffuser shall be installed on the end of any air pipe used to ventilatecompartments.

Part FourInspections

Article 271Routine Inspections

(1) At the beginning of each shift all compartments shall be inspected and thecontents of the cooling water tanks, fuel tanks and ballast tanks shall bemeasured.

(2) No less than once a week ballast pump installations or bilge including thepipelines and control valve shall must be inspected and tested.

(3) The report of the said inspections shall be signed by the inspecting employee.

158

(4) When ballast and bilge pumps are incapable of functioning well, immediate repairwork shall be carried out in at least 48 hours.

Article 272Compartment Inspection

Methods

(1) Inspections of compartments shall be carried out by at least two employees, oneof whom shall stay on the outside of the compartment on the deck close to theinspection hatch.

(2) The employee who enters the compartment, shall be provided with radiocommunications equipment or shall wear a safety belt connected to a safety lineof adequate length and strength in order to be able to signal to the employee onthe outside of the compartment to go for help.

(3) Prior to entering the compartment, fresh air shall be blowed into the saidcompartment for at least 30 continuous minutes.

(4) Every portable lamp used for the inspection of the compartments shall be gas tightand shall not have an electrical voltage in excess of 24 volts.

Part FiveDredge Safety

Article 273Pontoons

Above the Surfaceof the Water

(1) The freeboard of the pontoons of a mining dredge shall not be less than 50centimetres at any point around the deck and in an emergency situation not lessthan 25 centimetres.

(2) In order to facilitate readings of the height of freeboard above the surface of thewater as required in paragraph (1), the four corners of the dredge shall be fittedwith measuring scales.

(3) Exemption on the stipulations for the height of the freeboard above the surface ofthe water as required in paragraph (1) shall be granted following prior approvalfrom the Chief Mine Inspector.

159

(4) On every work shift the height of the freeboard above the surface of the water atthe four corners of the dredge shall be recorded as well as the position of thebucket ladder.

Article 274Listing of the Dredge

(1) Every dredge shall be fitted with an inclinometer which is easily read andinstalled in a central vertical position in the control room.

(2) When the permanent list of the dredge exceeds 2 degrees :

a. excavation and pumping work shall be stopped;

b. every effort must be made to realign and rebalance the dredge;

c. the Technical Mine Manager shall be immediately informed;

d. any employee not directly related to re-balancing or realignment efforts shallprepare for the possibility of evacuation.

(3) Where the constant list of the dredge is more than 5 degrees, the Dredge Mastershall immediately order all persons to evacuate, except those employees directlyrelated and responsible for re-balancing and realignment efforts.

(4) Where the dredge is at a constant list of more than 7 degrees all employees shallevacuate.

(5) Based on the studies of the balance system of the dredge, the Technical MineManager may request exemption as intended in paragraph (3) and paragraph (4)from the Chief Mine Inspector.

(6) The Technical Mine Manager shall set up an evacuation procedure from thedredge in times of an emergency situation.

Part SixSafety Equipment

Article 275

A safety rope with attached rings shall be provided around the pontoon of every dredge,at a hight not exceeding 40 cm above the normal water level.

Article 276

160

(1) Every dredge shall be provided with :

a. life vests that comply with Indonesian National Standards, for at least 110percent of the total maximum number of people at one time on the dredge.The life vests shall be positioned where they are immediately available andclearly visible;

b. at least 6 grappling hooks with handles not less than 5 metres in length..

c. at least 6 small anchors and each has a 25 metres rope, and

d. at least 6 life buoys and each has a 25 metres rope.

(2) The equipment as required in paragraph (1) shall always be available andmaintained in good condition.

Article 277Rescue Chains in the

Waste Chamber

(1) The waste chutes of every dredge shall be provided with no less than three chainshung crosswise or lengthways.

(2) About 25 centimetres from the end of such chutes there shall be provided twochains with an iron ring at the lower end hanging down to within 10 centimetresabove the water level.

Article 278

Dredges which have conveyors for the purpose of waste disposal shall be fitted withemergency stop switches connected to easily reached cords along the length of theconveyor.

Article 279Fire Prevention

(1) Every mining dredge shall be provided with a sufficient number and capacity offire fighting equipment of the type that can extinguish fire of any class.

(2) Fire extinguisher shall be placed at areas which have the potential for fire andshall be conspicuous, easily reached, easily used and clearly marked. Each fireextinguisher shall be maintained properly to be always ready for immediate use.

161

(3) Beside the fire fighting equipment as required in paragraph (1), every electricalgenerator room shall be provided with powder fire extinguishers of substantialcapacity and set on trolleys or other means for mobility in use.

(4) All employees and supervisors in the electrical generator and transformer roomshall be trained to be capable of using fire extinguishers effectively and safely.

(5) It is prohibited to place anything in front of or around fire extinguishers whichmay prevent ease of reach of the said fire extinguishers

(6) The liquid fuel pipeline in the machine room shall be made from copper or iron.

(7) It is prohibited to place anything, especially combustible materials, inside oraround electrical panels or transformers.

Article 280

(1) At every dredge operation a boat or motor boat shall be provided for transportingemployees or for the purpose of providing assistance.

(2) All boats or motor boats supporting the mining dredge operation shall be subjectto the provisions of this decree (order) as long as it is not contrary to the maritimelaw.

(3) Every boat or motor boat supporting the dredge operation shall be provided withlife vests for not less than 110 percent of the maximum number of people on suchboat. Fire fighting equipment in sufficient numbers shall be provided on motorboats.

(4) Motor boats supporting the dredge operation shall be provided with radiocommunication.

(5) Any motor boat supporting the operation of only one dredge which operates at seashall always be at the such dredge.

(6) The working barge used as part of any dredge operation shall be considered aspart of the dredge.

162

Article 281The Stern Anchor

Every dredge operating at sea must be fitted with a safety anchor chain attached to thestern of the dredge and shall be ready for immediate use at any time.

Part SevenMachinery and Electricity

Article 282Machinery

(1) Before starting any electrical generator or restarting any machinery on the dredge,an audible pre-start warning shall be sounded throughout the dredge.

(2) Before any machine, equipment or any moving part of a dredge is operated orrestarted after a stoppage, the shift supervisor or a machine employee shallinspect and ensure that no other person will be endangered by the operation of thesaid machinery.

(3) Any moving part of any machine or transmission equipment on a dredge whichmay be dangerous shall be properly guarded.

(4) It is prohibited to store any combustible materials or liquid substances in theelectrical generator room.

(5) Any revolving screen drive engine, upper tumbler drive engine, winch ladderdrive engine, and winch mooring line drive engine shall be provided with anemergency stop switch and local switch with the capability of being padlocked byany person doing repairs to the equipment.

(6) Emergency stop switches and local switches as required in paragraph (5) shall bepositioned for ease of visibility, ease of reach and use and shall be clearly marked.

Article 283Electrical Requirements

(1) Every off-shore dredge shall be provided with an auxiliary electrical generatorwith a capacity to be able to provide electricity for lighting, ballast pumps andradio communication. The said auxiliary electricity generator shall be maintainedin good condition and shall always be ready for immediate use.

(2) All electrical panels, switches and lights on the dredge exposed to water must beof a kind that is water proof.

163

(3) Electrical cable installations on a dredge shall be supported by a tray.

(4) Electrical cables that cut through a steel platform shall be guarded.

(5) The Technical Mine Manager shall create special rules for every type of workusing electric arc welding on a dredge and which shall include the following :

a. designation of a location that is safe for welding work;

b. the use of earth return conductors to the welding transformer independent ofthe earth connector on the job being welded.

c. provisions regarding the storage and maintenance of electrode welding,welding cables and electrode holder and

d. electric welding cable connections shall be properly insulated and bewaterproof.

(6) It is prohibited to use any welding machine which utilises an AC electrical currenton any dredge.

(7) Trail cable connections of electrical power lines from an electrical generator onland to the dredge shall be waterproof and be supported by means of buoys.

(8) Every off-shore dredge shall be fitted with fog lights (yellow lights) at the veryleast at the bow and stern.

Part EightSafety Measures

Article 284Man Overboard

(1) If there is any person falling into the water around the dredge :

a. emergency signals shall be immediately sounded;

b. excavation and pumping work shall be immediately stopped;

c. assistance shall be given immediately.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager may order excavation and pumping work to berestarted after the man overboard has been found or after a maximum searcheffort has been made.

164

Article 285Diving Team

(1) Every off-shore dredge or group of off-shore dredges operating in a close areashall provide a trained and organized sub-aqua rescue team being capable of usingsub-aquatic breathing apparatus except if otherwise stipulated by the Chief MineInspector.

(2) The sub-aqua rescue team as required in paragraph (1) shall be under thesupervision of one Technical Mine Manager.

(3) Every member of the sub-aqua rescue team shall be trained and shall possess acertificate of proficiency in the use of sub-aqua breathing apparatus awarded by atraining school or other institution recognised by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Every member of the sub-aqua rescue team :

a. must ensure his availability at home or at his place of work for ease of contactwhere necessary;

b. must receive periodic refresher training underwater;

c. must undergo regular health examinations.

(5) The rescue team shall be so organised that sufficeint team members are availableto render effective assistance during all working periods.

(6) Sufficient numbers of sub-aqua breathing apparatus and air cylinders shall beprovided and maintained and kept at a place designated by the Technical MineManager.

Article 286Emergency Signals

(1) All dredges shall be equipped with both audible and light emergency signallingsystems.

(2) Audible and light emergency signals as required in paragraph (1) shall bestipulated by the Technical Mine Manager and recorded in the Dredge RegulationBook.

(3) Every person on a dredge or any person who has a work relation to the dredgeshall understand the meaning of the emergency signals as required in paragraph(1).

165

(4) In the case of any danger, only the Dredge Master or the shift supervisor or anyperson appointed especially for this purpose can give or activate the dangersignals.

Article 287Work Signals

(1) Every dredge shall be provided with a suitable audible signal system as workingcommunication.

(2) The code of working signals to be used shall be stipulated by the Technical MineManager and every person on a dredge shall understand the meaning of suchsignals.

(3) The code of working signals shall be posted at a prominent place at everyworking area on a dredge.

Part NineTowing a Mining Dredge

Article 288

(1) A dredge can only be towed from one location to another by a written permissionof the Technical Mine Manager. The permit shall include the provision of suchtowing.

(2) A copy of the towing permit as required in paragraph (1) shall be forwarded to theChief Mine Inspector.

Article 289Safety Precautions

(1) Before towing a dredge from one location to another across the open sea, thefollowing safety precautions must be taken :

a. every compartment of the pontoons is in a safe condition;

b. every man-hole must be closed and made watertight;

c. ballast pump and the pipelines are in good working condition;

d. all ventilation pipes must be closed and made watertight and

166

e. all loose equipment is secured to prevent movement.

(2) On every dredge being towed there shall be provided :

a. equipment to patch the pontoons;

b. portable pumps equipped with its own motor;

c. sufficient cooling water and fuel;

d. welding machines and apparatus

e. food and drinking water, in sufficient amount for all persons on the dredgeduring the period of towing plus 100% as a reserve for emergency.

Article 290

(1) When towing a dredge across the open sea, the number of persons on such adredge, shall be limited to the work needed during the period of towing. Thenames of those persons shall be entered in the Dredge Log Book.

(2) If any barges or floating devices are towed along with a dredge, no person shallbe allowed on the barges or floating devices and the tail attachment to the dredgeshall be such as to allow easy release or severance in emergency.

Article 291

Communication between the Towing Master of the dredge and the Captain of the TugBoat shall be by means of a two way radio communications system.

167

Part TenDocking of Mining Dredge

Article 292Docking

(1) Every dredge shall be in dock at least once every ten years, unless it is otherwisestipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Whilst any dredge is undergoing repair or overhaul in a dockyard owned by thecompany concerned, the dockyard manager shall have responsibility for the safetyand health of workers.

(3) During docking of a dredge all steel plates in contact with water and any electricalequipment shall be dismantled and replaced.

(4) Any changes made to the dredge which may affect stability or balance shall beapproved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) When docking is complete, the Mine Inspector shall make an inspection of therepairs of the said dredge.

Part ElevenAuxiliary Facilities

Article 293

A building, located on land near the working area of the dredge, shall be available for thepurpose of carrying out recording of the presence of workers at the commencement andcompletion of working hours.

Article 294Bridges and Piers

(1) The construction of bridges and piers shall be adequately strong and be equippedwith safety fences.

(2) Pier as specified in paragraph (1) shall enable any person to board /alight anywater craft safely in any weather conditions both at low and high tide.

(3) Bridges and piers shall be fitted with lighting and direction signals.

168

(4) Any dredge operating inland shall be fitted with a bridge 60 centimetres in widthwith an adequate length and fitted with hand railings to connect the dredge toland.

Chapter VIII

Underground Ore Mines

Part OneMine Administration

Article 295Division of Mines

Underground mines that are close to each other and have connected ventilation systems,shall be treated as one mine and shall be under the supervision of a sole Technical MineManager except where otherwise stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 296Underground Mine Manager

and Supervisors

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint an Underground Mine Managerwhose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(2) In carrying out supervision in the mine the Underground Mine Manager shall beassisted by an operational supervisor and a technical supervisor.

(3) Where there exists more than one underground mine or where the undergroundmining area is a large area, a regional supervisor may be appointed who shall bedelegated responsibility based on the area.

(4) The boundaries of areas as required in paragraph (3) shall be indicated on anunderground mining map and made clear at the Mining Office and a copy of themap must be forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector.

169

Article 297Qualifications

(1) The Technical Mine Manager may act as the Underground Mine Manager exceptwhere the Mine Inspector objects in the interests of occupational safety andhealth.

(2) The Underground Mine Manager along with the supervisors shall have technicalcapabilities, qualifications and experience as stipulated by the Chief MineInspector.

(3) It is prohibited for any mine worker to undertake any activity in any mineunderground where the Underground Mine Manager or any other personappointed as representative thereof is not present in the mining area.

(4) The requirements of paragraph (3) and Article 296 shall not apply where thenumber of people carrying out any activity in an underground mine at any time isless than 20 people for mechanical mines or less than 100 people for manualmines.

(5) The Technical Mine Manager in appointing the supervisors as required in Article296 paragraph (2) and paragraph (3) shall inform in writing the parties concernedof their responsibilities and duties based on the area and time.

(6) The requirements of Article 12 shall also be required for the appointment of theoperational and technical supervisors for underground mines.

Article 298Duties of the Underground Mine Manager

and Supervisors

1. The duties of the Underground Mine Manager shall be as follows :

a. to organise all activities in the operation of the mine in accordance with thestipulations prevailing in this regulation and the instructions of the TechnicalMine Manager.

b. to guarantee the supply and flow of materials needed to support undergroundmining activities, and to ensure safe and uninterrupted work.

c. to conduct inspections of all ventilation systems and any section ofunderground mining that requires ventilation, at least once every threemonths.

170

2. Inspect equipment, instruments, machinery, electrical equipment and work in anyunderground mine, in accordance with the duties of the supervisor concerned.

3. The Underground Mine Manager or his representative may request a written orderfrom the operator or Technical Mine Manager for any work that may affecthis/her obligations as provided for in this regulation.

4. In an emergency situation the Technical Mine Manager may directly give ordersto underground mine workers bypassing the Underground Mine Manager.

5. The Technical Mine Manager shall be certain that detailed recording of thenumber of people starting on every shift in the underground mine is carried out.

Article 299

(1) The operational supervisor and the technical supervisor shall be directlyresponsible to the Underground Mine Manager.

(2) Where appointed, the regional supervisor as intended in Article 12 and Article 13shall be responsible to the Underground Mine Manager.

Article 300Mine Inspections

(1) On every shift the operational supervisor shall :

a. inspect every work site where work is being performed, every road or travel-way used by workers during the said shift and any blasting site and

b. inspect every outlet, stairway to be used by workers that day.

(2) In carrying out inspections as required in paragraph (1) the operational supervisorshall take corrective measures for any safety hazards found.

(3) At least every 7 days the operational supervisor or the technical supervisor shallinspect the condition of the shaft, raise, winze or any emergency means of egressto the surface.

(4) The operational supervisor shall carry out :

a. inspections of the entire ventilation shaft system at intervals of at least every30 days;

171

b. inspections of the entire length of roads that are not normally used but whichmay be used as alternative emergency exits at intervals of at least threemonths and

c. inspections of the potential danger of accumulated water or mud and carry outsafety measures as needed.

(5) The technical supervisor shall :

a. carry out inspections of the facilities and infrastructure used for any hoist inunderground mines at intervals of at least 24 hours for any hoist used totransport people and at intervals of at least 7 days for any hoist used totransport goods;

b. carry out inspections of facilities used for the transportation of people andmaterials at every level;

c. carry out inspections of mine de-watering pumps and

d. carry out inspections of the condition of supports.

Article 301Duties and Obligations

of Underground Mine Workers

(1) Apart from the stipulations of Article 32 and 33, every worker :

a. must work co-operatively and in compliance with instructions given by thesupervisor or employee in charge of any activity;

b. must not cause any other worker to not be able to work;

c. must not move or damage any safety fence, cover, barrier, warning sign orany other infrastructure installed for safety purposes;

d. shall be prohibited from walking to, and from any other work site aside fromthe designated routes;

e. shall be prohibited from forcibly crossing any barrier or danger sign exceptwith the permission of the supervisor;

f. shall be prohibited from sleeping while in the underground mine and

g. shall be prohibited from forcibly opening any locked door, entering anymachine room or control room except with the permission of the supervisor.

172

(2) During any mining activities :

a mine workers shall make detailed inspections of :

1) the working face

2) any road that is being dismantled or repaired and

3) any support being installed or dismantled;

particularly where blasting has only recently been carried out.

b. mine workers shall ensure that any work site left at the end of a working shiftis safe, however, where this cannot be carried out, the said area shall befenced off and a report made to the Underground Mine Manager and

c. mine workers shall take any necessary measures to overcome interruptions tothe ventilation of the mine.

(3) It is prohibited to leave any lamp or any other combustible goods at theunderground mine site without supervision.

(4) It is prohibited to handle or operate any electric motor that is more powerful than7.5 kilowatts, except :

a. when carried out by an operator;

b. when carried out by a mine worker acting on written orders and

c. in an emergency situation to turn the motor off.

(5) It is prohibited to release any noxious or combustible gas in any undergroundmine.

(6) On hoist installations for the transportation of mine workers it is prohibited toclimb on top of the roof of the conveyance skip except where permitted by thesupervisor.

(7) When climbing on top of the conveyance it is prohibited to :

a. attempt to or try to open the gates of the conveyance and

b. attempt to leave the conveyance prior to coming to a complete standstill at thestop.

173

Part TwoMeans of Egress

Article 302General

At underground mining works two separate exits shall be provided except during shaftdevelopment, the construction of exits to the surface, the construction exploration shafts,or any shaft not intended for production and which was commenced from a shaft or exitto the surface with the stipulation that the number of workers shall not exceed 30 people.

Article 303Exits from the Mine

(1) Shaft or exits as specified in Article 302 shall be separated by at least 30 metresso that any interruption in one of the said exits will not affect the use of the otherexit.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall stipulate evacuation procedures for the use ofone exit where one of the exits cannot be used due to an interruption.

(3) Where an interruption as indicated in paragraph (2) occurs, the Technical MineManager shall :

a. carry out the procedures for evacuation from one exit

b. order securing measures to be carried out and

c. make a report for the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Where an interruption as indicated in paragraph (2) occurs, all underground minework shall be stopped and the Technical Mine Manager shall limit as much aspossible the number of mine workers under the ground namely :

a. only those mine workers carrying out securing work of the exit affected and

b. only those mine workers who are providing accident assistance and equipmentrepair work.

(5) Repair work of the affected exit as specified in paragraph (2) may be carried outafter approval from the Mine Inspector is obtained.

Article 304Equipment and Auxiliary Apparatus

174

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide additional equipment where thenormal equipment used for the exit is damaged or jammed.

(2) Additional equipment as required in paragraph (1) shall :

a. be maintained, inspected and tested by a competent person to always be readyfor immediate use and

b. shall be inspected and tested by a competent person.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager shall create adequate and effective requirements forthe use of equipment and shall ensure that the said guidelines are known andabided by and that the copies thereof are displayed at the mining office.

Article 305Access between Exits

Apart from the requirements of Article 302, every landing at any shaft or exit to thesurface shall be equipped with a access way or ladder that leads to the landing at the shaftor exit way to another surface.

Article 306Construction and Maintenance

of Roads and Ladders

The Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that :

a. any road connecting to any place of work shall :

1) be adequately constructed and well maintained;

2) be safe and easy to use for walking and the height of which must not be lessthan 1.7 metres and

3) free from obstructions.

b. every ladder or stairway shall be constructed for strength and be well maintained

Article 307Means of Egress from Work Sites

175

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 302, every work site shall be equippedwith two separate means of egress, one of which leads to the shaft and one whichleads to the surface.

(2) The means of egress which leads to the shaft or means of egress to the surfaceshall be clearly marked.

(3) A clear scheme shall be provided at the means of egress from any work site whichleads to the mine means of egress.

(4) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall not apply to :

a. work sites with less than nine workers where the possibility exists for up tothree additional temporary workers for such duties as inspections,examinations, testing or taking samples and

b. approval has been obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 308Guards or Barrier Requirements

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall install adequate guards at any area declareddangerous.

(2) An employee working at any dangerous area as specified in paragraph (1) shallcheck that the barrier or guards is installed in good condition.

(3) It is prohibited to change or move any barrier or guards at any dangerous areawithout the permission of the Technical Mine Manager.

Article 309Intake Airways

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the fresh intake airway to anywork site is well maintained and that where possible materials used along theintake airway are fireproof.

(2) In the fresh air intake airway it is prohibited to :

a. bring any combustible goods andb. carry out any activity which may lead to fire.

Part ThreeShafts and Hoisting

176

Article 310Shafts and Their Use

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that every shaft, raise, winze andincline including the equipment thereof is installed for strength and safety.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that the operation of the shaft, raise,winze, incline and including the equipment thereof is carried out safely.


a. appoint competent workers to carry out inspections, testing and maintenance ofthe shaft, raise, winze, incline and the equipment thereof;

b. stipulate in writing and in detail what needs to be inspected, tested andmaintained as intended in letter a and

c. record the findings of inspections and testing.

(4) In carrying out work as required in paragraph (3) letter a :

a. safety belts shall be provided in adequate numbers as well as hangingfacilities and

b. employees shall always wear safety belts.

(5) It is prohibited to enter the bottom of any shaft which is not fitted with shaftcovers, except for the purpose of carrying out work or to sink the shaft and onlywhere adequate safety measures have been taken.

(6) Any landing at a shaft shall be equipped with a safety gate to prevent materialentering the shaft and the said gate shall be closed except when loading andunloading.

(7) Every landing at a shaft shall be equipped with an adequately large space toenable the movement of people, goods and equipment.

(8) Positive stop blocks or derail switches shall be installed on any rail track leadingto the collar of or the landing of any shaft.

(9) Loading and unloading facilities shall be built in such a way as to prevent anymaterial falling into the shaft.

Article 311

177

Transportation through the Shafts,Winzes, Raises and

Inclines

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide adequate and safe equipment for mineworkers while using any shaft, winze, raise, and incline.

(2) Any shaft, winze, raise and incline with depths of more than 45 meters shall beequipped with a hoisting machine.

Article 312Transportation of Materials and Minerals

through Shafts, Winzes, Raisesand Incline Roads

The Technical Mine Manager shall implement safety measures when transportingmaterials and minerals through any shaft, winze, raise and incline roads.

Article 313The Hoisting Machine and

Equipment Thereof

The hoisting machine and equipment thereof shall meet the following stipulations :

a. made to prevailing standards;

b. be 5 percent more powerful than the required level of power to lift a conveyanceat maximum load;

c. be equipped with brakes capable of stopping the conveyance at maximum load atthe lowest point in the shaft, and be capable of withstanding the pull at maximumpower from the machine, and be equipped with a brake lock as well as integratedsafety facilities;

d. be equipped with a conveyance position indicator;

e. be equipped with an emergency button in the hoist operator room;

f. be equipped with automatic equipment to prevent the hoisting machine frommoving beyond designated limits and exceeding stipulated speeds, except wherestipulated otherwise by the Chief Mine Inspector;

g equipped with automatic brakes capable of safely stopping a load when thehoisting machine is not capable of lifting a load;

178

h. be equipped with signals which sound automatically at a distance of tworevolutions from the rope drum or at a specified distance prior to the conveyancearriving at the landing.

i. there shall be no less than 3 rolls of remaining cable on the rope drum when theconveyance is at the lowest landing

j. all equipment on the hoisting machine shall be easily operated by the hoistoperator from the seat and

h. safety equipment shall be provided to absorb collisions where the conveyanceslides freely at the bottom of the shaft.

Article 314Lifting Equipment

at the Shaft

(1) It is prohibited to use any conveyance for the transportation of people where theconstruction of the said conveyance makes it possible for people to come intounintentional contact with the walls of the shaft.

(2) In order to prevent the conveyance being pulled beyond the maximum limit of thetop of the shaft, equipment shall be installed to stop and withhold the conveyancesafely.

(3) The design of a conveyance shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector priorto the said conveyance being built and operated.

Article 315The Rope Book

(1) At any mine where hoisting machines are used, the Technical Mine Manager shallprovide a book to be called the Rope Book in which shall be recorded alltechnical details regarding cables, shafts, winzes, raises and any conveyance usedin the operation of the mine, including as well as the findings of cable testing andinspections.

(2) The Rope Book shall always contain the latest data and may be inspectedfrequently by the Mine Inspector.

Article 316Cable Inspections and

Safety Equipment

179

(1) Hands-on inspections of the exterior of the hoist cable and tail cable shall bemade in order to determine the presence of any damage at least once a day and thefindings shall be recorded.

(2) At least once a month the section of the hoist cables which are continuallymeasured and coiled, as well as the tail cables, guide cables and the rubbingcables shall be inspected after cleaning and the diameter of the cables shall bemeasured at a selected points and the findings of the inspections recorded.

(3) Once in a month the section of the cable remaining on the drum when theconveyance is at the lowest position shall be inspected and lubricated. Whereduring the said inspection, damage is found, the damaged section of the cableshall be cut out while still complying with letter i. of Article 313.

(4) At least once a day the emergency safety catches shall undergo an inspectionwhich must entail the state of cleanliness, gripping power and distance inaccordance with the instructions of the Technical Mine Manager.

(5) At least once every three months the emergency safety catches as required inArticle (4) shall be inspected and tested by means of suddenly releasing the emptyconveyance from stopping position to enable the safety catches the opportunity togrip the guides.

(6) When the emergency safety catches as required in paragraph (5) are notfunctioning the conveyance shall not be used until repair work is complete.

(7) Measuring and recording of the following shall be carried out at least once amonth for friction hoist installations :

a. stretching of the cables;

b. the diameter of the cables;

c. the position and number of broken wires in the cable.

(8) The findings of the inspection and testing as required in paragraph (1), paragraph(2), paragraph (3) and paragraph (7) shall be recorded in the Rope Book and theimplementation of paragraph (4) and paragraph (5) shall be recorded in the HoistBook.

(9) At least once a year a detailed inspection shall be carried out on any damage toany part of the hoisting machine, namely the headgear pulley, deflecting sheaves,the shafts and bearing blocks as well as the hoist cables. None destructive testingequipment shall be used. The date of the test shall be recorded in the Hoist Bookand be reported to the Technical Mine Manager.

180

Article 317Criteria for Cables

to be Discarded

(1) It is prohibited to use any hoist cable at any shaft, raise or winze where :

a. the strength of which has fallen 10 percent from its original strength;

b. stretching tests indicate that stretching is more than 60 percent compared tothe original stretching tests;

c. the number of broken wires in one strand exceeds six;

d. the cables are rusted or

e. where the degree of lengthening of the cable of the friction hoist exceeds thenormal degree of lengthening.

(2) No tail cable, guide cable or rubbing cable shall be used if :

a. their strength has fallen by 25 percent from the original strength;

b. lengthening of the stretching tests exceeds 60 percent compared to originaltesting;

c. the number of broken wires in one strand exceeds six or

d. the cables are rusted.

181

Article 318Cable Strength

1) A new installed hoisting cable for a skip shall have a safety factor of 5 of themaximum loaded capacity of the skip.

2) the strength of the cable being used to calculate the safety factor, shall be takenfrom the strength of the cable noted in the testing certificate issued by laboratoriesfor cable testing.

3) a safety factor of the cable shall be calculated using data from the dead load,acceleration, friction factor, movement factor, and bending strength.

Article 319Hoisting Cables

1) A safety factor of new installed hoisting cables shall be calculated as follows:

a) calculation based on static condition resulting from the strength of the cablecompared to the maximum loaded skip, with at least a safety factor of 6.

b) calculation based on dynamic conditions resulting from considering the effectof the dead load, acceleration, friction, and bending strength, with a safetyfactor of 5.

2) It is prohibited to make use of hoisting cable as specified in paragraph (1) formore than 2 years.

3) When results of an inspection and testing of a cable meet any requirements ofArticle 316, the cable shall be changed, even if it is less than 2 years.

Article 320Hoist Cable Connections

(1) The connection device between the hoist cable and the conveyance shall not becapable of coming loose itself and it shall be prohibited to use a open hook.

(2) The connecting device as required in paragraph (1) shall be approved by theTechnical Mine Manager.

182

Article 321Cable Use Limits

(1) It is prohibited to use any cable that has been spliced for hoisting purposes.

(2) It is prohibited to use any cable which does not possess a testing certificate from acertified laboratory.

(3) It is prohibited to use any cable not equipped with specifications.

(4) It is prohibited to use any used cable for hoisting, except with the writtenapproval of the Chief Mine Inspector.

(5) It is prohibited to use used hoisting cables for hoisting purposes unless the cablehas been well maintained and the Technical Mine Manager has ensured that thesaid cable is still safe for use.

(6) It is prohibited to reverse the ends of the cable that has been attached to the drum,and attach it to the conveyance mechanism, or vice versa except with the writtenapproval of the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 322Rope Capping

(1) It is prohibited to use rope capping for any hoist, except where the said cappingwas made six months prior to use.

(2) No capped rope shall be used unless the type of capping withstands a load at least90 percent of the breaking strength of the rope, and the capping was made undersupervision of a competent person.

Article 323Rope Re-capping

(1) It is prohibited to re-use any rope capping except where the original rope cappingwas cut no less than 2 meters.

(2) The strands of the cut of cable as specified in paragraph (1) shall be opened upand the condition of the section in the cable shall be tested by a capable personappointed by the Technical Mine Manager and the results of testing shall berecorded in the Rope Book.

183

Article 324Rope Capping Methods

Any cable which has the end strands opened up and folded back forming a cone shall notbe used in any hoist except where a wedge shaped cover made from soft metal is betweenthe unopened cable and opened cable and the end is folded back. The length of the wedgeshaped cover shall not be less than eight times the diameter of the cable.

Article 325Lubrication of the Cable

Lubrication of the cable on the operating drum shall be carried out in accordance with theoperating conditions and such maintenance shall be done at least once a month, or asfrequently as possible in order to ensure that the lubricant on the cables remains is goodcondition.

Article 326Inspections of the Hoist Cable

After 18 months of service and thereafter at intervals of six months, the hoisting ropeshall be cut off no less than 3 meters from the lower end measured from the clamp or thelike for testing and the results of the said testing shall be recorded in the Rope Book.

Article 327Inspections of Attachments

(1) On newly installed hoist cables, the connecting attachments between the cableand the conveyance mechanism, and between the cable and the hoist drum, shallbe inspected by a competent person as appointed by the Technical Mine Manager.

(2) Equipment as specified in paragraph (1) shall not be used prior to the requiredtests which require that two trips of the conveyance skip be done, up and down atmaximum work load, and only after the connection attachments have been re-tested with good results.

(3) The hoist operator shall record the results of the tests as required in paragraph (2)in the Hoist Book and the findings of inspections of the connection attachmentsmust be recorded in the Rope Book.

184

Article 328Hoist Operator Room

(1) The hoist operator room shall be properly constructed to ensure that the noise ofthe machine or any other noise does not prevent the hoist operator from hearingsound signals.

(2) The hoist operator room shall be fitted with emergency lighting.

(3) It is prohibited to enter the hoist operator room except where permitted by theUnderground Mine Manager.

Article 329Hoist Head Frames, Sheaves

and Drums

(1) The construction of the hoist head frame shall be capable of withstanding totaldead load, either live or wind loading.

(2) The hoist head frame shall be high enough to give adequate clearance for theconveyance to stop in the event that it travels beyond the designated limits.

(3) The head sheave and deflection sheaves shall be appropriate for the size of thecable and the said sheaves shall be properly maintained.

(4) The dimensions of the drums shall suitable for the type and length of cable usedfor hoist installations,.

(5) The hoist head frame shall provide an escape exit in the event that the conveyancemoves through the safety limit switches into the head frame.

Article 330Requirements of the

Hoist Operator

(1) The hoist operator shall be at least 21 years of age and be adequately educatedand granted authority.

(2) Every hoist operator shall be physically and mentally healthy as evidenced by adoctor’s certificate and shall be free from the effects of alcohol and narcotics.

(3) It is prohibited to operate any equipment which may impact on the movement ofthe hoist or hamper the operation of the hoist, except where so authorised.

185

(4) The hoist operator is prohibited from transferring his/her duties to any otherperson except to a competent person in an emergency situation, or a person whowas trained under the supervision of a hoist operator granted authority by theTechnical Mine Manager.

(5) While any person is underground, the hoist operator shall always be in the hoistoperator’s room.

(6) The hoist operator is prohibited from working more than 8 hours a day except inemergency conditions.

(7) A maximum extension of four hours of the working hours may be granted andshall only be granted for Sundays or holidays but rest time of no less than 8 hoursmust still be available before returning to work.

Article 331Speed of the Hoist

(1) The hoist speed during the transport of people shall not exceed 5 metres persecond, except in an emergency situation.

(2) The hoist speed during the transport people for any shaft shall be determined bythe Technical Mine Manager and the said speed limit must not be passed.

(3) Maximum normal operating acceleration and deceleration rates shall not exceed1.5 meters per second square (m/s2) unless stipulated otherwise by the Chief MineInspector.

(4) An automatic control shall be installed to ensure that the acceleration anddeceleration do not exceed 1.5 meters per second square (m/s2).

Article 332Signals

(1) Every mine shaft shall be equipped with communication equipment, signals thatconnect the hoist machine room with the base of the working shaft, working level,shaft collar and every landing deck.

(2) Where the hoist is equipped with electric signals, the hoist operator shall repeatthe same signals.

(3) Signalling equipment as required in paragraph (1) shall only be installed oroperated on the conveyance.

186

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall create uniform rules regarding hoist signalsfrom the hoisting machine which shall be posted in the hoist room and at everylanding level.

(5) Any worker handling a conveyance, skips and any other vehicle used to transportpeople or materials must understand the signalling regulations.

(6) It is prohibited to give a signal to operate or stop a conveyance or skip except byan authorised person.

(7) Apart from the signals as specified in paragraph (1) voice communication such asa telephone shall be provided at each station and the hoist room.

Article 333Hoist Specifications

(1) A drum hoist unit shall be certified by the manufacturer for the allowablemaximum pull and maximum suspended work load.

(2) A friction hoist unit shall be certified by the manufacturer for the allowablemaximum rated suspended load.

(3) It is prohibited to increase the capacity of the work load of the hoist except wherewritten approval from the Chief Mine Inspector is granted.

Article 334Permits for Hoists for theTransportation of People

(1) Written permission shall be obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector prior to usingany hoist for the transportation of people.

(2) A hoist permit as required in paragraph (1) may only be issued where the hoistcomplies with the requirements as stipulated in these regulations and the MineInspector has carried out an inspection and testing thereof.

(3) A hoist permit for transporting people shall only be valid for a period of twoyears.

(4) Where the use of the hoist for the transportation of people fails to meet thestipulations of these regulations at a later date, the permit shall be deemed legallyinvalid.

187

Article 335

It is prohibited to enter any underground mine through any shaft, raise, winze and inclinethat is no longer used except where such entry is possible in a safe manner.

Article 336Shaft Sinking

(1) Protection from falling objects shall be provided above any person working in ashaft.

(2) The hoist bucket shall be stopped 5 meters above the shaft bottom to wait for asignal from the workers at the bottom, before the hoist bucket is lowered further.

(3) A refuge hole shall be provided at the bottom of the shaft for workers during workwhich involves lowering or lifting of the hoist bucket.

Article 337Safety in Shaft Sinking

(1) Supervision shall be carried out to ensure that the sinking of shafts is inaccordance with previous requirements, plans and designs.

(2) The shaft sinking supervisor shall ensure that work is carried out safely.

(3) Every shaft or winze shall be equipped with wall supports made of wood orcement or by other safe means while shaft sinking is being carried out, andinstallation of wall supports of the shaft shall be carried out at all times at adistance of no more than 1 ½ meters from the bottom of the shaft.

Article 338Shaft Inspection Record Book

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide an inspection book for every shaft,raise, winze and incline which shall be used for the recording of inspection notesand which shall be signed by the person carrying out the inspection.

(2) At least once a week the findings of the inspections of every shaft shall be madeknown and signed by the supervisor in charge of carrying out maintenance of theshaft.

(3) The findings of inspections of dangerous conditions and those already overcomeshall be recorded and signed by the supervisor in charge of carrying outmaintenance of the shaft.

188

(4) The inspection book for all shafts, raises, winzes and inclines, shall always beavailable when requested by the Mine Inspector and the name of the employeecarrying out the inspection shall be registered in the Mine Book.

Article 339General Inspections, Tests

and Shaft Maintenance

(1) Inspection, testing and shaft maintenance procedures including hoistingequipment shall be developed and revised as necessary.

(2) When any part is found or believed to be defective through the inspectionsrequired in paragraph (1), the hoisting machine shall not be used before repairwork is carried out.

(3) After repairs required in paragraph (2), the employee carrying out the inspections,testing and maintenance of the hoist shall :

a. include a signature that indicates that the said work was completed and carriedout properly;

b. record and provide the data of parts not functioning properly;

c. store the certificates and records for a period of one year.

(4) Spare parts used for the repair of the hoisting machine shall meet the quality andstandards of the original parts.

(5) At the start of every work shift, the hoist operator shall inspect the hoist machineincluding testing of the over travel, the dead man pedal, position indicators andthe conditions of the brakes.

(6) At the completion of all repair work on the hoist machine, and after thecompletion of blasting in the vicinity of any shaft, or when the hoist is notoperated for one or more work shifts, the hoist machine shall be tested by meansof one entire trip empty of a load before being used to transport people. The saidtests shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(7) The connection between the hoist cable and the hoist operating drum, and theanchorage with the conveyance used for the transportation of people shall beinspected by a competent employee at least once every 24 hours.

(8) Sheaves used at the shaft, raise and or winze shall be inspected every week and belubricated.

189

(9) The findings of inspections as required in paragraph (8), shall be registered in theshaft inspection book.

(10) The name of any employee who carries out an inspection as intended in thisArticle shall be registered in the Mine Book.

Part FourEmergency Situations

Article 340Mine Surface

(1) When any employee who works on the surface of an underground mine seesanything dangerous, the said employee shall :

a. immediately order all other people working in that section to leave the saidplace;

b. inform his/her direct superiors of the danger and the evacuation of the mineworkers and

c. after ensuring that no one enters the danger zone, an appointed employee shallinspect the condition of the said area and carry out safety measures.

(2) It is prohibited to enter danger zones before the said area has been declared safeby an employee in charge therefor, except the person carrying out the inspectionsand safety measures.

(3) Mine workers not assigned to carry out inspections or safety measures in thedanger zone shall :

a. leave the danger zone;

b. order people to leave the said danger zone and

c. inform the employee in charge of the said danger zone.

(4) Measures taken to overcome the situation and the time taken to declare the areasafe shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(5) Any action taken as required paragraph (1) which may endanger the safety ofworkers who carry out activities in underground mines shall be reported to theUnderground Mine Manager.

190

Article 341Evacuation Due To Risk Of

In-rush or Firein Underground Mines

(1) In accordance with the provisions for prevention of fire where it is suspected firemay break out, the Technical Mine Manager or any other person at that time withassigned duties at the mine shall ensure that workers :

a. are evacuated from the area at risk of fire breaking out and

b. in accordance with the provisions for prevention of fire or where it issuspected fire may break out, where there are indications that a fire hasalready started all workers shall be evacuated from any area which may beaffected by fire or impacted by the effects of the said fire.

(2) Except for the requirements in paragraph (5) all persons are prohibited fromentering a danger area, and all effort shall be taken to prevent all persons fromentering any area already evacuated in accordance with paragraph (1) before thesaid area is declared safe by the Technical Mine Manager or the UndergroundMine Manager.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager or the Underground Mine Manager shall carry outinspections, make reports of the incident and the findings of the inspections forthe Chief Mine Inspector, as well as make inspection reports which shall include amap that indicates the affected area as intended in paragraph (1).

(4) The findings of inspections and the maps as required in paragraph (3) shall beattached or displayed at a specific place in order to be known by workers.

(5) The requirements of paragraph (1) and (2) shall not apply to :

a. emergency rescue employees ;

b. fire extinguishing and control employees;

c. employees assigned to secure the said area andd. employees carrying out inspections prior to the return of workers.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (1) letter b shall not apply to any person assignedto prevent the spread of fire although it may not be directly dangerous.

Article 342Evacuation Caused by

191

Inadequate Ventilation,Outbursts or Other Emergencies

(1) Areas affected by inadequate ventilation include:

a. any area in the mine where the ventilation is inadequate as specified in thegeneral requirements for ventilation and ventilation standards and theregulation thereof;

b. any area where an outburst occurs or where there is the risk of an impendingoutburst;

c. an area affected by any other hazard included in-rushes or fire as specified inArticle 341.

(2) As required in Article 341 paragraph (1), employees who are assigned with dutiesin the affected areas shall :

a. order all workers to evacuate the affected area for a safe place;

b. take any necessary measures to inspect and to secure the affected area;

c. prevent or prohibit any worker from entering the affected area as required inparagraph (1) until the said area is declared safe.

(3) The Underground Mine Manager or his representative shall ensure that allemployees in charge of the various sections of the mine are informed ofinadequate ventilation, outbursts and other hazards.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall record in the Mine Book the following :

a. the reasons for any evacuation;b. the condition of the affected areas andc. any precautionary measures taken.

(5) Records as required in paragraph (4) shall be displayed at specific locations inorder to be known by workers.

(6) Situations specified in paragraph (2) letter a and paragraph (3) shall not apply toany mine worker permitted to enter any affected area as specified in paragraph (1)where :

a. such entry is necessary in order to rescue a worker;

b. such entry is necessary to implement duties in implementation of duties beingcarried out as required in paragraph (2) letter b;

192

c. such entry is necessary in order to make the affected area safe;

d. such entry is necessary in order to determine the effectiveness ofprecautionary measures taken and

e. such entry is necessary in order to determine whether or not it is safe for aperson to return.

Part FiveIn-rushes, Emissions

and Outbursts

Article 343Data and Information

on the Mine Area

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall be in possession of the most up-to-dateinformation on any work area and any planned work area including :

a. any abandoned work site and surrounding areas (whether the said site is anopening to a mine or not);

b. any strata that contains or is suspected of containing water or gas and

c. any material that when wet will flow.

(2) When any work is affected by the presence of the sea, lakes, rivers and any othersurface water (accumulated naturally or not), the Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. determine the composition and thickness of the entire layer located betweenthe opening of the mine and the surface water and

b. ensure that the layer is protected to prevent the occurrence of gushing waterfrom the surface

Article 344Prevention Efforts

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall identify any sources of potential in-rushes,emissions, or outbursts, and shall take preventative action against such in-rushes,emissions or outbursts into the mine :

193

(2) a. it is prohibited to carry out any work at any area that is potentially dangerousexcept where the Technical Mine Manager has taken measures to secure thearea for workers;

b. apart from the requirements of letter a, the Technical Mine Manager shallensure that any work carried out in any area of the mine that is potentiallydangerous is carried out in accordance with plans for :

1) the prevention of in-rushes, emissions or outbursts and

2) for the preparation of any precautions to reduce the danger of in-rushes,emissions or outbursts where the such in-rushes, emissions and outburstsoccur.

c. where the requirements of letter b are enacted, the Technical Mine Managershall ensure that copies of the working system and any amendments theretoare:

1) stored at the mine office;

2) displayed at a location easily known about by workers and

3) forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector no later than 30 days prior to thecommencement of work, or less in the case of any special circumstancesas permitted by the Chief Mine Inspector;

d. the requirements of letter b shall not apply where the Technical MineManager makes a report to the Chief Mine Inspector of any precautionarymeasures not required and no later than 30 days prior to the commencement ofwork or in the case of special circumstances as allowed by the Chief MineInspector.

(3) Where conditions indicate the potential for an in-rush, emission or outburst, andwhere work is being carried out or where work will be carried out, the TechnicalMine Manager shall inform the Chief Mine Inspector as soon as possible.

Article 345Inspections by Drilling

Apart from the provisions of Article 344, it is prohibited to continue any work within adistance of 45 meters from any area where it is suspected that there is the potential forany in-rush hazards, except where drill holes have been made that are adequate to releasethe water or gas.

Part Six

194

Ground Control and Supports Methods

Article 346General

The Technical Mine Manager shall undertake control of the movement of the strata inthe mine and where necessary supports shall be installed to support the ceiling and wallsof any opening at any work site.

Article 347Safety Pillars

(1) Safety pillars shall be provided to protect the shaft and exits.

(2) Safety pillars shall be provided for safety when there are lakes, rivers and damsabove the mine.

(3) Safety pillars shall be provided where there are public facilities above the saidmine.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall forward mine planning maps, geological mapsto the Chief Mine Inspector where there are any conditions as specified inparagraph (1), paragraph (2) and paragraph (3).

(5) The Chief Mine Inspector may amend the size of safety pillars as required inparagraph (1), paragraph (2) and paragraph (3) including any other requirements.

(6) It is prohibited to add to and reduce the size of safety pillars except whereapproval has been obtained from the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 348Mine Boundaries

(1) A safety pillar of mineral layer shall be left along the intersection of a minerallayer and bedrock, unless such bedrock is adequately solid and strong.

(2) A layer of minerals for use as pillar support shall be provided between one leveland another and between one mining block and another including crown pillars.

Article 349Working face

(1) It is prohibited to undertake mining by means of under cutting whereminerals/rocks may suddenly cave in.

195

(2) The distance between the working face and the filled space shall be as close aspossible, but must still enable workers to carry out work.

Article 350Mine Worker’s Duties

(1) Underground mine workers shall be given training on the recognition ofimpending ground collapse.

(2) Where an impending cave in is suspected, warning signals shall be sounded andall workers shall leave the said area.

(3) Mine workers shall inspect the condition of any work site at the commencementof work.

(4) Loose rock shall be cleared away or supported prior to work in the said area iscarried out.

(5) The operational supervisor shall oversee the implementation of work guidelinesand inspect the conditions at work sites. Conditions of haulage roads at the mineincluding travel-ways shall be tested periodically.

Article 351Supports

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall create guidelines for supports for every typeof opening.

(2) Any opening that requires supporting shall be made in accordance with the typeof rock and mining methods.

(3) It is prohibited to remove or modify any support already installed, except whereso ordered and such action shall be supervised.

(4) It is prohibited to remove or modify any flooring, roofing, matting, logging ortimbering and the like thereof where such action would cause the opening to bedangerous except under strict supervision.

(5) Materials used for supports shall be adequately strong and be supplied insufficient amounts and be ready for immediate use.

(6) When materials used for supports are not supplied and conditions at the work siteare dangerous, all activities at the work site must be stopped.

Article 352

196

Timbering

(1) Wood to be used as supports at any active work site shall be installed correctly.When necessary wedges shall be installed for added strength to ensure that themaximum function of the supports is achieved.

(2) Every prop set for any ceiling or wall of any working face or mine shaft shall beinstalled on a sturdy base.

(3) Any damaged, loose or loosened wood support which may be unsafe shall beimmediately repaired or replaced.

(4) Any mine worker who works at any stope where square sets are used shall becareful that the floor is in line with the cap especially after blasting and where it isconsidered necessary such wooden square sets may be nailed.

(5) Square sets installed at stopes shall be fitted with blocks and wedges installed inthe wall and roof and at the uppermost section of the square set top lagging shallbe installed, while the open space between the top lagging and the rock roof shallbe supported using pigsties or blocks installed above the upright supports of thesquare sets.

Article 353Rock Bolting

(1) Where rock bolts are used as supports, the rock bolting shall be carried out asquickly as possible after any opening is formed.

(2) Anchorage testing procedures shall be created in order to know the anchoragecapabilities and the results of such testing shall be put down in writing and storedat the mining office.

(3) Where torqued rock bolts are used, the torque strength thereof shall not exceedthe manufacturer’s specified torque rating.

(4) It is prohibited to allow a degree torquing greater than that of the strength ofanchorage.

Article 354Loose Rock and Rock

Prone to Cave Ins

197

(1) Mining through loose ground shall be strictly supervised and shall follow thespiling system in accordance with the use of boards or any other material toprevent loose rock from falling and the cave in of roof material.

(2) The spiling system shall first be installed on rock or soil prone to caving in beforemining is advanced.

(3) Lagging with a thickness of no less than 5 centimetres shall be installed at anyroof that is cracked and broken.

(4) The rear and sides of any stope shall be inspected as often as possible and anycracked rock or soil shall be cleared away or blasted or properly supported asquickly as possible prior to the commencement of work.

Article 355Overcoming Dangerous

Conditions

(1) Rock prone to caving in shall first be cleared away or supported prior to thecommencement of the next working operation.

(2) Before work required in paragraph (1) is completed, signs shall be installed at theaffected area prohibiting entry and where no person is waiting obstacles shall beinstalled.

198

Article 356Barring Down

(1) Barring down shall be carried out from a safe place.

(2) When barring down is done manually a scaling bar in the appropriate shape shallbe provided for the said work.

(3) Where barring down is done mechanically adequate protection shall be provided.

(4) Where barring down is done with mechanical equipment which is fitted with abucket and platform, and which is capable of being raised and lowered, themovement of the bucket or platform shall be controlled only by the person at thecontrols.

Article 357Drilling Safety

(1) Prior to starting drilling work at the working face or roof, a detailed inspectionshall be carried out for any loose rock and then be barred down or supported asnecessary.

(2) In carrying out his/her work, the drill operator shall be protected from fallingrock.

(3) Any person assisting with collaring work shall be at a safe place.

(4) Drilling work may only be carried out where supports have been installed at thework site, and where temporary supports need to be installed, such temporarysupports shall be installed continuously from the area already supported.

(5) Any re-locatable drill rig shall be fitted with protecting apparatus for the operatorand any other employee.

(6) Where the drill machine used is fitted with a bucket or platform which is capableof being lowered or raised it shall meet the provisions of Article 356 paragraph(4).

199

Article 358Safety Measures

Against Rock Bursts

(1) After an outburst has occurred, the Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. inform the Chief Mine Inspector within 24 hours where the said rock causes :

1) the evacuation of workers;

2) the disruption of ventilation;

3) disruption to any of the mine shafts and

4) disrupts any activity in the mine for more than one hour.

b. make and implement rock burst control plans within 90 days of the said rockburst.

(2) Rock burst control plans as required in paragraph (1) letter b shall include :

a. the mining method and working procedures planned to reduce the occurrenceof rock bursts;

b. monitoring procedures and

c. other measures carried out to reduce any dangers that may befall workers inrock burst prone areas.

(3) Rock burst control plans as specified in paragraph (2) shall be updated inaccordance with conditional developments and the Chief Mine Inspector mayamend the said plans and implementation procedures.

Article 359Examinations of theCondition of Rock

The name of the operational supervisor appointed by the Technical Mine Manager toinspect and test loose rock shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

200

Article 360Warning of Unsafe

Conditions

(1) When work shifts are not continuous, written warning of the any unsafeconditions shall be made for the next shift and which must be signed.

(2) Warnings required in paragraph (1) shall be read and then signed by the employeein charge of the next work shift prior to the commencement of work.

Article 361Company Regulations

for Supports

(1) At any mine that requires the installation of supports, the Technical MineManager shall develop company regulations for supports in the form of frontview, side views, aerial view diagrams or diagrams of the support systemincluding the installation and removal procedures which shall be easilyunderstood by any mine worker carrying out such work.

(2) Copies of the company regulations as required in paragraph (1) shall be posted atthe access shaft to any work section where supports are used.

Part SevenProtection at the Work Site

Article 362Overhead Protection at the Work Site

(1) It is prohibited to work at any place in a mine where any mine worker is workingin the upper section thereof, except where safety precautions have been carriedout.

(2) It is prohibited to send a mine worker to work at any place where the condition ofthe roof, side and wall rock is such that due to the height, an inspection is notpossible.

(3) No loading machine or LHD shall be permitted to enter any place if the positionof the driver is not protected from rock falling from the roof, walls or ore stacks,which cannot be inspected. If remote control facilities are provided so that thedriver may operate from the outside the machine, the driver must be able toremain where he can see the machine clearly.

201

Article 363

The size of the ore chute or the like thereof shall be adequate to prevent blocking and thechute must be fitted with safety devices to prevent people from falling in.

Article 364Guarding at

Shafts and Openings

The upper section of the shaft shall be guarded or fitted with safety devices with a guardrail and any opening that is dangerous due to its depth shall be fenced off or safetydevices installed.

Article 365Shaft Entrances

Openings at every level connected to the shaft or winze shall be provided with a guardgate as required in Article 310 paragraph (6) and a safety fence.

Article 366Enclosures and Warning Signs

Apart from the provisions of Article 308, warning signs shall be conspicuous and shallindicate the nature of the danger as well as necessary safety measures.

Article 367

At the manway of any shaft that is being repaired or which suffers dangerous conditions“No Passing this Point” signs shall be installed.

Article 368Closing the Mine

(1) All openings or shafts to be abandoned shall be closed by means of filling orcapping.

(2) Any part of any abandoned mine area which may be dangerous shall be fenced offto a height of no less than 80 centimetres.

(3) Closing of underground mines shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Part Eight

202

Ventilation

Article 369General Provisions

(1) At any underground mine :

a. the Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that an adequate supply of fresh airis available at every work site with the requirement that the oxygen content inair shall be no less than 19.5 percent and the carbon dioxide content shall beno more than 0.5 percent;

b. it is prohibited to send any employee to work at any work site that containsdust, smoke or vapours in concentrations that may be disruptive to health and

c. airflow shall be sufficiently adequate to reduce or remove concentrations ofsmoke from blasting as soon as possible.

(2) When the presence of combustible and explosive gases is detected in any mineventilation system, the Technical Mine Manager shall take appropriate correctivemeasures.

(3) The volume of fresh air passing through the ventilation system shall :

a. be calculated based on the maximum total number of workers at the worklocation with the requirement that no person shall receive less than 2 cubicmeters per minute for the duration of work and

b. an additional 3 cubic meters per minute for every degree of horse powerwhere a diesel machine is being operated.

(4) The Mine Inspector may order the Technical Mine Manager to increase thequality and volume of fresh air flow at any section of the mine.

(5) It is prohibited to re-circulate air in any ventilation system.

203

Article 370Ventilation Standards

(1) The air temperature in any underground mine shall be maintained at between 18degrees Celsius and 24 degrees Celsius with maximum relative humidity at 85percent.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) letter a the ventilation conditions atthe work site shall :

a. for an average of 8 hours :

1) have a carbon monoxide (CO) volume of no more than 0.005 percent;

2) have a methane (CH4) volume of no more than 0.25 percent;

3) have a hydrogen sulphide (H2S) volume of no more than 0.001 percentand

4) have a nitrous oxide (NO) volume of no more than 0.0003 percent.

b. over any 15 minute period :

1) CO must not exceed 0.04 percent and

2) NO2 must not exceed 0.0005 percent.

(3) Flame safety lamps or any other suitable device shall be used to test for any lackof oxygen.

(4) Any location that does not require ventilation shall be sealed and signsprohibiting entry thereto shall be installed.

(5) In every sealed area, stoppings shall be provided with a pipe and a valve to permitsampling of the atmosphere and measurement of the pressure behind such seal.

(6) The ventilation velocity shall be no less than 7 meters per minute and shall beincreased in accordance with work requirements and after blasting.

(7) All airways shall be of adequate dimensions for the quantity of air they aredesigned to pass.

(8) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint an employee who shall be in charge ofsupervising ventilation of the mine and the name of the said employee shall berecorded in the Mine Book.

204

(9) The quantity and quality of air being distributed to every work area shall bedetermined at intervals of at least once per month

(10) The locations at which measurements are taken shall include:

a. every main intake airway, as near as practicable to the entrance of the shaft oroutlet;

b. at every split where air leaves the main airflow, as near as possible to thejunction;

c. where the split serves a working district : 50 meters from the first workingplace at which the air enters, and 50 meters from last working place at whichthe air leaves the district;

d. in the district return airway, as near as practicable to the junction with themain return airway.

e. any other place stipulated by the Mine Inspector.

(11) Sampling to determine the oxygen content (O2), carbon dioxide content (CO2),carbon monoxide content (CO) and nitrous oxide content (NO2) of the air takenunder normal working conditions shall be implemented at intervals of at leastonce per month at the following places :

a. 30 meters from the working face of development headings;

b. 15 meters from the winzes and shafts and

c. at the base of the up-cast shaft and at any stope with only one access way.

(12) Sampling for the purpose of determining the carbon monoxide content (CO) andnitrous oxide (NO2) content at any location or at the end of any shaft where adiesel machine is being operated shall be carried out at intervals of at least everyseven days.

(13) Results of findings of the requirements of paragraph (11) and paragraph (12) shallinclude the time and location of where the samples were taken as well as the timeof the most recent blasting.

(14) Temperature shall be measured regularly at locations as required in paragraph(10) letter c and d, and where the temperature exceeds 24 degrees Celsius, thesaid place shall be inspected every week.

205

(15) Measuring for dust concentrations at lower than 10 microns shall be carried out asoften as practicable but no less than once every three months except whereotherwise stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(16) When any changes are made to the direction or distribution of airflow whichaffects the amount of air entering or leaving and area, air measurements shall becarried out as soon as possible after the said change is made.

(17) The results of air measurements as required in paragraph (16) shall be recorded inthe ventilation book.

(18) Ventilation measuring shall be carried out by a competent person.

(19) Sampling as specified in paragraph (1) and paragraph (2) shall not be requiredwhere according to the judgement of the Chief Mine Inspector the condition ofventilation in the mine is adequate.

Article 371Natural Ventilation

(1) Use of natural ventilation shall be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) When every part of the mine continuously makes use of natural ventilation, therequirements of Article 369 and Article 370 shall be fitted with a ventilation fanat the surface which shall be used when required.

(3) Based on the size of the mine and the condition of the environment of work sitesat the mine the Mine Inspector may require that an auxiliary ventilation fan isnecessary with a capacity of no less than what is required to distribute anadequate quantity of air which is required to workers when evacuation must becarried out.

Article 372Ventilation Fans

(1) When ever practicable, surface ventilating fans (main fans) shall be equipped withthe following :

a. an alternative power source;

b. a water gauge;

c. either an automatic fan rotation indicator or an automatic air pressureindicator;

206

d. an efficient air lock;

e. a fan drive and fan house both of which must be fireproof;

f. fireproof air ducts and pressure relief devices;

g. equipment that is capable of reversing the direction of the flow of air and onwhich regular testing must be carried out and

h. other safety devices which shall be stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall provide instructions to the operator of theventilation fan about the rotation speed of the said fan.

(3) The operator as required in paragraph (2), shall test the ventilation fan, andobserve the water gauge and the automatic indicators at intervals of at least every2 hours.

(4) When the measuring devices and the automatic ventilation pressure recorder arenot available, the operator of the ventilation fan shall record the rotation speed ofthe wind fan and the pressure as indicated on the water gauge every two hours.

(5) As required in paragraph (2), the operator shall make a report to his/hersupervisor of the following :

a. any damage, deviations or the stopping of the ventilation fan and

b. unusual variations in pressure as indicated by the water gauge.

(6) Every ventilation fan at the surface of a mine that is not attended, shall be fittedwith permanent monitoring equipment which sends early warnings of thepresence of any defects in the operation of the ventilation fan to a location that isalways manned.

(7) The intake (suction site) of fans shall be provided with an adequate guard orscreen.

(8) Depending on the size and the environmental conditions of the mine, the MineInspector may determine the need for a reserve ventilating fan available forimmediate use and capable of producing sufficient airflow.

(9) The ventilation fan housing, the air duct connections, the fan house, and otherbuildings in the vicinity of the ventilation fan, shall be constructed of noncombustible materials, However, where made from combustible materials thewind fan and surrounding buildings shall be adequately protected from fire.

207

(10) The up-cast shaft connected to a drift or air duct to the ventilation fan shall befitted with an airlock which prevents the occurrence of short circuits of airflow.

(11) It is prohibited to build any combustible structure within a distance of 50 metersof the ventilation fan house.

(12) The auxiliary ventilation fan shall be installed underground while otherventilation fans may also be installed after approval is obtained, to ensure thatdisruptions to the safety and health of underground mine workers will not occur.

(13) All underground main fans shall have controls placed at a suitable protectedlocation remote from the fan, preferabley on the surface. An independentalternative power supply from the surface shall be provided.

(14) It is prohibited to stop a ventilation fan except where approval has been obtainedfrom the ventilation supervisor.

(15) It is prohibited to install an booster fan underground except where a ventilationsurvey has been conducted.

(16) All ventilating fans installed and used to ventilate active workings of the mine,shall be operated continuously while persons are underground in the active areasexcept for scheduled production-cycle shutdowns or planned fan maintenance oradjustment. All persons underground in the affected areas shall be advised inadvance of such scheduled fan shutdowns. No blasting operations shall beallowed during any fan stoppage.

(17) In the event of a fan failure due to malfunction, accident, power failure or anyother such unplanned or unscheduled events, all mine workers shall leave anyarea ventilated by the fan, except any employee who is repairing the saidventilation fan.

Ventilation shall be repaired and restored to normal before any mine workerenters any area affected by the ventilation system.

(18) All ventilation fans shall be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions or the written schedule as specified by the Technical Mine Manager.

208

Article 373Ventilation Fan Systems

(1) Before any auxiliary fan is installed below ground, the Underground MineManager must be satisfied that a sufficient quantity of air is reaching the fan toprevent recirculation of air, and this air is not polluted by dust, smoke, orhazardous gases.

(2) Auxiliary ventilation fans shall be equipped with grounding devices.

(3) Auxiliary ventilation fans may only be activated, operated and turned off by theauthorised employee.

(4) Auxiliary fans shall be installed at a point at least 5 metres from the nearer side ofthe entrance to the place to be ventilated by it.

(5) When two or more auxiliary fans are installed in a series the requirements ofparagraph (4) shall only apply to one of the said fans.

(6) Any forcing type auxiliary ventilation fans shall be installed at the intake airwayand exhaust type auxiliary ventilation fans shall be installed at the return airway.

(7) There shall be installed and maintained with every auxiliary fan an air duct towithin a distance from the working face of 5 times the square root of the roadwaycross-section, measured in metres.

(8) When an auxiliary fan fails to function all workers shall be prohibited fromentering any place ventilated by the fan until the said place is declared safefollowing an inspection by the operational supervisor.

(9) Compressed air may not be used solely for ventilation except in narrow and steepraises.

(10) Air for ventilation in raises shall be provided such that the flow can be controlledfrom a valve at the foot of the raise. Development raises shall be provided withtwo air valves, one at the foot of the raise and one at the end of the steel pipeinside.

(11) Ventilation pipes for raises must be independent of service pipes and fitted at theoutlet with a diffuser.

(12) Where compressed air is used for ventilation, the air shall be sampled at monthlyintervals to determine CO, NO2 and oil mist content. No air shall be used if theanalysis exceeds the limits specified in paragraph 2 of Article 370.

209

Article 374Ventilation Circuits

(1) The main intake airway and the main return airway shall be made in separateshafts or adits.

(2) The Chief Mine Inspector may grant exemption of the requirements in paragraph(1).

(3) Ventilation in the shaft may only be made with the following provisions :

a. vent tubing may be used at the same opening at the time of development ofthe shaft or slope and

b. the intake airway and return airway at the single shafts shall be provided withair curtains.

(4) Fresh air that enters through the downcast shaft shall be properly distributed to allwork places as required.

(5) Where any abnormality occurs to the ventilation circuit or any abnormal changeoccurs in the flow of air, the underground mine workers shall inform theoperations supervisor.

(6) All airways shall be kept clear to permit free passage of air.

Article 375Prevention of Air Leakage

(1) Any shaft or outlet to the surface that is connected via a drift to ventilation fans atthe surface and which are normally used for hoisting or transportation shall befitted with efficient air locks and be well maintained.

(2) Every drift which connects main intake airways to the main return airway orwhich connects the intake and return airways shall be fitted with two adequatedoors and shall be well maintained to reduce leakage of air to a minimum. Wherethis is not possible other means must be used.

(3) Any drift which requires prevention from short circuiting of air flow shall befitted with no less than two adequate doors and be well maintained. Where this isnot possible one door is allowable with one or two ventilation curtains.

210

(4) A space shall be provided between the ventilation door or ventilation curtain inorder that when one door or ventilation curtain is opened the other door orventilation curtain remains closed to prevent air from passing.

(5) Ventilation doors shall be capable of closing automatically and ventilationcurtains must be fireproof.

(6) It is prohibited to prop a ventilation door open except where and for so long as itis necessary to allow a vehicle to pass through it. Any door no longer required tobe shut shall be removed and placed in a position in which it will not obstruct theairflow.

(7) Every person shall properly close any door or ventilation curtain through whichhe/she passes.

(8) Only authorised employees shall change ventilation regulators.

Article 376Ventilation Plans

Apart from the requirements of Article 19, the ventilation plan shall include the followinginformation :

a. the name of the mine and

b. the most up-to-date map or series of maps with the scale no larger than 1 : 5000,and which includes :

1) the direction and distribution of airflow;

2) the location of the main ventilation fan, the booster ventilation fan, andauxiliary fans;

3) the location of the air regulator doors, stoppings, and ventilation doors;

4) the location of undercasts or overcasts, and other crossings;

5) the location of seals at abandoned work site areas;

6) the location of areas not ventilated;

7) the location of workshops, fuel storage areas, the hoist room, compressors,battery charging rooms, and explosive magazines and

8) air measuring stations and the latest ventilation measurements taken.

211

c. data on the main fan, the booster fan and auxiliary fans including the name of themanufacturer, the type, the size of the fan, the speed of the fan, the size of theblades, pressure at several points and motor brake horsepower rating;

d. the number and type of vehicles using fuels underground including thehorsepower of the said machines and

e. any other information requested by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Part NineUnderground Drainage

Article 377General Precautions

(1) Any underground work place shall :

a. be free from the accumulation or flow of water which may endanger workersin the said area and

b. have a water drainage system to dispose of excess water by means of pumpsin the mine.

(2) Any positive displacement water pump shall be fitted with a relief valve or anyother system.

(3) Precautions shall be taken to guard against the accumulation of water in rockchutes or raises where any material in the chute or raise may cause a blockage ofthe flow of water.

(4) At any stope or caved area where ore is stockpiled prior to being loaded, a waterdrainage system shall be provided except where such material is capable ofeffective drainage of the water.

(5) When rain water affects the rate of water flow in the mine the Technical MineManager shall monitor rain fall and measures shall be taken to prevent an increasein the rate of water flow in the mine.

(6) Transport roadways shall be provided with effective water drainage ducts toensure that rails and sleepers are not inundated.

Article 378Dams and Bulkhead Doors

212

(1) When preventative measures are taken to prevent flooding or any other dangeroussituation, such precautionary measures shall be carried out by means ofconstruction of bulkheads or dams for water control or protection of the mine androadways for rescue efforts.

(2) Bulkhead means any structure built for the purpose of impounding water orconfining air under pressure in a drift, crosscut or any other mine opening andconstructed in a manner as to completely close off such areas.

(3) Dam means any structure built for the purpose of impounding water in a drift,crosscut or any other mine opening and constructed in such a manner as to permitan unobstructed overflow of the water.

(4) It is prohibited to construct any dam with a capacity to retain greater than 75 tonsof water in any mine, until the location and designs are approved by the ChiefMine Inspector.

(5) When blasting is carried out at any working face in any mine in the vicinity ofany work place and which enables the accumulation of water, bulk heads or damsas required in paragraph (1) shall be properly sealed.

Article 379Measures to

Prevent of Noxious Gas

When the accumulation of water held in any winze is being drained, precautionarymeasures shall be carried out to prevent the pollution of the air in the mine by noxiousgas which may result due to reactions with the water.

Article 380Safety Devices at

Shaft Sumps

Barriers shall be installed at the base of any shaft to prevent any conveyance that islowering people into the shaft from travelling into the water in the shaft.

213

Part TenTransportation

Article 381

Any cable transport system used in any ascending roadway or descending roadway at anincline of more than 3 degrees with a engine located at the surface shall be enacted as ashaft hoist system as required in Articles 310 to 339.

Article 382Transportation Regulations

(1) Apart from the requirements of Chapter IV part four, the Technical MineManager shall develop company regulations for underground regulations capableof guaranteeing :

a. safe operation of every transportation system and

b. prevention of injuries caused by the transportation system employed.

(2) The Mine Inspector may amend the company regulations for undergroundtransportation where it is considered necessary in the interest of the safety ofworkers to the extent that any such amendment does not conflict with thisMinisterial Decree.

(3) Regulations as required in paragraph (1) shall be displayed at the mining officeand copies thereof must be given to all transportation employees. Translationsshall be made by the Technical Mine Manager where language represents adifficulty.

Article 383Transportation Shafts

(1) Any roadway within a mine that is used for a system of transportation shall beplanned, constructed and maintained in order that :

a. no sudden changes in the height, direction, width or elevation occur that maybe dangerous and

b. the dimensions of the roadway are wide and high enough so that clearancebetween the side and walls and roof and any part of a locomotive, vehicle orload in the said roadway is capable of preventing danger in accordance withminimum sizes as provided for in this decree.

214

(2) It is prohibited to walk along any roadway in a mine that is used as a system oftransportation except where along the said roadway there is adequate clearanceenabling safe passage.

(3) Any locomotive or vehicle that is driver operated shall be prohibited from passingany walking person except where the said person is in a safe place.

(4) Clearance as required in paragraph (1) letter b must be :

a. 300 millimetres vertically from the roof of the locomotive or vehicle or goodsbeing transported. and for 2.1 metres vertically calculated from the floor of alocomotive without a cabin.

b. 600 millimetres across from the walls of the roadway to the walls of thelocomotive or walls of the vehicle or goods being transported. Where theclearance is less than 600 millimetres for any roadway that comes to a deadend, the length shall not be less than 30 meters and at the end of the saidroadway warning signs shall be installed.

c. for operational systems that make use of duel carriageways the distancebetween the flatcar or the material being transported shall not be less than 600millimetres and at the loading site or coupling site the said distance shall notbe less than 900 millimetres.

d. for approved transportation systems transporting people in open vehicles thevertical clearance shall be no less than 2.1 metres calculated from the floor ofthe said vehicle.

e. for transportation systems using locomotives or vehicles suspended on railsthe vertical clearance between the base of the roadway and the base of thevehicle shall be no less than 300 millimetres and

f. for the width of any roadway used for free steered vehicles, the minimumclearance within said roadway shall be no less than the maximum width of thesaid vehicle plus 1200 millimetres.

(5) Transport lanes used for free steered vehicles shall be free from obstacles and thesurface must be constructed as best as possible to reduce the risk of sliding andany cross gradients of the road must be limited and the degree of the turning anglemust be adequate to ensure clearance and that the vehicles remain stable at alltimes.

(6) Where ever two or more roads meet, a berm shall be installed to prevent vehiclesfrom colliding with supports.

215

(7) Up to a distance of 250 metres from any working face the requirements onclearance on any transport lane as intended in this article shall not apply.

Article 384Railroad Construction

(1) All rails must be installed for strength and sturdiness in the mine.

(2) The weight of rails shall be no less than 17 kilograms per meter, where the weightof every axle of the locomotive or loaded vehicle exceeds 5 tons or the speedexceeds 20 kilometres per hour, the weight of the rails shall be no less than 25kilograms per meter.

(3) Rails shall be properly connected and supported on sleepers at intervals of nomore than every 800 millimetres. The sleepers shall be positioned on a flat anddry surface.

Article 385Inclined Roadways

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that a transport system in a mine doesnot operate on a gradient which :

a. will render its operation unsafe or

b. exceed any gradient stipulated by the supplier of that system or vehicle asbeing the maximum gradient on which it is safe to use that system or vehicle.

(2) Apart from the requirements of in paragraph (1) no iron wheeled locomotivetransportation system shall be permitted to be used in any roadway with grades inexcess of 1 : 20.

(3) The maximum load that may be hauled by a system or vehicle on any gradientshall not exceed that, which can be safely retarded, stopped and held whentravelling down the gradient.

(4) Any vehicle run on rails at a grade of more than 1 : 4 shall be fitted with a railbraking system.

(5) Free steered vehicles should not operate on gradients steeper than 1 : 5. Theability of the brakes to operate on this gradient should be tested at intervals notexceeding three months and should include any trailers where applicable.

Article 386

216

Refuge Holes

(1) When considered necessary at a specific distances along any roadway throughwhich passes any system of transportation, easily reached refuge holes shall beinstalled.

(2) The distance between the refuge hole as required in paragraph (1) :

a. any rail system controlled by an operator located at the front most part of thechain of vehicles shall :

1) not exceed 90 meters for vehicles with a speed of no more than 25kilometres per hour and be fitted with spot lights and

2) not exceed 40 meters where the speed is greater than 25 metres per hourthe grade of the roadway is greater than 1 : 30 and where the operatorsview is limited.

b. not exceed 20 meters for any other transportation system which utilises railsand

c. driver operated transportation systems :

1) must not exceed 90 meters where the speed does not exceed 20 kilometresper hour and

2) must not exceed 40 metres where the grade of the roadway is greater than1 : 15 or the drivers view is limited due to bends.

3) refuge holes shall be no less than 1.8 meters in height or the same heightas the roadway, the width shall be no less than 1.2 metres and the depthshall be no less than 1.5 meters.

4) refuge holes shall always be safe and free from obstructions and on theexterior thereof a sign shall be installed which must be visible from adistance of no less than 50 metres using workers’ lamps.

5) Refuge holes shall be as close as possible to the rail vehicle coupling area,ventilation doors and to any location at the end of a bend in the roadwaywhere the view is limited.

6) Any intersection used for entering any space or any other place withadequate area along the roadway may be considered a refuge hole.

217

Article 387Transportation System

Equipment

(1) No locomotive, free steered vehicle or stationary haulage engine shall be usedunderground except where in accordance with the design and constructionguidelines as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Prior to any transportation system being operated the following shall be madecertain :

a. the transportation system is in accordance with the intended purpose and use ;

b. the transportation system shall be equipped with equipment capable ofstopping and supporting every part of the said system and

c. all equipment used as part of the transportation system shall be properlydesigned, constructed and installed.

Article 388Internal combustion engines


a. ensure that no internal combustion engine is used as the power source of anytransportation system except diesel engines;

b. develop procedures to ensure that exhaust gas emissions from any dieselengine are monitored at intervals of no more than seven days and

c. ensure that exhaust gas from any diesel engine is not dangerous.

(2) Monitoring requirements as required in paragraph (1) letter b shall apply toexhaust gas samples not yet mixed with the air in the mine with the conditionsthat :

a. low idle without load and

b. high idle without load;

(3) The findings of sampling as required in paragraph (2) shall be recorded in aspecial book.

218

(4) It is prohibited to operate any diesel engine where the exhaust gases as intendedin paragraph (2) letter b contain more than 0.2 percent of carbon monoxide ormore than 0.1 percent of nitrous oxide or exceed the concentrations determined bythe manufacturer.

(5) Exhaust gases in the air in the mine from diesel engines shall after being cooledand thinned contain no more than 0.01 percent of carbon dioxide and 0.0005percent of nitrous oxide.

(6) It is prohibited to operate any internal combustion engine at any place or roadwaywhich creates carbon dioxide in excess of 0.005 percent, or nitrous oxide inexcess of 0.0003 percent.

Article 389Refuelling, Rechargingand Storage of Vehicles

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that all vehicles in the mine with anengine is maintained at a specific place and stored at a safe place when not in use.

(2) The vehicle storage facility, the battery charging room and the refuelling areashall be used in accordance with the intended purpose and aim and shall beseparate from each other.

(3) Every vehicle storage facility or refuelling station shall as much as possible bebuilt from fire resistant materials and have :

a. no less than two separate exits;

b. ventilation adequate enough to reduce concentrations of exhaust gasesproduced by the machines or any gas produced by batteries;

c. adequate lighting;

d. even concrete flooring;

e. facilities to inspect the underside of locomotives or other vehicles;

f. clean water supplies;

g. waste disposal facilities;

h. smoke, heat or detectors of any other hazards capable of emitting a signalwhere a fire occurs;

219

i. an adequate numbers fire extinguishers, suitable for any type of fire shall bevisibly located close to the entrance, be easily reached and ready forimmediate use and

j. a fuel overflow berm at the refuelling station.

(4) Refuelling of diesel engine vehicles or locomotives shall be carried out at thedesignated refuelling station and :

a. the vehicle tank refuelling equipment shall be capable of preventing spillage;

b. it is prohibited to start the engine of any vehicle when refuelling with fuel orlubricants.

(5) Battery charging for locomotives shall be carried out at the battery chargingstation and the said station shall meet the requirements of paragraph (3) exceptletter e and the battery charging equipment shall :

a. be positioned at the entrance side of the battery rack;

b. detection devices shall be provided to detect leakage of the current betweenbatteries and the battery charging equipment and the box thereof and

c. battery maintenance equipment shall be provided which is capable of reducingelectrolyte liquid spillage.

(6) The requirements of this Article shall not apply to traction locomotive batterieswhich are charged using electricity from overhead conductors with the stipulationthat for the duration of charging no electrical danger or combustible gas is caused.

Article 390Fuel and Lubricant

Supplies and Storage

(1) Fuel may only be stored at underground refuelling stations in quantities that willbe used in at least 48 hours.

(2) The type of fuels used underground shall be reported to the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Transportation of fuels and lubricants underground shall be carried out usingmetal drums sealed tight or clearly marked tanks.

(4) Used fuel and lubricant drums shall be immediately removed from the mine.

220

(5) Lubricants used underground may only be stored in a vehicle storage facility orrefuelling station and the total amount of each type of lubricant stored may onlybe for one weeks requirements.

Article 391Transportation of People

(1) Any vehicle for the transportation of people shall be designed, installed,maintained and used in accordance with the guidelines for the transportation ofpeople as required by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) After a period of two years after this regulation is enacted, any existing humantransportation system shall meet the requirements of paragraph (1).

(3) Mine workers who ride on any vehicle used to transport people shall beprohibited from carrying any work equipment except hand tools

Article 392Preventing Runaway

Vehicles

(1) To prevent accidents which may be caused by any transportation system slidinguncontrollably, becoming a runaway, the Technical Mine Manager shall carry outthe following :

a. must install an adequate number of automatic devices in every transportationsystem to stop any vehicle when running uncontrollably;

b. where men are working on a road where there may be danger from runawayvehicles, adequate arrrangements shall be made for their protection;

c. must provide equipment to prevent any vehicle in a transportation systemfrom colliding with another at any intersection of roads;

d. any energy absorbing runaway devices installed shall be independent of anyroadway support;

e. at assembly or coupling points there shall be an adequate supply of devices toprevent vehicles moving inadvertently when not connected to a transportsystem.

(2) Every transportation system shall be equipped with devices of a type that arecapable of absorbing any dangerous shocks when the vehicle slides out of control.

221

Article 393Communication

(1) Any road which makes use of a wire rope transportation system shall be fittedwith:

a. equipment that can stop the system safely ;

b. equipment that is capable of preventing any transport vehicle from moving byitself installed at intervals of no more than 50 meters and

c. equipment which is capable of transmitting signals and which is connected tothe control room and which is installed at intervals of a specific distance.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall guarantee that :

a. every transportation roadway is equipped with a communications systembetween the stops, coupling stations, control stations and at every boardingand alighting point and

b. suitable and effective means of visual signalling equipment or radio controlfor driver operated vehicles shall be provided.

(3) Vehicles may only be operated after the operator receives the signal with thefollowing requirements :

a. the Technical Mine Manager shall require uniform signals to be used at themine ;

b. the signal for “stop” shall be consistent;

c. for all transportation systems transporting people, a special signal shall beused to mean begin moving;

d. all signals shall be capable of being seen and heard by the operator and

e. when the vehicle comes to a stop, the operator shall ignore any unclear signaland the said vehicle shall not move on until a clear signal is received.

(4) For wire rope transportation systems, both endless rope systems and main and tailrope haulage systems shall be fitted with an audible warning signal prior tooperation which shall be installed on the return drum and any other place alongthe said system as well as on any machine using a remote control system.

Article 394

222

Inspections and Testingof Transportation Systems

Prior to Operation

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall be assisted by competent employees inadequate numbers in carrying out inspections and testing of the installation andoperation of any transportation system used in the mine.

(2) Employees as required in paragraph (1) shall :

a. inspect, carry out testing and ensure that the transportation is safe foroperation and

b. make reports of the findings of inspections and testing and forward suchreports to the Technical Mine Manager.

(3) Apart from the requirements in paragraph (1), the Technical Mine Manager shallprohibit any transportation system from being used for the first time until theTechnical Mine Manager is certain that the said system is safe for use.

Article 395Operation of the

Transportation System

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that any transportation system used atthe mine is adequately safe.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall be assisted by competent employees tosupervise the operation of the transportation system.

(3) Transportation systems shall be operated by or under the supervision of a capableperson as required in paragraph (2).

(4) The haulage engine operator :

a. is prohibited from leaving the cabin of the vehicle where the vehicle is stillmoving and

b. must ensure cleanliness and lubricate any haulage vehicle being operated.

(5) Where the operator becomes aware of any defects of the equipment it shall bestopped and prohibited from being operated.

(6) Locomotive operators :

223

a. are prohibited from starting any locomotive until the operator is in position;

b. are prohibited from leaving the cabin except when stopped and the ignitionkey is disengaged;

c. must sound warning signals prior to the locomotive being started and

d. must reduce speed where ;

1) any person is in the way;

2) passing a bend, at unloading or loading at stations or shafts;

3) passing any work site, or landing station,

4) passing any ventilation doors.

(7) Locomotives are prohibited from passing any landing station in a shaft wheremine workers are entering or leaving the conveyance or skip.

(8) It is prohibited for any free steered vehicle to be used to move any vehicle thattravels on rails.

Article 396Testing, Inspections and

Maintenance

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint in writing a number of competentpeople to make regular inspections and develop procedures to guarantee thattesting and inspections and maintenance work is carried adequately on :

a. transportation roadways and railways in the mine and

b. any equipment that is part of a transportation system.

(2) Testing results as required in paragraph (1) shall be properly recorded and stored.

(3) The Mine Inspector may make changes to the company regulations as required inparagraph (1).

(4) The frequency of inspections and testing shall meet the following requirements :

a. transportation roadways, rail tracks and clearances shall be inspected no lessthan seven days and every work day when transporting people;

224

b. the exterior of every locomotive, hoisting machine permanently positioned atany location, or free steered vehicle shall be inspected every work shift priorto the commencement of work;

c. the machine and electrical parts of locomotives, hoisting machinespermanently positioned and free steered vehicles shall be inspected no lessthan once every seven days;

d. every fire preventative device on any diesel engine shall be properly inspectedand cleaned, and where the said equipment is defective, replacement shall bemade within 24 hours;

e. testing of the parking brakes, emergency brakes and the locomotive brakesand free steered vehicles shall be inspected in order to ensure efficient brakemaintenance every seven days and

f. when any transportation system hauled by wire rope is used to transportpeople :

1) the over travel indicator shall be inspected every seven days ;

2) inspect and adjust the train and speeding indicator every seven days;

3) test the over-travel controls every seven months;

4) test the engine and braking of the train every seven days and

5) dynamic testing of the engine and braking of the train every six months.

225

Article 397Cables and Pulleys

(1) New haulage cables for any transportation system which is operated entirelyunderground shall meet the requirements in the work guidelines as taken from thedesign and construction standards for underground transportation systems.

(2) All cables shall be inspected and lubricated at intervals designated by themaintenance schedule and the findings of the said inspections shall be recorded inthe rope book by an employee whose name is recorded in the Mine Book.

(3) Transportation haulage cables along the transportation system shall be properlysupported using idler pulleys. The said idler pulleys shall be maintained to ensurefree rotation and where necessary a guide to the pulley shall be installed on thehaulage cables.

(4) At any curves, bends or undulations, support pulleys shall be positioned toprevent the rope swinging dangerously or rubbing any support facilities or otherroadway fittings.

(5) All capped haulage cables used in the mine shall be recapped at intervals notexceeding six months under the supervision of an appointed competent person.

(6) On transportation systems using endless cables or for vehicles coupled withcables using clips, chains or any other apparatus, the said connections shall beinspected regularly in accordance with the maintenance guidelines as required bythe Technical Mine Manager.

(7) On any endless-rope systems , where a man-riding train is permanently attachedto the rope, the train shall be moved on the rope with a distance of at least thelength of the train and inspected every three months.

Article 398Continuity of Electricity

(1) All rails shall conduct electricity continuously and :

a. at every rail joint electrically conductive copper joints;

b. the electrical resistance of any rail connection shall not exceed the electricalresistance of 10 metres of rail.

c. at intervals of every 100 metres, two rails that form one line shall be joined bya copper conductor the diameter of which shall be the same as for overheadpower lines;

226

d. two separate rail lines shall be connected electrically at every 200 metres and

e. every rail in a line shall be grounded to the surface of the mine.

(2) Only the negative poles of any DC supply shall be connected to the rail track andthere shall be no switches or electrical fuses installed in the said connection.

(3) Where two or more overhead power lines are installed parallel from the samepole, the said power lines shall be connected electrically at intervals of every 30metres.

Article 399Clearance to

Overhead Power Lines

(1) The vertical clearance between the upper part of the any rail and overhead powerlines shall not be less than 2.2 metres.

(2) Uninsulated joints and current collectors on overhead power lines shall alwayshave a free distance of no less than 110 millimetres from the roof or the side ofthe roadway and from any other equipment installed in the said roadway.

(3) The free distance between overhead power lines conducting electricity, to the topof the any locomotive, vehicle or load shall be no less than 300 millimetres exceptfor current collector systems on trolleys.


(1) It is prohibited for the operator to leave the cabin of any trolley locomotive exceptwhere the ignition key has been disengaged the control lever released, and wherethe current collector from the overhead power lines has been detached andsecured.

(2) The automatic circuit breaker of any locomotive shall not exceed the operatingcurrent as determined by the manufacturer.

(3) Overhead power lines shall be installed in such a way so that rock movement thatoccurs, narrowing the height of the roadway by up to 10 percent, the said powerlines shall still be considered safe.

(4) No loading and unloading station, coupling area and boarding and alightingstation shall be below overhead power lines, except where the said power lines

227

are protected by or fitted with safety devices and have an adequate clearance toprevent the danger of unintended contact.

Part ElevenTransportation by Conveyor

Article 401General

(1) The requirements of Articles 382 up to 397 shall also apply to transportation bymeans of conveyors underground.

(2) It is prohibited to travel on any chain conveyor, belt or bucket except where thesaid apparatus is designed for the transportation of people and is in accordancewith regulations as stipulated by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Where conveyorways are used as regular travelways, such travelways shall beadequately illuminated and fences shall be provided to protect persons frommaterial that may fall from the conveyor.

Article 402Conveyor Transportation

Shafts and Clearance

(1) Each conveyor shall have a clearance of no less than 600 millimetres on the sideused for the passage of people and 100 millimetres on the other side. At transferpoints or places where conveyor attendants work, there shall be a clearance of900 millimetres.

(2) If a vehicle transport system operates along-side a conveyor, then the clearancesshall be those specified for that transport system and the conveyor shall beconsidered as a roadway fixture.

(3) Where only a conveyor is used as a means of transportation in any road, refugeholes shall not be required.

(4) Crossovers shall be provided where it is necessary to cross conveyors. It isprohibited to cross over a conveyor except where such facilities are provided.

(5) At elevated conveyors frequently used as a means of access by people shall befitted with walkways and railings, and the floor of the said walkways shall bemade from non slip materials and the crossing point underneath the conveyorshall be fitted with safety devices.

228

(6) Where people or vehicles pass underneath any elevated conveyors the said undersection of the conveyor shall be fitted with cleats or a safety guard.

Article 403Inclined Conveyors

(1) Inclined conveyors shall be fitted with brakes to prevent the conveyor frommoving downwards.

(2) It is prohibited to install any conveyor at an incline which may pose the danger ofrolling material falling backwards.

Article 404Communication and Signals

(1) Where the entire length of the conveyor is clearly visible from the switchlocation, the operator shall look to ensure that all persons are in a safe place priorto operating the conveyor.

(2) Where the entire length of the conveyor is not visible from the switches or theconveyor can be operated automatically, audio and visual warning signals shall beinstalled.

(3) The warning signals shall be activated moments before the conveyor is operated.

(4) The warning signals shall be audible or visible at both ends of the conveyor and atevery transfer, loading or crossing point.

(5) Where a conveyor is operated by remote control or automatically, the saidconveyor shall operate in order from the sender to the recipient of the system andshall be fitted with warning signals prior to being operated.

(6) Along the full length of the conveyor, emergency stop cords shall be installed ateasily reached locations, which when activated will stop the conveyor in anemergency situation.

(7) Emergency stop cords as required in paragraph (6) shall :

a. be easily seen and reached and

b. have a manual reset switch which shall be installed at intervals of no morethan 100 meters and capable of stopping the conveyor. and which shall signal

229

the employee at the conveyor controls except where stipulated otherwise bythe manufacturer.

(8) At every control, sending or receiving point and at any place as intended inparagraph (4) along a chain of conveyors verbal communication equipment shallbe provided.

(9) Prior to the conveyor being operated, warning signals shall first be given, andinterlocks shall be installed to prevent the conveyor from starting before thewarning signal is given.

(10) Communications equipment shall be properly installed to be easily seen and shallbe equipped with clear instructions for use.

(11) The requirements of this article shall not apply to any conveyor that is part of anymobile machine.

Article 405Safety Devices on the

Conveyor

(1) A safety guard shall be installed around the motor, and head and tail pulleys ofany conveyor.

(2) Safety guards shall be installed underneath any suspended conveyor which maypose a danger to people in the event that a belt is severed.

(3) All conveyors in underground mines shall be fitted with :

a. excessive slipping detectors between the belt and the drive except where anemployee is supervising continuously.

b. heat and smoke detectors and automatic fire extinguishers at the drive;

c. instruments capable of detecting when the belt slips, the belt is torn andblockages in the chute and

d. temperature monitoring equipment and brake and clutch position regulatorswhere possible.

(4) Equipment as required in paragraph (3) letter a, letter c and letter d shall becapable of stopping the conveyor automatically and the detectors as required inparagraph (3) letter b shall be capable of issuing warnings to any placecontinuously manned.

230

(5) When any conveyor is stopped as the result of a safety device, the said conveyormay only be reactivated automatically. Where the said safety devices indicatenormal conditions, not more than three attempts will be made to start saidconveyor.

Article 406Chain Conveyors

at Coal Faces

At every chain conveyor installed at any working face or where preparation for a coalworking face is being carried out :

a. at intervals of no more than 7 meters a stop button shall be installed or the likethereof fitted with a lock-out and from which a signal shall be capable ofbeing given to the operator;

b. shall be fitted with audible warning signals along the entire length of the chainconveyor and

c. prior to the chain conveyor being operated and before material is loaded ontothe chain conveyor a warning signal shall be sounded in advance.


(1) It is prohibited to carry out repair or maintenance work on any conveyor while itis operating.

(2) Where repair work is being done, the conveyor shall be stopped and the engineturned off and tags shall be affixed and locked, except where the said repairsrequire the conveyor to be moving and safety measures are taken to prevent anyworker from being injured from any moving part :

(3) Where any conveyor is still moving :

a. it is prohibited to clean any pulley and roller manually;

b. it is prohibited to carry out belt dressing manually except where fitted with agrease fitting or aerosol type and

c. it is prohibited to pass over or underneath the conveyor, except where fittedwith safety guards that are capable of protecting people.

231


(1) At least every 24 hours inspections shall be conducted the entire length of the beltby the operational supervisor or any capable person appointed by the TechnicalMine Manager.

(2) Inspections as required in paragraph (1) shall be primarily in order to ensure thatthe conveyor is free from obstructions, free from damage and does not overheatdue to friction during operation.

(3) In any coal mine or other mine where combustible material is conveyed, theroadway shall be examined for accumulations of dust or incipient heating.

(4) Equipment and fixtures for the prevention of fire along the length of the conveyorshall be inspected and maintained.

The said inspections shall be conducted :

a. after any major maintenance of the conveyor system;

b. two hours after the conveyor stops;

c. prior to the commencement of any days off and

d. at intervals as determined by the Technical Mine Manager.

(5) Where any employee conducting the inspections discovers damage or heatingwhich may lead to a fire, the said employee shall take steps to overcome thesituation or inform the Underground Mine Manager as soon as possible.

(6) Prior to the commencement of any non working days the electrical current to theconveyor shall be switched off and padlocked.

(7) Any person inspecting the conveyor shall :

a. be capable of using light fire extinguishers;

b. be capable of operating and stopping the conveyor and

c. know to whom reports of damage and other incidents must be made.

Part TwelveRaise Climbers

232

Article 409Construction and Equipment

(1) Any raise climber powered by an engine shall have :

a. no less than two separate brakes :

1) one of which must be as close as possible to the end of the engine;

2) each brake must be capable of stopping and supporting the climber at itsmaximum capacity and

3) each brake may undergo testing separately.

b. the maximum transportable load shall not exceed the requirements of themanufacturer. The said maximum load shall be displayed on the saidapparatus or at the location of its operation.

c. all raise climbers shall be equipped with instruments that are capable ofpreventing the climber from moving out of its track. Where the track is ofsignificant length effective communications equipment shall be installed forcommunication between the operator of the climber and the employee servingunderneath.

(2) All raise climbers powered by electricity shall :

a. be fitted with a current anti-leakage system;

b. shall have a separating switch and a breaker switch close to the employeeserving underneath in order to isolate the engine and

c. shall have a control switch installed on the raise climber.

(3) Facilities shall be provided in order to board and alight from the conveyance ofthe raise climber.


(1) It is prohibited to work on the top deck of the raise climber except when alreadyat the work location.

(2) The hose roller and the controls shall be tested prior to the conveyance beingraised.

233

(3) When the climber is raised or lowered the employee shall be in the cage.

(4) It is prohibited for the raise climber to be operated in excess of the permittedmaximum work load.

(5) The voltage for the engines of raise climbers shall not exceed 750 volts.

(6) The electrical supply to a raise climber shall be disconnected while explosivesand electric caps are being loaded into position for blasting.


(1) The main shaft of any drive train of any raise climber engine shall be tested by acompetent person using ultrasonic methods in order to determine that the mainshaft is in good condition. Inspections shall be conducted :

a. prior to the raise climber being operated and

b. every time following major maintenance, or at least every 4000 work hours.

(2) Any equipment that may affect the safe operation of the raise climber shall betested by a competent person prior to the said equipment being used for the firsttime and then every day after being used as well as after every overhaul.

(3) The frequency of preventive maintenance on the raise climber shall be inaccordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except stipulated otherwise by acompetent person, but such overhauls shall not be less than the manufacturer’sinstructions.

(4) The raise climber and the rails thereof shall be inspected and cleaned no less thanonce a week.

(5) The brakes and controls of the raise climber shall be tested at the beginning ofevery working shift.

(6) The raise climber record book shall be stored away and must contain :

a. the date of inspections as required in paragraph (1);

b. any findings during inspections conducted as required in letter a.;

c. notes of any repairs or changes signed by the person who conducted the saidinspection, repair work or changes and

234

d. records as required in letter c shall be signed by the supervisor in charge.

Part ThirteenUnderground Mine

Electricity


Apart from the requirements of Article 180 to Article 205 the requirements foundhereunder shall apply to the use of electrical currents in underground mines.

Article 413Electrical Cables and

Permanent Power Lines

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 184, any cable used in an undergroundpermanent electrical installation shall be of the armoured cable type.

(2) Cables installed at any shaft, incline or roadway inclined at more than 1 : 1 shallbe supported or secured so the (said) cable is not strained by its own weight.

(3) Cables in transportation shafts shall be installed in a proper position in order toavoid damage caused by vehicles or equipment :

(4) Electrical power lines in cables as required in paragraph (1) :

a. must be cased in insulating materials;

b. must be efficiently protected from mechanical damage and supported atspecific distances as well as

c. the metal casing of the cables must be joined electrically and where necessarydue to location must be protected from rusting.

Except where the outer grounding conductor on concentric cables and thecable metal casing are used as an grounding conductor.

(5) Where a DC system at a voltage not exceeding 650 volts is used, there may beseparate cables each protected by metallic covering. Such coverings shall bebonded together at points not more than 30 metres apart.

235

(6) The requirements of this Article shall not apply to overhead power lines from thetrolley cable system.

Article 414Flexible Cables

(1) Cables used for portable electrical equipment in mines shall be flexible cableswith protective equipment using lead or another metal and shall have a steelshield.

(2) The metal casing to protect flexible cables from damage shall not be capable ofbeing used as a ground conductor despite where already connected to the cable orany other equipment, except where the said cable meets the specificationsrecognised by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) Flexible cables connected to electrical equipment or machines shall be properlyconnected and covered and effectively grounded.

(4) Where any flexible cable is connected to any permanent cable the connectionshall an utilise appropriate isolating switch and shall be properly covered andfitted with a switch and be effectively grounded.

(5) Any metal casing for trail cables shall :

a. be flexible and of anti rust steel or

b. be in the form of flexible conducting mesh that protects each of the corecables and

c. be a combination of letter a and letter b.

Article 415Isolating Switches

(1) Circuit breakers as required in Article 188 paragraph (1) letter c installed inelectrical motors underground shall be an integrated part of the motor or machineand shall be positioned in such a way in order to be easily operated.

(2) Switches connected to any machine via a trail cable shall be designed toautomatically prevent turning back on.

Article 416Restrictions on the

Use of High Voltages

236

It is prohibited to use electricity with a voltage in excess of 1200 volts for :

a. any portable electrical equipment or

b. electrical motors with a power less than 15 kilowatts.

Article 417Positioning of Equipment

(1) Where considered necessary, transformers or switches in underground mines shallbe positioned in a room, compartment or box with a sturdy construction and shallalways be kept dry.

(2) It is prohibited to use combustible materials for any room as required inparagraph (1) except where the installation of the said equipment is protected oroperated by any means that is capable of reducing the risk of fire.

(3) It is prohibited to store combustible materials or explosives in any room,compartment or box that contains electrical equipment or underground in the areaof electrical equipment.

(4) Transformers of the type that are filled with oil that have a capacity in excess of20 kilovolts amps and when used underground shall be positioned in a fireproofroom and equipped with a place for oil leaks.

237

(5) All parts of electrical equipment requiring caution and all levers used to operatethe electrical equipment shall be positioned with safe access and adequateworking space and all levers shall be free from obstructions and be operatedcomfortably.

Article 418Protection of Equipment

(1) Mine workers who carry out any work which may cause damage to electricalequipment and where the said equipment may be the source of any danger,necessary steps shall be taken to protect the said equipment from damage.

(2) Electrical equipment, apart from signalling equipment or telephone cables inblasting areas, shall be removed during blasting. Electricity shall not bereconnected until the said equipment has been inspected and is found to be ingood condition.

Article 419Grounding

(1) Except where there exists any other grounding system which may be enacted, thegrounding system shall be conducted at the surface of the mine in order that straycurrents are not dangerous to :

a. any metal cable casing;

b. the outer conductor of concentric cables;

c. all parts of electrical equipment made from metal and

d. all levers used to operate electrical equipment.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1), every grounding conductorinstalled shall have a total conductivity (including connections) of no less thanhalf of the capacity of any conductor with the largest electrical conductioncapacity installed therefore which has a diameter no less than 14 millimetressquared. Except that any flexible cables by which electricity is supplied at avoltage not exceeding 125 volts connected to portable apparatus, the earthingconductor needs not have a cross-sectional area greater than 6 millimetres square(mm2).

(3) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) and Article 414, the metal cablecasing may be used as a grounding conductor.

238

(4) It is prohibited to install switches, circuit breakers or fuses on any groundingconductor.

(5) For underground electrical equipment that is required by these regulations to begrounded, the neutral point, mid voltage point or pole of any electrical systemunderground shall be connected at one and the same place to the earthing systemand that earthing system shall be on the surface of the mine.

(6) This Article shall not apply to :

a. any hand-held light properly protected by a fire resistant casing which iscapable of being grounded, or is made from insulating material;

b. all hand-held equipment that is double insulated;

c. all portable equipment with a voltage of no more than 50 volts DC or 30 voltsAC and

d. all equipment with a voltage less than 250 volts DC or 125 volts AC, exceptportable equipment.

(7) In order to complement the requirements of paragraph (1), against the use of“grounding free”, a special equipotential point shall be created and all conductiveparts of open equipment shall be connected to the said point by means of adequateconductors.

Article 420Insulation

(1) Materials used to insulate electrical power lines in mines shall have an insulationcapability and level of mechanical strength in accordance with what is requiredand shall be temperature and humidity resistant as well as other things that arecapable of protecting the said insulation.

(2) Except for the outer conductors of concentric cables, every conductor that is partof any electrical system shall always be insulated efficiently from the ground,with the following notes :

a. for any poly phase supply system, the neutral point shall be grounded at onelocation at the surface or

239

b. any system that is supplied with electricity from a transformer, shall be fitwith equipment to ensure that electricity from the primary windings will becut off automatically, if damage occurs to insulation between the primary andsecondary windings, and one or more neutral points of the said system shallbe grounded to one place at the surface of the mine and

c. any mono-phase supply system supplied from the transformers secondarywinding, apart from any system where the mid voltage point is grounded,which is used as the only source of electricity for one reason or another asfollows :

1) electrical controls (including automatic equipment, remote controls andlocal controls) from switches;

2) electrical connectors of control switches and

3) indicators and other switching instruments including lights installedtherein.

(3) Every electrical system shall be equipped with instruments that are capable ofindicating insulation damage in the system.

Article 421Electrical Connections and Joints

(1) All parts of switchgear and electrical connections shall be of sufficientmechanical strength and current carrying capacity to prevent danger, in particularfromg rough usage.

(2) All electrical parts such as switches and electrical connections shall be covered insuch a way or protected in order to prevent any hazard as the result of any persontouching the said equipment, or protected from dust or any other material thataccumulates, or protected from water.

(3) Wherever any switchgear or connection is at any place at which there may be riskof igniting gas, coal dust or other combustible material, all live parts thereof shallbe so protected as to prevent external ignition thereof.

(4) Any material that insulates a conductor in cables shall be efficiently sealed tightat a point where the said conductor is connected to other equipment where theinsulation is capable of being reduced due to humidity or vice versa.

(5) Any cable protected by a layer of metal that is connected to other equipment, thelayer of metal shall be firmly and safely attached to the other equipment to ensureadequate mechanical strength and electrical connection.

240

(6) Cable gland connections, coupler cable connections, plugs, sockets, cable entriesfor junctions, and sealing boxes shall all be constructed to prevent hazards. Thecable termination and the layers thereof shall be safe and the continuity ofelectricity shall be properly maintained and where necessary covered to preventsteam and other pollutants from getting in.

(7) Where an interlock circuit is installed via a plug and switch as an addition toelectrical conductor circuit, the plug and socket shall be constructed to guaranteethat the potential for a potential hazard from electricity not being connected at thetime of insertion or disengagement from the plug. The pin of the said interlockcircuit shall be shorter than the electrical circuit pin to ensure that the plug isproperly connected to the plug prior to the control circuit being completelyconnected.

(8) In order to prevent the plug coming loose unintentionally, the socket used shall beof a type that is restrained or bolted.

Article 422Protection from Power Surges

and Power Leakage

(1) For underground mine equipment, protection as required in Article 187 shallguarantee that :

a. the said protection must operate in as short a period of time as possible andthe amount of electricity shall be compatible with the needs of the equipment;

b. circuit breakers shall be capable of cutting off the system where a short circuittakes places;

c. where possible, equipment shall have a specific short circuiting cut off levelwhich shall be proven by a person who is capable and authorised to handleshort circuiting testing and

d. where any part of the system is used to stop and start frequently, protectiveequipment for power surges shall be provided.

(2) It is prohibited to adjust or change the operating current of safety equipmentexcept where carried out by the technical supervisor.

(3) For any electrical system where there is a high risk of fire, the impact or ignitionof gases or combustible materials, the limits for maximum leaks or fault currentshall be stipulated. Fault currents shall be kept to an absolute minimum to reducethe risk of impact, damage and sparks.

241

Article 423Transformers andOil Transformers

(1) For every transformer, proper procedures shall be made to guard against anydanger occurring as the result of any connection between high voltage and lowvoltage. Where a high voltage system is connected to ground or by other means,the low voltage shall also be grounded in order that where there occurs anyabnormality between the high voltage system and the low voltage system theelectricity will be cut off automatically.

(2) It is prohibited to use any flammable oil for cooling, insulation or to absorbsparks in the transformer or underground electrical equipment.

Article 424Telephones and Signalling

Equipment

(1) Adequate steps shall be taken to prevent telephone cables or signalling cablesfrom coming into contact with other electrical cables or equipment.

(2) Voltages in circuits used to issue signals underground shall not exceed 25 volts.

(3) Every underground phone shall :

a. be placed in a watertight container;

b. be installed on an insulated support;

c. have a clearly marked sign and telephone number on the said apparatusincluding information in an emergency situation;

d. be clearly marked with a sign indicating the location of the said apparatus.

(4) At every coal mine or at any other location in any mine that contains flammablegases :

a. it is prohibited to install any telephone or signal except of a type that has beenauthorised by the Chief Mine Inspector;

b. authorisation as required in letter a shall include the circuits and power sourceof the said system and

c. it is prohibited to connect any telephone or signalling equipment at the surfaceor any where else in the mine to any network used for specific equipment

242

except where the above fulfils the requirements as intended in letter a or isconnected via a coupler unit that fulfills the requirements.

(5) Contact makers used in telephone or signalling constructions shall be capable ofpreventing unintentional closing of the circuit.

Article 425Electrical Welding

(1) The requirements of Article 413 paragraph (4), Article 414 paragraph (1), Article419 paragraph (1) and paragraph (2), Article 420, Article 421 and Article 422shall not apply to electrical welding equipment used underground.

(2) Permanent electrical welding equipment and machinery or transformers shall bestored in a fireproof room which is well ventilated.

(3) Any machine that operates the welding generator shall always be externally clean,free from oil and grease and other combustible materials.

(4) Transformers used for electrical welding shall be cut off from the electrical powersource when not in use.

(5) During welding work underground :

a. an insulated electrode holder shall be used that has dead man type switches tocontrol the electrical current;

b. any object that will undergo welding shall be grounded or connected to thenegative pole of the welding machine or transformer;

c. the welder and assistant welder shall wear safety glasses, aprons and otherappropriate protection and

d. where any other person is working in the said place apart from the welder thewelding site shall be equipped with a partition or screen.

(6) Welding transformers, rectifiers and generators used for the purpose of electricalwelding that are connected to the mine electrical system shall be fitted withcircuit breakers with adequate capacity.

(7) The welding generator machine shall be fitted with circuit breakers.

(8) Electrical welding systems shall be fitted with power surge circuit breakersinstalled on the welding equipment, or network circuit breakers having amaximum capacity of 200 percent of the capacity of the said equipment.

243

(9) Return cables and grounding cable connections shall use screw down connectionsand not spring clamps.

(10) A durable metal plate shall be attached to electrical welding machines containinglegible information on the following :

a. the manufacturer, number and type;

b. frequency;

c. number of phases;

d. primary voltage;

e. primary current size;

f. maximum open network voltage;

g. voltage size and secondary current and

h. stipulation of the work load level and period of operation.

(10) Where welding work is carried out in a shaft or near the surface of a shaft, safetymeasures against the welding sparks shall be taken as close as possible to thesource of sparks.

(11) It is prohibited to use electric welding in any underground coal mine at any minelocation where ignitable gases are found except where a permit has been obtainedfrom the Chief Mine Inspector.

244

Article 426Positioning, Charging,

Removal of Traction Batteriesand other Types of Batteries

(1) The positioning, charging and removal of traction batteries shall be in accordancewith the requirements of Article 389 on underground mine transportation hereinand the construction shall be in accordance with the Equipment Design andConstruction Guidelines used in the Underground Transportation System.

(2) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall only apply to traction type batteries. It isprohibited to move or release any battery from its place of operation for chargingand filling except at a workshop or recharging station designated by the TechnicalMine Manager.

Article 427Equipment Used at

Gas Hazardous Work Sites

(1) It is prohibited to use electrical equipment at any work site where flammablegases may occur except electrical equipment that is permissible.

(2) The location of mines as required in paragraph (1) shall be marked on miningmaps. The determination of gas hazardous locations shall not only be based onnormal operating conditions, but must also take into account conditions where gasemissions or blow-outs, ventilation failures occur as well as other extra ordinarycircumstances.

(3) It is prohibited to install electrical equipment at any location designated asrequired in paragraph (2), until the Technical Mine Manager has forwardedventilation maps of the said location to the Chief Mine Inspector and any relatedmatter as intended in Article 19 paragraph (3) letter c and a detailed list ofequipment to be installed. Within 30 days, if no objection is offered by the ChiefMine Inspection installation may be conducted.

(4) Electric lights used for gas hazardous mines shall be of a type that is permissible.

(5) The Mine Inspector may request the Technical Mine Manager to makeamendments to, make additions to the location of the requirements in paragraph(2) of this Article, based on inspections conducted.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (1) shall also apply to monitoring, testing,recording and measuring equipment installed permanently or temporarily.

245

Article 428Cutting Off Electricity whenIgnitable Gases are Found

(1) Where any person discovers a concentration of flammable gases of more than 1percent of the air in any location in any underground mine, or where there areindications of gas as indicated by the flame in the flame safety lamp and therequirements of Article 301 or Article 342, the said person shall :

a. immediately cut off the electricity from all electrical equipment, excepttelephones or any signalling equipment installed or used for the purpose ofgas detection or electric safety lights or

b. inform the operations supervisor of the said matter or any person whounderstands electricity.

(2) The operations supervisor or any person that understands electricity who receivesa report about the presence of flammable gases shall take immediate steps asrequired in paragraph (1) letter a.

(3) Once the electricity is cut off from the electrical equipment as required inparagraph (1) and (2), in order to be restarted an order shall be issued by theUnderground Mine Manager and the concentration of flammable gas in the air atthe said location shall be declared not in excess of 1 percent.

(4) Where ever any electrical current is cut off and then restarted, such events shallbe recorded in the Mine Book including information of the location, time andduration of the electrical shut down or disruption.

Article 429Flammable Gas Detection

and Reading Devices

It is prohibited to install or use any electrical equipment for the purpose of detecting orreading / measuring flammable gases except where the said equipment is of a type that isapproved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

246

Part FourteenLighting

Article 430Application

Apart from the requirements of Article 98 through Article 101, the followingrequirements also apply for all underground mines.

Article 431Lighting at Surface

Work Sites

(1) When work is conducted at night, all pathways, stairways, electrical panels,loading areas, unloading areas, and buildings shall be equipped with adequatelighting.

(2) The lighting at work areas in buildings shall be equipped with emergency lightingwith the following stipulations :

a. must operate automatically when electrical currents are cut;

b. must have its own source of electrical power;

c. must be able to light adequately enough for evacuation from the said buildingsand enable very important work to be continued safely and

d. must undergo testing as frequently as possible but must not be less frequentthan the recommendations of the manufacturer.

Article 432Underground Lighting

(1) In every underground mine effective lighting shall be installed at the followingplaces :

a. at any entrance facility to the shaft or outlets, all active stations at the shaft,landing places, and loading sites and any other place required by workers forpassage of work;

b. at any place where people work or move and at which is installed anymachine, motor or machinery;

247

c. every place where vehicles are regularly coupled or uncoupled or regularlyattached or detached from a haulage system, and every place where vehiclesare regularly filled (loaded) mechanically and

d. at any place where there is equipment or any operation that may be dangerousdue to a lack of lighting.

(2) Main lighting that utilises electricity as required in this Article shall fulfil thestipulations in Article 412 through Article 429 with a voltage not in excess of 250volts.

(3) All lighting shall be properly installed.

(4) Places that shall be lighted :

a. all entrances and exit facilities to and from any shaft and outlets and thesurroundings areas thereof used regularly;

b. all walls, passes or intersections where coupling and releasing of coupledvehicles is regularly carried out or any transportation system and everyvehicle refuelling station where refuelling is conducted mechanically and

c. any room or place where machines, motors, transformers and switches arefound.

(5) Any place within a distance of 250 metres of any working face, stope and blastingsites may be exempted from the requirements of this Article.

Article 433Miner’s Lamps

(1) Mine workers who enter any underground mine shall be equipped with lampsapproved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Any person engaged in haulage operations underground shall be provided with anelectric cap lamp with a suitable belt and helmet to enable it to be wornconstantly.

(3) Any person who is equipped with lamps must :

a. conduct inspections and ensure that the lamps are in good condition andproperly fitted;

b. refuse to use any lamp that fails to meet stipulated requirements;

248

c. be cautious in using the said lamps;

d. report any damage to any lamp to the lamp room employee who must recordthe damage to the said lamp and

e. return lamps to the lamp room after finishing working.

(4) All lamps shall be numbered and maintained in good condition by a competentperson whose name shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(5) Regulations for the lamp room shall be as follows :

a. all lamps shall be undergo maintenance in a special lamp room;

b. lamps shall be cleaned, installed and refilled in a room separate from the fuelstorage room;

c. open flames, open lighting and smoking shall be prohibited in the lamp roomwhere lamps are being handled;

d. prohibition signs as intended in letter b and letter c shall be installed at theentrance facilities to the lamp room and

e. lamp rooms must be fitted with fire extinguishers, the type and volume ofwhich shall meet requirements.

(6) Any person authorised or assigned to the lamp room shall be in charge ofrecording :

a. the name of every person who enters the mine and

b. the number of the lamp issued to any person entering the mine.

Article 434Fire Prevention

(1) Re-lighting flame safety lamps shall be carried out in accordance with thestipulated methods.

(2) Where an open/naked flame is used :

a. the open flame shall be enclosed and must be fitted with lamp chimney;

b. no naked light shall be left in the mine unattended.

249

(3) At any place where open flame safety lamps are prohibited it shall be prohibitedto smoke or ignite a fire.

(4) It is prohibited to dispose carbide waste from any acetylene lamp in the mine.

Part FifteenFire Prevention Underground

and Rescue Arrangements


Apart from the requirements of Article 102 through Article 123, the followingrequirements shall also apply to any underground mine.

Article 436Prohibition of Open Flames Underground

(1) It is prohibited to start any fire underground except for welding purposes and thewelding flame shall be extinguished when left unattended.

(2) The requirements of Article 167 through Article 169 shall apply to the use ofoxygen and or gas equipment underground.

(3) Acetylene gas makers underground shall not be permitted. Acetylene or any othergas that is flammable must be properly stored in a tank.

Article 437Inspection Requirements and

Identification of the Source of Fire

The Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that the source of any fire in anyunderground mine is identified, inspected at specified intervals and where possibleprecautionary measures shall always be ready for application to prevent a fire.

250

Article 438Storage of CombustibleLiquids Underground

(1) Combustible liquids, including lubricants and grease shall be stored in a safemetal container or in a tank.

(2) Storage containers or tanks as required in paragraph (1) shall be placed in an areathat is free from combustible materials, separated from explosives or explosivesingredients, any source of fire, and other materials that may produce heat orsparks.

(3) Diesel oil shall be transported and only stored in accordance with therequirements of Article 390.

(4) The use of liquid petroleum gas underground shall only be for the purpose ofmaintenance work and may only be brought in limited quantities for immediateuse and the fuel bottles shall be immediately returned to the surface after use.

Article 439Prohibition on the

Use of Petrol Underground

It is prohibited under these regulations to bring in and or store petrol (premium orpremix) underground.

Article 440Combustible Materials

(1) The Underground Mine Manager shall make guidelines for the safe use, storageand transportation of combustible goods in underground mines.

(2) Combustible materials other than coal in coal mines, except wood, shall not bestored underground except :

a. in a room or container made from non-combustible e materials;

b. in accordance with the guidelines as laid down by the Underground MineManager and

c. carbide may only be brought into an underground mine in a watertight metalcontainer or in a carbide tight container.

251

(3) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that combustible materials are not partof any building that :

a. is located at the mouth of any shaft or outlet shaft or

b. is an underground location used as a machine room or electrical equipmentroom.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that every ventilation curtain is madefrom fire resistant materials and are well maintained.

Article 441Area Surrounding

the Mine

(1) All surface buildings located within a distance of 30 metres from an opening to amine used as a intake airway or emergency exit shaft shall :

a. be made from fire resistant materials or

b. be made from any materials that have a fire resistance of no less than 1 houror

c. be equipped with automatic fire extinguishers.

(2) Combustible materials and liquids shall not be stored within a distance of 30metres of the opening to a mine except where it is essential for maintenance workwith a temporary storage facility for one day use.

Article 442Entrances to the Mine

(1) The upper section of any shaft or access way portal to the mine shall be madefrom steel or other fire resistant materials. Where wood is used the wood shallundergo prior treatment to reduce the flammability.

(2) Any construction along the length of any shaft shall be fire resistant.

(3) Any shaft constructed from wood shall be treated to be fire resistant and fittedwith fire extinguishers and all landing stations along the shaft shall be made fromfire resistant materials.

(4) Fire fighting equipment as required in paragraph (3) shall be capable ofextinguishing any fire to a distance of 20 meters from the shaft at every level.

252

(5) Any shaft at an incline of less than 1 : 1, with a wooden frame shall be fireresistant for at least 60 meters from the entrance.

(6) It is prohibited to store lubricating oils, grease or combustible liquids at anylanding station in the shaft.

Article 443Requirement to Make Roadsfrom Fire Resistant Materials

Road supports or any part of an underground road shall where possible be constructedfrom fire resistant materials.

Article 444Underground Electrical

Cables

(1) Underground electrical cables should best be installed through a drilled hole orwhere possible the said cable shall be installed in the return airway and shall beconstructed to be fire resistant.

(2) Trailing cables used underground shall be capable of resisting flames and mustfulfil the stipulations in the General Regulations for Electrical Installations.

Article 445Abandoned Electrical Circuits

Abandoned electrical circuits shall be deenergized and isolated so that they can notbecome energized inadvertently.

Article 446Underground Preventive

Measures

(1) Any underground station or work site shall be cleared of fuels or any combustiblewaste.

(2) Prior to using oxygen-acetylene equipment all surrounding dry wood shall bemoistened.

(3) After burning or welding work, all wood shall be inspected for the presence offire and a re-inspection shall be conducted at every change of work shifts and thefindings thereof shall be recorded.

253

(4) Carbide lamps or candles shall not be allowed to burn unattended.

(5) At any place underground where there exists the potential hazard of combustiblematerials or liquids igniting “Smoking Prohibited” signs shall be installed.

(6) After blasting has been conducted, an inspection shall be carried out immediatelyfor the danger of fire in the surrounding area.

Article 447Requirements for Fire

Facilities and theAppointment of Fire Fighters

(1) Appropriate fire extinguishers shall be provided at every mine in adequatenumbers and which must always be ready for immediate use.

(2) Fire extinguishers which may cause noxious gases shall not be used in anyunderground mine.

(3) A number of competent people shall be designated in writing to implementregular inspections of the condition of facilities and equipment provided asrequired in paragraph (1) and shall report the inspection findings to theUnderground Mine Manager.

(4) In attempting to reduce the potential for fires, the Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. appoint fire fighting personnel;

b. stipulate methods to be employed whenever extinguishing fires.

c. train an adequate number of people to operate the facilities and equipment asrequired in paragraph (1) and

d. conduct fire fighting training periodically or on a regular basis for all peopleworking in the underground mine.

254

Article 448Location of Fire

Equipment and Facilities

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 434 paragraph (1) the following shall alsobe complied with :

a. the following facilities and equipment shall be provided and be ready forimmediate use where a fire occurs :

1) a supply of water or any other fire extinguishing agent in an adequateamount;

2) portable fire extinguishers, dust, sand and other materials in adequateamounts and

3) water spraying equipment, equipment for the spreading of dust and sandand other fire extinguishing materials.

b. appropriate fire extinguishing equipment shall be provided at the followinglocations :

1) at the top of and entrance to any shaft or outlet;

2) at any machine room or any electrical motor room;

3) at any storage facilities where ignitable materials are stored;

4) on every non portable electrical motor, transformer and switches;

5) on every cutting machine or loading machine used at any working faceand

6) along any conveyor crossing, and at coal mines as well as at the followingplaces :

I) specific places at working faces andii) several places along the main intake airway or main return airway.

(2) Where electrical equipment is soaked in oil using more than 400 litres oflubricating oil the said place shall be equipped with appropriate fire extinguishers.

255

(3) At any underground mine or underground coal mine where wood is utilised as ameans of support, water shall be provided to extinguish fires and the said watershall be capable of flowing efficiently with an adequate volume to any work sitethat has the potential for an outbreak of fire.

Article 449The Supply and

Delivery of Water

(1) Where water is used as the means of overcoming a fire, a sufficient amount ofwater shall be in adequate supply which shall be channelled underground througha system of pipelines, hydrants and hoses to any location that has the potential forfire at any work site underground.

(2) Where water from the water supply is channelled through any upright shaft orinclined shaft the lowest section of the pipeline shall be used for collection ofsolid deposits and fitted with a valve for the disposal of the said solid deposits.

(3) Hydrants shall be provided and maintained in order to always be in a conditionready for immediate use :

(I) at every shaft station;

(ii) at a distance of 20 - 25 metres from any conveyor loading facility, mainjunctions, machine rooms, fan rooms, and sub-stations.

(iii) at any other place where there exists the possibility of fire at intervals of 250meters and

(iv) at any area near a working face of any long wall mining system and at thecentral point of any room and pillar mining system and stope workings andin the area of any work opening.

(4) The location of fire extinguishing facilities shall be close to hydrants as required inparagraph (3) and be fitted with adequate hoses.

Article 450Fire Extinguishing Locations

Fire stations shall be provided close to the bottom and any insets of a downcast shaft oroutlet, and at intake airways serving any working sections. The minimum equipmentprovided in a fire station shall be :

a. reserve supply of portable fire extinguishers;

256

b. adequate supply of sand, inert dust, or other fire fighting material;

c. where there is a requirement for water to be used for fire fighting, a supply ofsandbags for quick sealing off purposes shall be provided;

d. 250 metres of fire hoses including couplings when only one water resource isavailable; and

e. two branch pipes and nozzles of 12.7 or 16 mm in diameter.

Article 451Exceptions for

Small Scale Mines

Article 447 through t Article 450 shall not apply to mines that employ less than 100people underground, except where stipulated otherwise by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 452Evacuation fromEnclosed Spaces

The Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that measures have been taken to reducethe risk of workers becoming trapped in any enclosed space or place in which is foundany machine, equipment or in which is stored combustible materials or materials whichemit noxious gases in dangerous concentrations.

Article 453Preventing Fire Outbreaks

or Suspected Impending Fire

(1) Any person in charge of any part of any mine who notices the appearance of anysmoke or other sign indicating that a fire may have broken out below ground atany place, shall cause all persons employed at any place, likely to be affected bysuch fire, by-products of combustion thereof or by any explosion resultingtherefrom, to leave it.

(2) In any case in which it appears to the person in charge of the part of the minefrom which the sign of a fire emanates that there exists no immediate danger,persons may remain there for the purpose of preventing danger from arising.

(3) Guidelines for the evacuation of mines in emergency situations shall fulfil therequirements of Article 341.

257

(4) If it is ascertained that fire has broken out all parts of the seam or level in whichthe fire exists and all parts of any other seam or level reached from any commonsurface outlet shall be deemed for the purpose of paragraph (1).

(5) All parts of any underground mine shall be treated as required in paragraph (1) forthe duration of fire extinguishing and until work is completely carried out. Noperson shall be permitted to enter the underground mine, except for the purpose offire fighting and securing the mine.

(6) Except for any person in a rescue team it is prohibited for any person to enter anymine prior to the area affected by the fire being declared safe.

(7) Following evacuation of a mine in a fire emergency, only persons wearing andtrained in the use of mine rescue apparatus shall participate in rescue and firefighting operations.

Article 454Stopping of any Fireor Dangerous Area

Stoppings to seal off any fire area or danger area shall be constructed for strength and areport thereof must be forwarded to the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 455Underground Warning

Systems

(1) Fire warning signals that are capable of rapidly warning people in undergroundmines shall be installed and maintained to always be in good condition.

(2) When any worker is assigned outside the reach of the warning system, anotherwarning system shall be created which enable such workers to be aware of thepresence of an outbreak of fire.

Article 456Underground Evacuation Training

(1) All persons who work underground shall be instructed in evacuation procedures,escape plans and fire warning signals.

258

(2) Persons who work in more than one area of the underground mine, shall beinstructed about the location of escape ways for all areas of the mine in whichthey normally work or travel.

(3) Evacuation training shall be carried out on a regular basis in order that everyperson is able to reach the surface or any safe place as designated within the timelimit of the self rescue equipment provided.

Article 457Fire Doors and Control Doors

(1) An adequate number of fire doors and fire control doors shall be installed inunderground mines to cut off shafts and mine openings from other work sites inthe mine to prevent the spread of fire, smoke and noxious gases in the mine at anytime of fire.

(2) Fire or control doors shall be installed at or near downcast shaft stations and anyoutlet designated as an escape way or at other locations that provide protection forthe persons escaping.

(3) Fire or control doors shall be closed or opened only according to predeterminedconditions and procedures and only on the instructions of the Underground MineManager or the Technical Mine Manager.

(4) Fire doors and fire control doors shall be well made for strength in order thatwhen closed they cannot be opened by differences in air pressure.

(5) Fire doors and fire control doors shall be capable of being opened by the strengthof one person from both sides and must be free from obstructions.

Article 458Personal Self Rescuers

(1) Coal mines and mines which produce materials that may be combustible, andwhich use mining equipment which use diesel or hydraulically operatedequipment, and which may have the potential for fire shall equip workers withpersonal self rescuers to protect them from the danger of smoke or any otherproduct of fire.

(2) Personal self rescuers shall be provided in a type recognised by the Chief MineInspector and shall have the capability to provide protection for evacuation to thesurface or to any available protection station.

259

(3) Any person who uses any personal self rescuers shall be given prior training onmaintenance methods and the use of the said equipment in darkness and trainingmust be conducted no less than once a year.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall create regulations on the issuing, return,cleaning, maintenance and inspection of personal self rescuers.

Article 459Protection Stations

(1) If persons are required to work at places beyond the duration of self-rescuers,refuge stations shall be provided at suitable places.

(2) At refuge stations, adequate clean water and air shall be supplied as well ascommunication equipment to the surface, and the said refuge stations shall beseparate from other work sites and shall be capable of being closed so that gas isprevented from entering.

(3) Refuge stations shall be easily accessible and evacuation routes shall be free fromobstructions and clearly marked with light reflecting signs.

(4) Refuge stations and the fittings thereof shall be constructed from fire resistantmaterials and :

a. be designed with a volume of space greater than 2 cubic meters per personwith a floor area no less than 0.6 meters squared per person;

b. compressed air shall be pumped in from a clean source and shall be no lessthan 20 litres per minute per person. Temperature shall be arranged to remainnormal in all protection stations when in use and

c. the following requirements shall be met :

1) provide instructions for use in an emergency;

2) a potable supply of water;

3) first aid equipment;

4) toilet facilities;

5) whistles

6) seating and

260

7) lighting.

(5) Refuge bay positions should be indicated on the statutory mine plan as requiredby Article 19 (d).

Article 460Life Saving Equipment

(1) Life saving equipment shall be well maintained and always be ready forimmediate use and be located for ease of reach at every underground mine :

a. breathing helmets or any similar equipment with an air hose of at least 40metres, or other breathing equipment with short durability and suitable for selfrescue from contaminated air;

b. one set of reviving apparatus with bottled oxygen of no less than 600 litresand

c. reliable portable equipment or facilities to measure the lack of oxygen andcombustible noxious gases.

(2) At every underground mine an adequate number of people trained in using theequipment as required in paragraph (1) shall be available at every work shift.

Article 461Mine Rescue

(1) Every underground mine with a worker population in excess of 100 people shallprovide mine rescue facilities in preparation for an emergency situation whichmay endanger lives or safety at the mine.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall be in charge of organising and maintainingmine rescue for both independent mines and those joined with other mines thatoperate in an area that is capable of being easily reached (two hours travelling)from the rescue facilities to each mine.

(3) Any mine rescue facility that serves one or several proximate mines shall bearranged and operated in accordance with the Code of Practice for RescueArrangement and approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) Company regulations for the Code of Practice for Rescue Arrangement may differfor every different mine or location taking into consideration the location of themine and the conditions of transportation.

261

(5) For differences of rescue equipment as specified in paragraph (4) the TechnicalMine Manager may lodge an application to the Chief Mine Inspector along withdetails of the rulings required.

(6) Approved company regulations for the Code of Practice for Rescue Arrangementincluding variations thereof that are proposed by the Technical Mine Managershall be provided for all or part of the following stipulations depending on theconditions at the mine concerned :

a. the organisation and employees at rescue stations including permanent rescueteams ;

b. rescue workers and the mine rescue team ;

c. training and qualifications of the rescue workers;

d. equipment to call rescue employees;

e. transportation requirements for rescue services;

f. records at the central rescue station;

g. equipment for the central rescue station;

h. rescue equipment at the mine;

i. breathing equipment;

j. maintenance and inspection of all rescue equipment;

k. requirements for the safe implementation of rescue efforts or fire fightingwork;

l. signals and communication for rescue work;

m. accommodation at the mine for rescue workers and

n. training schedules and joint practices at various mines.

262

Part SixteenWelfare

Article 462Working Alone

It is prohibited to send any employee to work at any isolated and hazardous place, exceptwhere equipped with direct communications equipment to nearby workers.

Article 463Working Hours Underground

(1) It is prohibited to work any person in excess of the number of hours as stipulatedby the Department of Manpower and over any twenty four hour period workersmay only :

a. work eight hours beyond the time required for the change of shift for hoistoperators and signallers;

b. nine hours including time required for the changing of shifts and reportingtime for operational supervisors and technical supervisors and

c. 8.5 hours for other workers.

(2) Working hours as required in paragraph (1) shall be calculated from the time ofentry to the time of exiting the mine or from the time of being lowered into untilthe time of being raised out of via the shaft and workers must be lowered andraised strictly according to the time schedule where possible.

(3) Working hours as intended in paragraph (1) shall not apply for the followingwork :

a. taking of samples, research and surveying;

b. any rescue work in an emergency situation and

c. major maintenance that must be carried out for the security and safety of themine or in the interests of production continuity.

263

(4) When required in paragraph (3) letter c such a situation is necessary, workers maybe permitted to work an additional two hours of work as many as three times inseven days or for a period of eight hours in a row once in seven days. Restingtime shall be provided of no less than seven hours prior to the next shift beingcommenced. All additional working hours as intended in this paragraph shall berecorded in the overtime book.

(5) Where air humidity at any work site is very high working hours shall be reducedin accordance with the conditions at the said place.

(6) Exceptions as specified in paragraph (4) of any matter provided for in paragraph(3) letter a shall not apply where the air is very hot and humid.

Article 464First Aid in an Accident

(1) At an easily reached place at any underground mine an first aid post shall beprovided equipped with medicines, equipment, stretchers and blankets.

(2) Shift supervisors and several of the crew thereof shall be given training in firstaid.

(3) Every underground mine supervisor that has been trained to provide first aid in anaccident shall be equipped with an accident first aid kit for immediate use wherenecessary and:

a. every kit shall be marked First Aid Kit and contain medical suppliesincluding :

1) two large wound dressing bandages;

2) two small wound dressing bandages

3) six appropriate wound dressings.

b. every supervisor equipped with a first aid kit as required in paragraph (3)letter a shall first return the first aid kit at the end of the work shift to theplace as designated by the Underground Mine Manager and

c. the Underground Mine Manager shall ensure that every first aid kit returned isinspected by a competent person who must refill the said kits prior to reuse.

264

First Aid Post Locations Underground

(1) A map showing the location of first aid posts shall be provided:

a. first aid posts shall be appropriately located at :

1) every working face or any area under the authority of the supervisor;

2) every shaft used for the passage of people in the area under the authorityof the supervisor;

3) the bottom of every shaft or incline.

b. a map showing first aid post locations must be available at the mining office.

(2) At any first aid post location in any mine, the following additional equipment isrequired:

a. appropriate stretchers and blankets in adequate numbers shall be provided andshall be protected from dust and unclean air;

b. splints;

c. a box marked First Aid Kit containing bandages or padding suitable for usewith splints and

d. two small bags filled with clean sand and other materials the function ofwhich shall be for use as a support where any person suffers neck or headinjuries.

(3) In order to enable any person to reach the accident first aid posts :

a. signs indicating the direction of the posts must be made and

b. the location of the accident first aid posts shall be indicated on a diagram ofthe mine as intended in Article 37 paragraph (2).

Article 466Equipment for

Transporting the Injured or Sick

(1) At underground mines wheel chairs suited to the conditions of underground minesshall be provided to transport the injured or sick where the existing means oftransportation makes transportation by stretcher of victims impossible.

265

(2) At every shaft, incline, means of egress which cannot be travelled on foot and atevery working face in a mine at an inclination of 1 : 5 or more a safe means oftransporting the injured and sick must be provided.

(3) When no adequate hospital facilities are provided at the mine, the mining operatorshall create stipulations that ensure that :

a. ambulance vehicles, boats planes or other ambulance facilities are providedwhere necessary for the transportation of any worker who experiences injuryor sickness to a hospital and home.

b. an employee in charge of providing ambulance services shall always be onduty in the mine.

Article 467Housekeeping

(1) Work sites, traffic ways, magazines and service rooms shall be kept clean andtidy.

(2) The floor area of any work site shall be maintained to always be kept as dry aspossible.

(3) The floor area of any work site shall be as free as possible from any protrudingnails, splinters, holes or any loose boards.

Article 468Personal Protection Equipment

(1) Every person shall wear protective head gear when in any underground mine or inor in the area of any mine or mill where there exists the potential for danger fromfalling objects or collisions.

(2) All people shall wear safety boots when in underground mines, in the area of ornear any mine or mill where the potential for foot injury exists.

(3) All persons shall wear safety glasses or safety goggles or face protectionequipment or any other appropriate safety apparel when in or in the vicinity ofany mine or mill when there are hazards which may injure the eyes.

(4) Any person who works at a height of more than 2.5 metres where the potential forfalling, shall wear a safety belt and safety lanyard.

Article 469

266

Waste Bins

Waste bins shall be equipped with a cover and shall be provided at specific locations andmust be emptied and cleaned at specific times.

Article 470Communications Equipment

Telephones or two way communications equipment shall be provided and equipped withinstructions for use and important numbers for the purpose of communicating with thesurface from :

a. the base of any shaft or means of egress;

b. the internal terminal of any transportation system used for the transportation ofpeople;

c. the work site of the operational supervisor.

Article 471Transportation Requirements

(1) Along the entire length of any road which is hauled by an animal, refuge holesshall be provided large enough for two persons at intervals of no more than 40metres.

(2) Along roads without permanently installed lighting, every animal that hauls aseries of mine lorries shall be carry appropriate lighting and the last lorry in thechain must be affixed with red tail lights.

(3) It is prohibited to ride any animal in any mine.

(4) Not one animal shall be left unattended in any mine except where unhooked fromthe vehicle being hauled and such animals must be tethered.

Article 472Respiratory Equipment

(1) Every type of respiratory equipment that is used shall be approved by the ChiefMine Inspector.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall create company regulations for the handling,utilisation, storage and maintenance of respiratory equipment in accordance with

267

the manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with the conditions at the placeof use.

(3) The use of any approved respiratory equipment shall be suited to the followingbreathing hazards :

a. oxygen deficiency;

b. gases or smoke and

c. any other exposures including dust and noxious gases (fumes) and the periodof use and duration of use.

Part SeventeenManpower Training

and Supervision


Apart from the requirements of Article 28 through Article 30 of these regulations, thefollowing stipulations shall apply for all underground mines.

Article 474Manpower Training

(1) a. it is prohibited to employ any person at any underground mine who has noexperience in working in an underground mine except those workers whohave undergone training and who have been approved by the Technical MineManager and

b. any worker who has completed training shall be given a certificate by thecompany or authority approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Training as required in paragraph (1) shall be training provided in accordancewith a curriculum approved by the Chief Mine Inspector. Except where stipulatedotherwise the said training must :

a. last at least 30 days and

b. must to the greatest extent possible be in accordance with actual conditions inunderground mines and such training in the mine must be carried out at leastsix days.

268

(3) Every curriculum as required in paragraph (1) shall specify the methods used fortraining with particular emphasis on the type of classes, hours of classes, theory inclass, practices, physical training, training sites and schedules, accommodationfacilities and equipment that must be provided as well as arrangements in relationto theory in class and field practice.

Article 475Supervision of Underground Workers

(1) Any person who has only recently completed training and who is employed at anunderground mine shall be supervised by an instructor or supervisor for period ofthe first thirty working days

(2) Supervision as required in paragraph (1) shall be carried out for only one personat all times except where working together in one place.

(3) It is prohibited to carry out any work at any location that is specially used as atraining location except for persons who are undergoing training, instructors,supervisors, mine employees or any other authorised person.

(4) Any person undergoing training may only be underground when accompanied byan instructor or training supervisor.

(5) Training may only be carried out after the Technical Mine Manager or the head oftraining department has appointed an instructor or training supervisor and peopleto be trained and the training materials to be used.

Article 476Training for New Duties

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall ensure that persons are not assigned toperform new duties except :

a. any person who has experience in working underground outside of the newduties to be performed shall have at least six months experience after thecompletion of training as specified in the previous Article and

b. any person who has undergone training and who has been awarded thecertificate as specified in Article 474 paragraph (1) letter b.

(2) Training as specified in paragraph (1) of this Article is not required for anyworker who has been trained and any worker who is capable of demonstratingsafe working procedures for the said new duties.

269

Article 477Exceptions

(1) Article 474 and Article 475 shall not apply to any person as follows :

a. Operational supervisors;

b. any staff member of the mechanical or electrical divisions;

c. any mine surveyor or any other person whose duty is specifically to carry outsurveying work;

d. any person whose duty is specifically to carry out monitoring or surveying orwho is oftentimes involved in monitoring or surveying work or

e. any person who does not usually work underground.

(2) Article 474 shall not apply to any person whose work is only to construct shaftsor to develop drifts and such workers must have undergone training of at least sixdays with at least a total of thirty training hours and the said training mustcomprise practical training in a mine as well as discussion of lessons related tosuch work.

(3) Article 474 shall not apply to any worker who has experience in working in anyunderground mine of at least two years either in Indonesia or abroad and when theTechnical Mine Manager considers the ability of the said worker to speakIndonesia is adequate.

(4) Article 476 shall apply to any person as specified in paragraph (2) and paragraph(3).

(5) Article 474 shall not apply to any student from any educational institution who isundertaking work practice where :

270

a. the said student has undergone training of at least 7 days, and the trainingincluded safe working procedures, safe transportation underground, practicetraining and demonstrations of mining operations and discussions on anymatter related to the work and

b. for the first fourteen days works at an underground mine students must beunder the supervision of an instructor or Operational Supervisor.

Article 478Training Records

Copies of every certificate issued based on these regulations shall be stored at the miningoffice for the duration of the period the person is working and for six months after thesaid person has left.

Article 479Annual Refresher Training

Every person who works in any underground mine shall undergo annual refreshertraining of at least twenty four hours in accordance with the curriculum as approved bythe Chief Mine Inspector or the Technical Mine Manager. Where annual refreshertraining is carried out in stages, every stage shall last for a period no shorter than 30minutes and the worker shall be informed that the said period of time is part of the annualrefresher training.

Article 480Appointment and Duties

of the Instructor

(1) A number of instructors shall be appointed to supervise training in anyunderground mine and the Technical Mine Manager shall make an immediatereport of the appointment of an instructor to be forwarded the Chief MineInspector.

(2) It is prohibited to assign additional duties to any underground mine instructorapart from training duties.

(3) Where any instructor is without training duties for a continuous period of oneweek the Technical Mine Manager shall make a training schedule that is suited tothe area of his duties for the duration of the said period. Copies of the saidnotification shall be stored at the mining office where the employee implementshis/her duties ;

(4) Every instructor shall have the following duties :

271

a. to supervise the implementation of training;

b. to make records of the implementation of training and make reports on theprogress of any person undergoing training under his/her supervision for theTechnical Mine Manager and the said reports must be made at designatedintervals and weekly reports must be made where the period for report makingis not specified.

c. to make weekly reports on the progress and supervision of any personundergoing training for the Technical Mine Manager.

d. to make quarterly recommendations to the Technical Mine Manager on futuretraining;

e. to make quarterly reports to the Technical Mine Manager on the progress ofevery worker in the underground mine who has less than 12 months ofexperience in other underground mines and

f. see to the well being of any worker who has been working less than sixmonths in any underground mine.

(5) The records and reports required in paragraph (4) shall be stored for twelvemonths at the mining office.

Article 481Training Compensation

(1) Training shall be carried out during normal working hours and any personundergoing training shall be paid a wage as would be paid were the said personworking normally.

(2) Where such training is carried out away from the work site, the personundergoing training shall be compensated in the form of additional wages such asfor travelling expenses, food expenses and accommodation expenses which areincurred for the duration of the training programme.

272

Article 482Exceptions

The Mine Inspector may grant exception expressed in writing in the Mine Bookregarding the validation of the stipulations in these regulations to any mine or at any partof any mine or to any person working therefor, where the Mine Inspector is certain thatsuch exception will not reduce the occupational health and safety of any person beingtrained or any mine worker.

Part EighteenProtection from

Natural Radiation


The following stipulations shall only apply to protection from the danger of naturalradiation originating from mining rock or mine air. The requirements for protectionagainst man made radiation shall comply with the regulations as issued by the NationalAtomic Energy Agency or other related authorities.

Article 484Assessment

(1) Preliminary assessment of radon daughters in the mine shall be conducted bymeans of taking samples from each of the return airways at any point in thevicinity of an intersection with a shaft or incline or any means of egress to thesurface.

(2) The sample required in paragraph (1) shall be taken by using methods andequipment designed for the purpose of measuring concentrations of radondaughters or the amount of alpha radiation energy, the methods and equipmentemployed must be approved by the Chief Mine Inspector. The taking of samplesmust be carried out by a competent person specified by the Technical MineManager.

(3) Where the findings of samples taken indicate concentrations of radon daughters oralpha energy in degrees equivalent to :

a. or greater than 0.03 Working Level1) measuring of the concentrations of radon shall be conducted at the work

sites, roadways and any other place where workers gather. The samplesshall be taken at nose level when working;

273

2) where sample results as required in sub item 1 indicates between 0.1 - 0.3Working Level, further testing shall be carried out at intervals at leastthree months until radon daughter measurements are below 0.03 WorkingLevel and

3) where sample results indicate more than 0.1 Working Level further testingshall be carried out every week until radon daughter measurements areless than 0.1 Working Level.

b. where sample results indicate levels less than 0.03 Working Level, furthersamples shall be conducted at intervals of 12 months.

(4) In the case of uranium mines intervals specified in paragraph (3) letter a item 2)shall be reduced to one month whereas in paragraph (3) letter a item 3) the saidperiod shall be daily, and in paragraph (3) letter b the said period shall be threemonths.

Article 485Radiation Limits

(1) The mine operator, the Technical Mine Manager and the Underground MineManager shall take measures to limit worker exposures to natural radiation whenat work underground.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) all workers shall be protectedagainst radon daughters in excess of 4 Monthly Working Levels in one calendaryear.

(3) Workers shall be protected from the danger of radon daughters in excess of 1.0Working Level except in an emergency situation for the purposes of the rescue ofany worker.

Article 486Personal Radiation Records

(1) At any mine area where concentrations of radon daughters are detected in excessof 0.1 Working Level, any person working at the said place shall wear radiationdosimeters and measuring results or assessments of the said person must berecorded.

274

(2) Any person who is exposed to levels as specified in paragraph (1) shall be fittedwith personal details including name, work site location, walking area and theaverage concentrations at the said place. The cumulative degree of exposure toradiation shall be calculated in weeks.

(3) Individual details of the exposure level of workers shall not be discontinuedexcept where the said person is no longer working or where the said person hasexceeded his/her time at the area with concentrations in excess of 0.1 WorkingLevel for six weeks, and the cumulative degree of exposure for one calendar yeardoes not exceed 1 Monthly Working Level.

(4) At least two months following the end of every calendar year, or the closing ofthe mine, the individual details of the degree of radiation exposure as required inparagraph (2) and paragraph (3) shall be forwarded to the authorised authority.Copies of the said details shall be available at the Mining Office.

(5) Copies of validated individual details of exposure levels shall be given to workersor any person given the authority thereby based on written requests.


(1) Apart from the stipulations of Article 485 paragraph (1), safety measures as listedbelow shall be implemented :

a. it is prohibited to smoke at any mine location where the records specified inArticle 486 of these regulations are required to be kept;

b. it is required to install warning signs prohibiting the entry of any nonauthorised person into any access way to any non active area in the minewhere concentrations of radon daughters are in excess of 1Working Level.

c. respiratory equipment approved for use as a means of protection against radondaughters shall be provided at the mine and must be used by any personentering any working environment containing radon daughters in excess of 1Working Level and

d. it is prohibited to enter any location that contains radon daughters inconcentrations in excess of 10 Working Level except where the said person iswearing self-contained respiratory equipment or respirator that absorbs radonand its gas.

(2) Gamma radiation examinations shall be conducted at every part of the mine thatcontains any radio active ore. The examinations shall be carried out inaccordance with the standards as approved by the Chief Mine Inspector and

275

a. where measurements of gamma radiation indicate an average level in excessof 7.5 micro sieverts (7.5 U Sv) per hour a radiation dosimeter shall be wornby any person impacted by radiation and individual details of the degree ofexposure to gamma radiation must be kept;

b. data as intended in letter a shall apply as details/records as specified in Article486 and

c. individual details of the degree of annual exposures to gamma radiation shallnot exceed 50 milli sieverts (50 m Sv).

Article 488Radiation Dosimeters

Where individual details of the exposure to radiation are required in Article 486 theTechnical Mine Manager shall :

a. work in conjunction with a laboratory or agency equipped with the necessaryequipment, experts and experience for the purpose of dosimeter services andthe calculation of doses and

b. work in conjunction with advisors in regard to the issue of radiation protectionin the mine.

Article 489Medical Supervision

Where any person is working in a mine whose period of work exceeds one year and thedoses exceeds 30 percent of the annual worker limit for exposure to radiation asspecified, medical supervision shall be provided for the purpose of monitoring any personaffected by radiation and the effects thereof.

276

Chapter IXUnderground Coal Mines

Part OneGeneral


Every underground coal mine shall be deemed to be a gassy mine and other undergroundmines may also be deemed as a gassy mines where one of the following stipulations isfulfilled :

a. the underground mine has a fire damp content in excess of 0.25 percent at anytime at any part of the underground mine or

b. the underground mine has at some time in the past experienced a fire or fire dampexplosion.

Article 491Gassy Mine Exceptions

The Chief Mine Inspection may grant an exception to a coal mine, where neither of theconditions of paragraph 490 have ever applied, if he considers that all circumstances ofthe mine do not justify it being classifies as a “Safety Lamp Mine”.

Article 492Flame Safety Lamps

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 433, it is prohibited to use any light in any“underground mine” other than safety lamps as approved by the Chief MineInspector.

(2) Safety lamps as specified in these regulations shall be flame lamps or tightlysealed and protected electric lamps which prevent the ignition of gases orcombustible dusts outside the said lamp.

277

Article 493Requirements for

Flame Safety Lamps

All flame safety lamps shall meet the following requirements :

(1) For any mine in which ambient air may contains gases :

a. every lamp shall be so constructed and maintained, that it will not causeexternal ignition when used in gassy or dusty atmosphere.

b. the safety of any re-lighter device shall be tested before re-lighting a lampbelow ground to ensure that external ignition of gas or dust is not possible.

(2) Construction of safety lamps :

a. all flame safety lamps shall be fitted with magnetic locks;

b. when using gauze as the raw material, the size of the gauze hole and theuniformity of the gauze mesh in and outside shall meet safety conditions and

c. every lamp shall have :

1) simple and reliable external means of adjusting the wick;

2) devices to re-light the lamp from the exterior and

3) devices capable of regulating the intake of air only from the top of thelight.

(3) The glasses shall meet the following stipulations :

a. the glass shall have a smooth and clear surface. The end shall be parallel andat right angles to the axis of the glass and

b. the glass shall not be easily shattered.

(4) The bonnet shall meet the following stipulations :

a. the lamp shall be fitted with a bonnet to protect the gauze from direct windand

b. the distance between the top of the gauze and the bonnet shall be no less than10 millimetres.

278

(5) The intensity of light from any clean light shall be at least the equivalent of 0.6candle power.

(6) Lamps shall :

a. be capable of giving actual indications of the presence of fire damp and anylack of oxygen in the air of any mine by means of the flame;

b. shall be a stable flame and

c. shall have enough fuel for use of 12 hours at normal use. Fuel used shall beof a type approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

Article 494The Use and Maintenance

of Flame Safety Lamps

(1) Every flame safety lamp shall be clean and in good condition and all parts thereofshall be properly installed and the said lamp shall always be ready for immediateuse.

(2) When any flame safety lamp is used for the purpose of detecting fire damp or thelack of oxygen (O2) in the air, the said detection shall be conducted with care andwith caution by a capable person with good eye sight.

Article 495

(1) Inspections shall be carried out prior to and at any time of use of flame safetylamps :

a. lamps shall be inspected prior to being taken out of the lamp room to ensurethat :

1) the lamps are in good condition and that all parts thereof are installedproperly and safely;

2) the glass is not cracked and in good condition and

3) the lamp has no rust, dirt or oil on the gauze.

b. while underground.

1) it is prohibited to open up the lamp;

279

2) it is prohibited to set the lamp on the floor or to hang it where it may bestruck by any objects and

3) it is prohibited to leave any lit lamp unattended or unsupervised.

c. When any lamp is damaged it shall be immediately turned off with caution.

Article 496Inspections for Methane

Gas Using FlameSafety Lamps

(1) When any flame safety lamp is used to test for the presence of fire damp :

a. the lamp shall be held firmly by the fuel vessel;

b. when the flame grows due to the intake of any gas, the lamp shall be loweredslowly and with caution. When the flame extinguishes, the lamp shall betaken to any place where there is fresh air prior to being re-lit.

c. when the flame grows while the wick flame extinguishes, the lamp shall betaken immediately to a place of fresh air and measures shall be taken to pumpsufficient air to the said location.

d. it is prohibited to allow any lamp to smoke, given that such a situation coversthe gauze and hampers the flow of air into the lamp. Prior to being taken toany work site for testing purposes, the flame shall first be inspectedthoroughly; while moving forward inspections shall be made to detect thepresence of fire damp.

Article 497Re-lighting Flame

Safety Lamps Underground

(1) It is prohibited for any person except the Mine Inspector, the Technical MineManager the Underground Mine Manager and any other person granted authorityin writing, to carry any flame safety lamp with a self contained re-lighting devicecomplete with an operating key into any gassy mine.

(2) It is prohibited to light any flame safety lamp underground except where the saidlamp has been declared in good condition following an inspection.

(3) It is prohibited to light any flame safety lamp equipped with self containedignitions in any area where combustible gas is believed to be present.

280

(4) Any person permitted to carry any flame safety lamp with a self containedignition is prohibited from carrying the safety key to the said lamp except whereauthorised as specified in paragraph (1).

(5) Lamps, as specified in paragraph (4) may only be re-lit by an OperationalSupervisor.

Article 498Electric Safety Lamps

(1) It is prohibited to use portable electric lamps at any gassy mine except those typesapproved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Electric safety lamps shall be fitted with a glass globe which seals tightly aroundthe bulb, and shall be protected with a sturdy bonnet.

(3) Any mine worker using portable electric safety lamps shall be attentive of :

a. the battery cover and the glass cover that protect the light bulb which shallonly be opened by an authorised person, and shall be done only in the lamproom and

b. when the electric safety lamps is damaged or defective, they shall beimmediately turned off and returned for replacement.

Article 499Prohibited Objects

(1) It is prohibited to light any fire in any form whatsoever in any underground minethat is gassy and it is prohibited to carry any lighters or matches.

(2) Apart from the requirements of paragraph (1) it is prohibited to carry any lighters,electronic or mechanical, which is capable of producing a flame into anyunderground mine except of a type approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(3) The Technical Mine Manager or any person appointed thereby shall have theauthority to inspect any worker who may be carrying goods as specified inparagraph (1) an paragraph (2) into the underground mine. The names of thoseappointed must be recorded in the Mine Book.

(4) The Technical Mine Manager shall guarantee that all workers entering anunderground mine have been checked to ensure that not one such worker iscarrying prohibited objects as specified in paragraph (1) and paragraph (2).

281

Part TwoPrevention of Combustible

Gases and Dust from Igniting

Article 500General Duties

The Technical Mine Manager shall :

a. Identify potential sources of ignition of firedamp or flammable dust and

b. take effective precautionary measures to ensure that ignition of combustible gasesor dusts does not occur.

Article 501Preventing Methane

Gas from Igniting

(1) Where fire damp is found to be present in any gassy underground mine,precautionary measures shall be taken to prevent ignition of the gas and suchprecautionary measures shall be carried out continuously as long as the gasremains present.

(2) Apart from the requirements of Article 500, the Technical Mine Manager shallspecify the precautionary measures that must be taken to reduce the possibility ofthe ignition of fire damp caused by :

a. blasting;

b. electrostatic sparking;

c. static electricity sparks;

d. mechanical friction;

e. sparks caused by friction from excavating equipment or loading equipment;

f. spontaneous combustion and

g. open flames.

(3) Light alloy metals (aluminium, magnesium, titanium and the alloys thereof) shallnot be used underground where ever possible. It is prohibited to utilise the saidmetals at any place where an accumulation of gas exists.

282

(4) In any mine or section of a mine where coal or other mineral worked may beliable to spontaneous combustion, the precautions taken shall include theseparation of the various sections of the workings to make them independent ofeach other. All entries to each section of such workings shall be provided withprepared sites for the fire seals.

Article 502Fire Damp Inspections

(1) At every gassy underground mine, fire damp detection equipment approved bythe Chief Mine Inspector shall be provided.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall appoint an adequate number of competentpeople to carry out fire damp testing at all work sites during work shifts using firedamp detection equipment.

(3) Competent people as specified in paragraph (2) shall be :

a. any person who has undergone training in the use of fire damp detectionequipment in a course whose curriculum is approved by the Chief MineInspector.

b. any person with experience working in an underground coal mine of at leastone year and who has been trained by a competent person in the use of thesaid equipment for at least one working month;

c. the names of the said persons shall be recorded in the Mine Book and

d. people as specified in paragraph (3) letter a shall be given refresher trainingat least every three years.

(4) Employees as specified in paragraph (2) who carry out fire damp testing shall berequired to make written reports and shall inform the operation supervisor of thedetected presence of any fire damp.

283

Article 503Fire damp Testing

Near Electrical Equipmentor Diesel Machinery

(1) At any place where electrical equipment or diesel machinery is operated, firedamp testing shall be carried out moments before the said electrical equipmentand diesel machinery is started.

(2) Where testing indicates a fire damp content in excess of one percent the saidelectrical equipment and diesel machinery shall not be started.

(3) Testing as specified in paragraph (1) shall be carried out by a competent person asrequired in Article 502 paragraph (3) and such testing shall be repeated regularlywhile the said equipment and machinery is operated.

(4) Any time during a work shift if the presence of fire damp in excess of one percentis detected, the following measures shall be taken :

a. electricity shall be cut and diesel equipment shall be turned off and therequirements of Article 428 shall be carried out as soon as possible and

b. such changes or adjustment to the airflow that are possible to reduce thefiredamp content.

(5) When any locomotive or any other vehicle powered by electricity or diesel is usedat a gassy underground mine, fire damp testing shall be carried out at both ends ofthe roadway and at several specific places along the said roadway.

(6) Diesel machines used in the mine shall be equipped with exhaust gas catalysts.

Article 504Examination of Firedamp

Before (Intentional) Roof Fall

Immediately before an intentional roof fall is made, pillar workings shall beexamined to ascertain whether firedamp is present. If 1% or more is detected,such roof fall shall not be made.

284

Article 505Location of Tests

for Firedamp

(1) Fire damp testing shall be made :

a. at the face of each working place;

b. in each heading;

c. in a split of air returning from any working section;

d. at a point not less than 30 centimetres from the goaf or rib at the return end ofany working;

e. specific places along any roadway where fire damp is expected ofaccumulating and

f. on the gas monitoring pipes installed at areas that have been sealed off.

(2) Fire damp measuring as specified in paragraph (1) shall be carried out in thefollowing way :

a. as close as possible to the roof and

b. at the general cross section of any airway.

(3) The result of such testing shall be recorded in the daily record book for ventilationlocated on the surface.

Article 506Precaution Against

Flammable Dust

(1) In order to prevent the spread of coal dust explosions or explosion of othercombustible materials, the said dust shall be cleaned away and shall not beallowed to accumulate at any work site or on any electrical equipment.

(2) When any underground mine activity is capable of causing or increasing anexcessive amount of dust in the air which is capable of leading to an explosion,water of other valid means shall be used to reduced the amount of dust.

(3) When the dust is fine or concentrated enough to be dangerous, precautionarymeasures shall be taken which must cover :

285

a. prevention of the dust becoming airborne;

b. reduction of the occurrence of dust during excavation or transportation;

c. cleaning and disposal of the dust from the mine and

d. regularly spreading powdered lime in specific amounts or other means toensure that the coal dust is not as flammable.

(4) Precautionary measures required in paragraph (3) shall be in accordance with theGuidelines for the Prevention of Combustible dust as issued by the Chief MineInspector, particularly in regard to the composition fineness and means ofspreading powdered lime.

Article 507Taking Dust Samples

(1) When a condition exists as specified in Article 506 paragraph (3), the taking ofdust samples from any roadway where the dust is found shall be carried out atintervals of no more 30 days in order to determine the combustible content of thesaid dust.

(2) The taking of coal dust samples as specified in paragraph (1) shall be carried outto ensure the collection of no less than one sample from :

a. along any length of coal haulage roads at distances not more than 150 metres;

b. any return airway, beginning at a distance of 180 metres from the workingface and thereafter at distances of no more than 150 metres and

c. every roadway apart from that intended in letter a and letter b for no morethan every 250 metres.

(3) Where analyses of dust samples taken over a continuous period of six monthsfrom any dusty mine roadway indicate that the combustible content can benaturally sustained without adding rock dust, the taking of dust samples foranalysis may therefore be carried out at intervals of at least ninety days.

286

(4) Paragraph (3) shall not apply where the conditions change or where workmethods cause an increase in the combustible dust content so that theconcentration of non combustible dust is reduced. Samples and the analysisthereof must be carried out as soon as possible.

(5) The results of dust analyses shall be recorded in a special book no more than 21days after the dust sample was taken. The findings of the dust sample analysis asrequired in paragraph (2) apart from being recorded as digits, shall also be plottedon the mine map attached to the said special book using different colours inaccordance with the levels of dust concentration.

(6) Where steel arch supports are used to support any mine roadway, dust samples onthe roof and sides may be taken together.

(7) Dust samples to be analysed shall be mixed evenly and be less than 250 micro-metres and must be analysed using recognised methods.

(8) The stipulations as required in Article 506 paragraph (3) item c and item d shallnot apply to dust :

a. within a distance of less than 10 metres from any working face;

b. that is naturally moist and

c. which contains less than 10 percent volatile matters.

Article 508Non Combustible Dust

(1) Dust samples taken and analysed as required in Article 507 shall only becategorised as non combustible dust where the following stipulations are met :

Airborne Particle Content inDust

Minimum Content of NonCombustible materials

More than 25 percent 80 percent20 percent to 25 percent 75 percent15 percent to 20 percent 70 percent10 percent to 15 percent 65 percentless than 20 percent nil

(2) Where the analysis results for dust samples taken from any length of road do notmeet the stipulations as required in paragraph (1) :

a. the said length of road must be spread with rock dust and

287

b. additional dust samples must be taken.

Article 509Precautions as Regards Vehicle

Containing Coal Dust

Vehicles carrying only coal dust or a large amount of coal dust shall be prohibited fromcrossing any roadway under which cables or electrical equipment are located, exceptwhere the bed is firmly sealed.

Article 510Barriers to Preventthe Spread of Fire

(1) The Technical Mine Manager shall prepare and emphasise the installation ofbarriers; either water barriers or rock dust barriers along any roadway leading toworkings to prevent the promulgation of methane or coal dust explosions.

(2) The design for the barriers as specified in paragraph (1) shall be validated by theChief Mine Inspector.

(3) The design for the barriers as specified in paragraph (1) shall include :

a. the position and type of partition installed ;

b. the location of where the partition is positioned on the mine map;

c. data on the location of partitions must be updated at least every three months,and

d. inspections and reports of the physical condition of the partitions

(4) Copies of the design as specified in paragraph (2) shall be filed at the mine office.Where, in the opinion of the Mine Inspector, the installation procedures andmaintenance still require revision, the Mine Inspector may order such work whichmust be recorded in the Mine Book.

(5) The requirements for these regulations shall not apply to any roadway which hasa coal dust airborne particle content of less than 10 percent.

288

Article 511Pre-shift Inspections

(1) The Operation Supervisor shall inspect all work sites one hour prior to thecommencement of work shifts or prior to any person entering any work site in anygassy underground mine. The name of the supervisor or person appointed tocarry out the inspections shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

(2) The implementation of inspections and testing of any work site as required inparagraph (1) shall cover :

a. the accumulation of fire damp;

b. any lack of oxygen;

c. the conditions of seals and ventilation doors;

d. the roof, face and rib conditions;

e. the condition of roadways, rails and conveyors used for the transportation ofpeople;

f. any hazards along roadways heading towards abandoned areas;

g. air volume and speed at air splits;

h. signs of heating on any conveyor that transports coal and

i. any other hazards as required in these regulations or work guidelines.

(3) Where inspections, as required in paragraph (1),indicates any hazardousconditions, the said area shall be declared as a danger area and the said employeeshall undertake measures such as installing clear and visible signs and shall makea report to the Underground Mine Manager.

(4) It is prohibited to enter any danger area as long as the danger sign remainsinstalled except for any person appointed to overcome the said danger.

(5) Upon completion of the inspection as required in paragraph (2) the findings of theinspections shall be reported to the Underground Mine Manager.

(6) The inspection findings as required in paragraph (3) shall be recorded in a notebook which may at certain times be inspected by the Mine Inspector.

Article 512

289

Daily Inspections

(1) The Operational Supervisor or any assigned and competent person shall carry outinspections of hazardous conditions at every work site at least once every workshift, or more frequently when necessary, and the name of the said person shall berecorded in the Mine Book.

(2) All hazardous conditions shall be immediately corrected and when the saidconditions pose immediate danger, the Technical Mine Manager or theUnderground Mine Manager shall as quickly as possible evacuate every person,except any person assigned to correct the said hazard.

(3) Inspections as required paragraph (1) shall include inspections of fire damp andany lack of oxygen.

(4) No occupied working place shall be left unexamined for more than four hours.

Article 513Weekly Inspections

(1) Apart from pre work shift inspections and daily inspections as required in Article511 and Article 512, inspections of hazardous conditions including testing for firedamp or any other matter stipulated under these regulations must be carried outno less than once a week by an Operational Supervisor.

(2) Work site as specified in paragraph (1) shall be any work site where people arealways to be found as well as those work site where people are to be found onlyfrom time to time.

(3) Where hazardous conditions are discovered, a report shall be made immediatelyto the Underground Mine Manager or the Technical Mine Manager and the saidhazard shall be corrected immediately.

(4) The findings of inspections, testing results and the outcomes of measures taken asrequired in paragraph (3) shall be reported in writing and signed by the partyconcerned. The said records may be inspected from time to time by the MineInspector.

290

Article 514Inspections of Idle

or Abandoned Areas

The Operational Supervisor shall carry out inspections for fire damp, oxygen deficiency,and any other hazardous conditions at least three hours prior to any person beingpermitted to enter any area that has been abandoned or which is temporarily not beingworked.

Article 515Evacuation in theEvent of Excessive

Fire damp

(1) Apart from the requirements of the ventilation standards for gassy mines,evacuation procedures as specified in Article 342 shall apply where fire damp ismeasured in excess of two percent in the ambient air at any underground worksite.

(2) The Technical Mine Manager shall inform the Chief Mine Inspector immediatelyof any successfully treated affected area, the implementation of any evacuationsand safety measures, and when considered necessary the Chief Mine Inspectorshall consider the report and enact special stipulations for the said mine.

Part ThreeVentilation in Gassy

Mines


The requirements of Article 369 through Article 376 as well as the definitions in Article1 paragraph 65 through paragraph 69 shall apply as additional requirements this Article.

Article 517Ventilation Standards

(1) The requirements of Article 370 paragraph (2) shall apply to gassy mines exceptthat the fire damp content limits shall not be permitted to be in excess of onepercent.

291

(2) The fire damp contents at any intake airway to any working face shall not begreater than 0.5 percent as measured at a distance of 50 metres away from theworking face.


(1) When ventilation does not meet the requirements of Article 369 and Article 370,the supervisor shall make an immediate report to the Technical Mine Managerand the ventilation employee shall take the necessary measures to improve thecondition of the ventilation in order that prevailing requirements are met.

(2) Every section being prepared to be mined shall have a ventilation map thatcontains the following :

a. the progress of installation of the auxiliary ventilation fan at the road head andpermanent ventilation systems;

b. in any long-wall working the completion of a through ventilation circuitbefore full face production starts and

c. the maximum length of road headings to be made prior to construction ofcross cuts for ventilation in room and pillar mining..

(3) Send copies of the ventilation map as required in paragraph (2) to the Chief MineInspector as specified in Article 19 letter d.

(4) In the case of adjacent mines having part of a ventilation system in common, thecommon part of the system shall be the responsibility of a single Technical MineManager or a person authorized by him.

(5) It is prohibited to change any general ventilation system without orders from theTechnical Mine Manager, except in an emergency situation; any changes mayonly be carried out by the Operational Supervisor and a report of the matter mustbe made to the Technical Mine Manager.

(6) Where changes are made to a major part of the ventilation system :

a. a ventilation plan shall be made showing the changes carried out;

b. such changes shall be carried out by competent people;

c. copies of the planned changes of the ventilation shall be forwarded to theChief Mine Inspector no later than 30 days prior to the commencement of thechanges.

292

Article 519Company Ventilation Regulations

(1) Company regulations shall be made for ventilation and the use of ventilationequipment that ensure :

a. safe and effective maintenance and operation of all ventilation systems;

b. monitoring of the operation of ventilation fans;

c. treatment of the conditions at any section of the mine where noxious gas, firedamp accumulates in excess of the levels as specified in these regulations;

d. the amount of minimum air pumped to every work site and

e. procedures for use of the auxiliary ventilation fans must be provided for andrecorded.

(2) A number of competent employees shall be appointed to supervise theimplementation of the ventilation system as well as the ventilation equipment and thenames of the said employees shall be recorded in the Mine Book.

Article 520Provision of Reserve Fans

(1) At safety lamp mines any fan provided at the surface shall be equipped with analternative source of electircity (means of driving it) unless a reserve fan of adequatecapacity is provided. In either case sufficient ventilation must be produced to allowevery person underground to leave the mine safely, when any or all underground fansmay be stopped.

(2) Any reserve fan shall be kept constantly available for use and shall be test-run at leastonce a week.

Article 521Installation of Booster Fans

(1) Booster fans shall only be installed where :

293

a. research has been carried out by a competent person as specified in Article372 paragraph (11) that covers all areas that are to be affected by the saidinstallation.

b. a report of the research findings is made which provides recommendations ofthe type, size and location of the booster fan to be installed and

c. copies of the report as required in letter b have been forwarded to the ChiefMine Inspector along with any expected problems which may occur due to theinstallation of the said booster fan.

(2) Every booster fan shall be designed and installed so that :

a. re-circulation which occurs in mine ventilation systems is preventedautomatically

b. air may flow through the parts of the booster fan where the said fan is notfunctioning.

(3) When any booster fan is not guarded by a competent person on a continuousbasis, the said fan shall be equipped with equipment that :

a. is capable of detecting and determining fire damp contents in the air flowingthrough the sections of the booster fan, and which is capable of providingwarnings in the form of lights or sounds when the fire damp content exceedsone percent.

b. is capable of indicating the degree of electricity flowing to every electricmotor and which is capable of cutting of the electricity automatically whenthe degree of electricity in any electrical motor exceeds ten percent of thenominal current;

c. is capable of providing warning signals such as lights or sounds when thefollowing occur :

1) the motor of the fan fails to function and

2) any rise or fall in the ventilation pressure produced by the fan to 10percent.

d. warning signals as required in paragraph (3) shall be forwarded to a controlroom that is always manned and the location of which should best be at thesurface of the mine.

294

(4) When the booster fan is always manned by an employee the said employee shallmonitor and record the ventilation pressure every two hours. When anyabnormalities are discovered while the fan is being operated a report shall bemade immediately to the supervisor.

(5) The construction of the booster fan house shall be fire resistant and the roadwayon which the said fan house is installed shall be fire resistant for a distance of atleast 10 metres at the intake airway to the fan, and 50 metres to the return airwayfrom the fan.

(6) When a booster fan is installed the ventilation guidelines as specified in Article519 shall cover the following :

a. the safe operation of the system ;

b. reports of damage or equipment failure, or any significant rises in the contentsof fire damp ;

c. stopping of the fan shall be carried out only for the purposes of inspectionsand maintenance at stipulated times ;

d. stopping of the fan shall only be carried out by the appointed employee ;

e. measures that have to be taken when the fan stops unintentionally and

f. reporting methods for employees in charge of other sections at the mine or toany related mine leader whose work site may be affected by a stopping of thefan.

Article 522Auxiliary Ventilation

Systems

(1) Every road head or dead end that is in excess of 5 metres in length shall haveauxiliary ventilation to pump air as close as possible to the working face.

(2) Company regulations for ventilation as required in Article 519 include companyregulations for auxiliary ventilation that cover :

a. the ventilation system used and the minimum quantity of air supplied whilepeople are at or are not at the work site;

b. the ventilation equipment to be used consisting of :

295

1) all fans

2) the type of electrical equipment, control equipment and cables;

3) dust collecting equipment;

4) the type of air ducts and the methods used to install them and

5) equipment used to reduce gas concentrations where accumulations occur.

c. the maximum quantity of air that is taken from an air flow through theauxiliary fan;

d. the continual operation of the auxiliary fan except when stopped formaintenance or repairs;

e. the maximum overlapping length, the quantity of air supplied by every fan,and the minimum quantity of air being supplied to any overlapping sectionwhen an overlapping system is being used;

f. arrangement of ventilation measurements and recording of the quantity of airsupplied to headings at intervals of seven days by a competent person;

g. a map that shows in detail any changes to the planned ventilation system orequipment; during the implementation of the changes the said map shall beattached to the road head access way.

h. the methods and equipment to be used when it becomes necessary to close offthe heading temporarily and

i. arrangements to dispose of gas or overcome ventilation system failures.

(3) When several auxiliary fans are installed at one branch of the intake airway, priorcalculation shall be made to ensure that all sections in the mine receive air in anadequate amount.

(4) When any auxiliary fan fails to function or the minimum amount of air asstipulated in the ventilation guidelines cannot be met, it is prohibited to enter orbe at any road head except where required :

a. to re-start any auxiliary ventilation under the supervision of the operationalsupervisor or

b. to save lives in an emergency situation.

296

(5) When any auxiliary fan fails to function or the amount of air flow fallsendangering workers, the Operational Supervisor shall ensure that all electricalcircuits in the heading are capable of being cut of automatically.

(6) The requirements of paragraph (5) shall not apply to monitoring equipment andthe power cables thereof, although the fire damp level exceeds the stipulations.The said equipment shall be connected to a source of electricity separate fromother sources of electricity.

(7) When the electricity is cut as specified in paragraph (5), the said current shall notbe restarted until the ventilation system is functioning normally and an inspectionof the heading is carried out.

(8) Every auxiliary fan shall be inspected during operation at intervals of no morethan 4 hours, except :

a. equipment is installed at the heading and on the fans to detect ;

I) the quality and quantity of air;

ii) the mechanical and electrical condition of the fan and

iii) any fire that may occur in or in the vicinity of the road head through whichventilation air is pumped.

b. when electricity is cut off automatically to the fan when the fire damp contentpassing through the fan exceeds one percent, or when mechanical or electricaldamage occurs to the fan.

(9) When two fans or more are installed in the same air vent in an auxiliaryventilation system, or when several such fans are installed at the working face ofa road head :

a. re-inspections shall be carried out by a competent person to determine theexact position of the fan in the intake airway to prevent re-circulation or airleaks and

b. re-measuring shall be conducted whenever progress forward is made in theroad head.

(10) Control switches on every auxiliary fan shall be positioned at the intake airway.

(11) Every venturi ventilator used in the mine shall be positioned in accordance withthe ventilation guidelines and be completely grounded. The said venturiventilator shall be made from non combustible materials.

297

Article 523Working Environment

Monitoring System

(1) In addition to the requirements of Article 370, the requirements for monitoringfire damp contents in the operation of locomotives or free steered vehicles, themaking of notification to the Chief Mine Inspector, portable fire damp detectionequipment and automatic fire damp detection equipment; every gassy mine shallfollow the additional rulings in order to guarantee that the following requirementsare capable of being implemented.

(2) Monitoring of fire damp in the ambient air shall be carried out all the time atevery work site specified in Article 370 paragraph (10). Every long-wall shall beconsidered a working distric referred to in Article 370 paragraph (10) letter c.

(3) The requirements of paragraph (2) shall be carried out using validated detectionequipment or by taking mine air samples for a period of four work days whichshall be analysed in a laboratory approved by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(4) If any firedamp content at any location, as specified in Article 370 paragraph (10)letter (c), is measured to be :

a. in excess of 0.5 percent in an intake to a working place or 0.8 percent in thereturn from a working place; measurements and the taking of samples shall bemade weekly and

b. in excess of 1.0 percent at any return airway from any work site; samples shallbe taken daily.

(5) A continuous monitoring system shall be installed for the detection of ormeasuring of fire damp or any other gases, for use as records for the regulartaking of samples, at :

a. the location of the transducer shall be specified as a measuring location;

b. the time calculated from when the sample enters the transducer shall bespecified as the time the sample was taken and

c. all recorded testing results of gas samples.

(6) Coal layers having self combusting characteristics shall have a device installedthat is capable of early detection of heat that occurs at the location as determinedby the Technical Mine Manager or the Mine Inspector. When the taking ofsamples is specified to be carried out on a regular basis, such sample taking shallbe carried out at intervals of one week.

298

(7) A barometer shall be installed at every mine which must be positioned for ease ofreading by the mine supervisor when entering the mine. The barometer shall beequipped with air pressure recording equipment that operates continually and abarometer shall also be installed at the surface of the mine.

(8) The findings of all monitoring as specified in this Article shall be recorded andreported and stored as required in article 16.

Article 524Monitoring of the Methane

Gas Content in the Operationof Locomotives and Free Steered Vehicles

(1) When any locomotive or is operated in a gassy mine, sampling for fire dampcontents shall utilise recognised detection equipment, or by taking air samples asrequired in Article 523 paragraph (3).

(2) Measurement of the fire damp contents shall be carried out :

a. at the end of every mine roadway through which locomotives or othervehicles pass and

b. at other specified locations.

(3) For the purposes of taking samples, the Chief Mine Inspector may stipulate inwriting additional locations.

(4) Measurements of the fire damp contents shall be carried out once a week at everyplace as required in paragraph (1) and paragraph (2), when the gas contentsindicates excessive percentages :

a. when measuring indicates a fire damp content in excess of 0.8 percent,measuring shall be carried out at the said place at intervals of at least 24hours. For the duration that the gas content remains at an excessivepercentage, such measuring shall be carried out for a period of sevenconsecutive days and

b. when every measurement taken for a period of 30 days indicates that the firedamp contents is not in excess of :

1) 0.2 percent at the place along the intake airway and

2) 0.6 percent at the place along other roadways.

299

Measuring at the said place shall be adequate when carried out at intervals ofno more than 30 days for the duration that the fire damp contents exceeds thepercentages as stated above.

(5) Notwithstanding anything in the last preceding paragraph, whenever anyalteration is made in the arrangements for ventilating a mine that may affect anylength of road in which determinations of the firedamp content are required bythis Article, a firedamp determination at each point in that length shall be made assoon as (possible) any substantial effect of the alteration would be apparent.

(6) When measuring for fire damp contents is required to be recorded as specified inthis article, such recording shall be carried out by taking air samples, the saidmeasuring shall be carried out at the place and time the sample was taken.

(7) Particulars of every determination of fire damp carried out in accordance with thisArticle shall be recorded forthwith in the manner described in Article 502.

(8) If any determination of fire damp content made in any length of road (notincluding measurements using air sample analysis) shows a fire damp contentexceding one percent by volume, or any indication of flammable gas is seen (onthe lowered flame of a mine safety lamp in the general body of air) the personmaking that determination shall forthwith inform the person in charge of that partof the mine. The employee in charge shall then stop the operation of thelocomotive or the vehicle on the roadway, which may only be re-operated wherethe fire damp contents does not exceed one percent and when approval has beenobtained from the Underground Mine Manager .

(9) When measurements of the fire damp contents is carried out by means of analysisof air samples and the fire damp content exceeds one percent of the volume, therequirements in paragraph (8) shall apply.

Article 525Notification to the

Chief Mine Inspector

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 523 and Article 524, the Technical MineManager shall notify the Chief Mine Inspector immediately when :

a. the fire damp contents is in excess of one percent at the return airway and fiftymetres from the roadway work face;

b. the fire damp contents exceeds 0.5 percent at the air intake vent within adistance of 50 metres from the roadway work face;

300

c. any locomotive or remote control vehicle is stopped due to the fire dampcontent being in excess of one percent of the volume as specified in Article524 paragraph (8) or paragraph (9) and

d. the effective temperature is more than 30 degrees Celsius.

(2) Notification as required in paragraph (1), the maximum fire damp contents or thetemperature detected and the duration of the said conditions, shall be stated indetail including the causes thereof. Steps to overcome the ventilation conditionsshall also be explained.

Article 526Portable Methane

Gas Detection Equipment

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 502 paragraph (3), flame safety lamps orportable fire damp detection equipment shall be supplied, with an adequatenumber of trained people to operate the said equipment.

(2) The ventilation guidelines specified by the company shall cover the number andlocation of fire damp detectors. The following shall be provided :

a. the long wall face or any part of the work face of a room and pillar systemshall be fitted with at least one detector for every eight workers during anywork shift ;

b. at least one detector at other work areas including non coal drifts or roadheads ;

c. at least one detector at every return airway when repair work is being carriedout and at a distance of 90 metres from the work face of any place whenelectrical equipment is used and

d. at least one detector at any place when electrical equipment is used at adistance of 90 metres from the work face in any return airway.

(3) Inspections shall be carried out at the commencement of every shift and wheneverre-entering a mine after blasting.

(4) Refresher training as required in Article 502 paragraph (3) letter d shall also coverany hazards related to flame safety lamps and in particular the re-lighting of flamesafety lamps in an environment of combustible air.

Article 527Automatic Methane

301

Gas Detectors

(1) Automatic fire damp detectors shall be provided in an adequate amount in orderthat the following stipulations of this Article are fulfilled :

a. work faces.

Automatic detection equipment shall be installed when two consecutivereadings at a distance of 50 metres in the return airway of any work face ofany long wall or part of a room and pillar system, indicates a fire dampcontent in excess of 0.5 percent;

1) a the return end of the face or pillar section;

2) in association with any coal cutting machine or road header in coal; and

3) at any goaf stripping operation in pillar workings.

b. automatic fire damp detection equipment shall be installed at the road head ofany intake airway when two consecutive readings are discovered in excess of0.5 percent and

c. automatic fire damp detection equipment must be installed at any returnairway with a normal fire damp content in excess of 0.5 percent at the exit,

1) every permanent electrical motor in the said roadway and

2) any locomotive or free steered vehicle operating at any section of the saidroadway.

(2) Every automatic fire damp detector as required in paragraph (1) shall be installedin accordance with the stipulations created by the Technical Mine Manager or theinstructions of the Mine Inspector.

(3) Every automatic fire damp detector installed in any coal mine machinery or anyelectrical engine which cannot be monitored, shall be made to cut electricalcurrent automatically when the fire damp content exceeds one percent.

(4) Automatic fire damp detectors provided in accordance with the requirements ofthis Article or provided at the discretion of the Technical Mine Manager shall becounted as portable detectors to meet the requirements of Article 526.

In such situations no more than two automatic fire damp detectors shall bepermitted at any work face of any long road or at any section of any pillared area.

302

(5) When a need for explosive gas detectors is fulfilled by the use of automaticdetectors, the need for equipment to detect any lack of oxygen shall be givenindividual evaluation and such equipment shall be provided by the TechnicalMine Manager.

(6) When the fire damp content at any return airway exceeds 0.5 percent, the ChiefMine Inspector may instruct that automatic fire damp monitors be supplied forcontinuous monitoring. Any measurement data and readings shall be capable ofbeing monitored at the surface.

Article 528Leakage Control

(1) Apart from the requirements of Article 375, every roadway that connects intakeairways and return airways which is not used for mine work shall be closed byany means that have been approved of by the Chief Mine Inspector.

(2) Airways into disused sections of workings shall be stopped off in an approvedmanner with facilities for sampling the internal atmosphere.

(3) At any air crossing there shall be no access between intake and return airwaysexcept through a properly designed air lock.

(4) Doors provided for necessary access between main intake and return airwaysshall be of fireproof construction. All air crossings, stoppings and seals providedin pursuance of this Article shall be explosion-proof.

Article 529General Duties

At any mine that has a fire damp drainage system, equipment used shall be compatiblewith the fire damp drainage and drainage guidelines and a competent OperationalSupervisor shall be appointed to supervise the implementation of the followingstipulations.

Article 530Drill Holes andDrainage Pipes

(1) Prior to the drilling of any drill hole for the purpose of fire damp drainage a pipeshall be provided to be used for pumping the methane out of the drill hole to asafe place.

303

(2) Drilling as required in paragraph (1) shall be carried out using equipment that iscapable of closing the drill hole when any sudden flow of fire damp occurs.

(3) Prior to the commencement of drilling as specified in paragraph (1), an employeeshall ensure that water will flow through the drill rods and that the said water willflow out of the mouth of the drill hole.

(4) Every drill hole shall be equipped with combustible gas volume readingequipment which is capable of continuous measurement.

(5) Each stand pipe forming part of the fire damp drainage system shall be so insertedand sealed in the bore hole that leakage of firedamp or air around the pipe isminimized.

(6) No stand pipe shall be joined to a pipe range by other than a flexible connection.

Article 531Pipe Networks and Taps

(1) No pipe or pipe network of any fire damp drainage system is permitted to beinstalled at any shaft or any exit that is an intake airway to the mine.

(2) Every network of pipes installed for the drainage of fire damp shall :

a. be designed so that fire damp samples may be taken and may be drained fromthe pipes;

b. be installed for sturdiness ;

c. yellow painted signs shall be installed close to any joints.

(3) Every joint in a gas network shall be sealed in order that no air is sucked into thefire damp pumping pipeline.

(4) Every tap in a fire damp drainage system pipe network shall be painted yellow.

Article 532Fire Damp Exhausters

(1) Any exhauster installed at any fire damp drainage system shall :

a. be of a function and type that is recognised;

b. be capable of preventing re-circulation of fire damp when the exhauster is notworking and

304

c. be arranged in such a way that when the exhauster is not working fire dampcan flow freely.

(2) All fire damp exhauster machines shall be grounded.

Article 533Enclosed Buildings for the

Fire damp Exhausterand the Calorimeter

(1) Exhausters shall be placed in an enclosed building at the surface.

(2) Electrical equipment installed in any explosive gas exhauster building orcalorimeter room shall be of a type that is flame proof and that is recognised.

(3) Any lights used in the exhauster building or calorimeter room must be explosionproof.

(4) The calorimeter or any monitoring device used in a fire damp drainage systemshall be positioned in an enclosed container and ventilated separately from thecalorimeter room.

(5) It is prohibited to open any container as specified in paragraph (4) in thecalorimeter room except where safety has been ensured in the calorimeter room.

Article 534Fire damp Disposal

(1) The location for the disposal of fire damp shall be made secure to prevent thepossibility of the fire damp igniting unintentionally.

(2) The extreme end of the fire damp discharge shall be fitted with flame traps for thepurpose of preventing the spread of fire into the drainage system.

(3) It is prohibited to dispose of fire damp from any drainage system into anyutilization plant when the fire damp content is less than 40 percent.

(4) It is prohibited to dispose of fire damp at any location close to any intake airwayto a mine.

(5) It is prohibited to dispose of fire damp from any drainage system in anunderground mine.

305

Article 535Supervision ofthe Exhauster

Supervision of fire damp drainage including the exhauster and the air pressure controlroom shall be carried out by a competent person.

Article 536Venturi Exhausters

Venturi exhausters used in any fire damp drainage system shall be made of any metalother than aluminium or magnesium.

Part FourInstallation of Supports at Work Sites


Apart from the requirements of Article 346 through Article 365, the followingstipulations shall apply to all underground coal mines.

Article 538Systematic Supports

(1) Systematic support shall be provided and maintained for the roof and sides of :

a. any work face;

b. every road head

c. every intersection of two or more roads where through one of which vehiclesor conveyors travel and

d. every length of road where people work, except occasionally or for shortperiods.

(2) The Mine Inspector may order in writing the Technical Mine Manager to makestipulations for systematic Support at any place or length of road in any mineother than the stipulations as required in paragraph (1) and

(3) The Chief Mine Inspector may enact the requirement for systematic supports inmines other than underground coal mines.

306

(4) Nothing stated in this Article shall prevent a person from installing in addition tothe specified system any support he considers necessary for safety.

(5) Mine workers shall install additional supports within the boundaries of theirworking area in accordance with instructions from the Operational Supervisor.

Article 539Company Regulations

on Supports

(1) Every person assigned to install or remove supports or assigned to supervise suchwork shall be in possession of a copy of the company regulations on supportsapart from the requirements of Article 361.

(2) When any mine worker experiences language difficulties or is illiterate, thesupervisor concerned shall provide oral orders and instructions.

(3) A copy of all valid company regulations on supports shall be filed at the miningoffice or any other place approved or stipulated by the Mine Inspector.

(4) The Mine Inspector may make written amendments to any company regulation onsupports in the Mine Book.

Article 540Support Guidelines

for Special Conditions

(1) Company support rules for any roadway that is driven as part of the bord andpillar system or for the purpose of developing any longwall/shortwall panel shallspecify the sequence in which supports are to be erected, or set and advanced, andthe maximum distance between :

a. the last row of support and the face which shall not exceed 1.0 meter;

b. each row of props , roof bolts or other supports which shall not exceed 1.25metres;

307

c. adjacent props, bars, roof bolts or other supports used in the same row, whichshall not exceed 1.25 meters;

d. arches or girder sets of no more than 1.25 meters and

e. sprags or chocks of no more than 1.5 metres.

(2) Company regulations for supports in any long wall mining system or any shortwall mining system shall include the support of the roof along the entire lengthand width of the face working and must determine the means and method ofremoving supports.The maximum distance between supports shall be :

a. the distance between any row of props shall not exceed one meter;

b. the distance between any series of adjacent props in the same row shall notexceed 1.25 metres and

c. the distance between any row of front props shall be a close as possible to thework face.

(3) Every bar set shall be supported by at least 2 props.

a. if coupled bars (link bars) approved by the Chief Mine Inspector are used :

1) any such bar may be supported by one support only (provided it isconnected to another such bar similarly supported);

2) any such bar in the front row may be supported in cantilever.

b. when the company regulations for supports allow for the use of slide bars thesaid bars shall be supported using no less than 2 props and

c. the end of the bar in any front row shall be as close as possible to the workface.

(4) Supports at machine cut faces:.

At any place where a machine is used which shears coal to a depth exceeding 0.4metres at a single cut, the props shall be installed as soon as possible after anopening is made. Installation of the supports shall follow the requirements ofparagraph (2).

(5) Company regulations for supports for powered roof supports.

308

a. every powered roof support used in any mine shall be of a type approved bythe Chief Mine Inspector;

b. company regulations for powered roof supports shall detail the maximumdistance between powered roof supports. The said distance shall be inaccordance with the manufacturers specifications;

c. at any place where a coal shearing machine is used to a with of more than 0.4metres per cut, powered roof supports shall be moved forward as soon as anopening is made and

d. it is prohibited for any person to be between any A.F.C (flexible chainconveyor) and a work face when any coal shearing machine is operating orwhen powered roof supports are being moved forward.

(6) Company support rules when carrying out roof ripping at roadways shall providefor :

a. the setting of support as near as practicable to the ripping lip, so as to provideeffective support (for the roof adjacent to the ripping lip);

b. the roof newly exposed by the ripping to be forthwith effectively supported(tight to the roof);

c. ripping is carried out for enlarging underground openings; at the cessation ofripping the face of ripping to be effectively supported; and

d. the maximum length of the roof that may be exposed by ripping beforesupports are to be set.

(7) Company regulations for supports shall cover the maximum allowable distancebetween any work face and the last row of supports.

(8) Temporary Supports.

a. when any person is working between an A.F.C and a work face and thedistance between the work face and the front row of supports is more than 1metre the said place shall be installed with temporary props. With thestipulation that recognised powered roof supports are used the bar shall beinstalled no less than one bar at intervals of every one meter;

b. at any excavation site that is not a long wall face or a roof ripping face thesupport rules shall cover support stipulations in accordance with the saidexcavation work. When an appropriate system of supports makes use of propsand bars, the stipulations in the Support Guidelines shall cover the installationof temporary props with distance of no more than 1.0 metres in front of the

309

last support installed and the distance between the props shall not be morethan 1.25 metres.

1) for coal excavation at any work face, the distance between any row oftemporary props shall not exceed one meter from the front props and thedistance between every series of adjacent props shall not exceed thedistance between each row of front props installed.

2) where coal is being excavated at a buttock of temporary props shall beinstalled at intervals of no more than 1.0 metre measured parallel to theface of the last props in a row of props already installed, or from the lasttemporary prop in accordance with the conditions.

c. at any coal excavation site that is not a long wall face or a ceiling cut thesupport guidelines shall include support stipulations suited to the saidexcavation. Where the system of supports is appropriate as required aboveand makes use of props or bars, the said stipulations shall cover theinstallation of temporary props at a distance of no more than 1.0 metre in frontof the last supports already installed and the distance between the props shallnot exceed 1.25 meters.

(9) Arch girders or girder sets at road heads.

Where the system of support of the roof and sides in any heading makes use ofarch girders or girder sets, the support guidelines shall include the stipulation thatthe maximum distance between supports shall not exceed 1.25 metres.

(10) Roof Bolts (Strata Bolts)

a. it is prohibited to use any roof bolts as the only support at any work face in along wall except for the purpose of removing powered roof supports and

b. when roof bolts are used as supports, the support guidelines shall include thepattern, the intervals of distance and the torque values used. The use of roofbolts shall be in accordance with the stipulations as intended in Article 353.

(11) Control of the Roof Rock by Packing

When packing is used to control a large portion of the movement of the roof rocklayer, the support guidelines shall cover :

a. the maximum distance between any work face and the front wall of the packsopposite the work face;

b. the minimum width of the packs and

310

c. maximum distances between packs.

Article 541Duties in Company Regulations

for Supports

(1) The Operational Supervisor or any capable person appointed to take charge of anywork whenever supports are installed, moved forward, or removed, or who is incharge of any person who has been assigned to install, move forward, or removesupports, shall ensure that the company regulations for supports are carried out.The said person shall also ensure that whenever any additional support must beused, the said additional supports shall be installed immediately although the saidmatter may not be covered in the company regulations for supports.

(2) Apart from the requirements of Article 32 paragraph (3) and Article 350, everyperson at the mine whose duties are related to excavation and supports at anyplace including ripping or repair of any road shall ensure that the requirements asprovided for in the company regulations for supports at the said places are metand that any additional supports required are installed.

(3) Any travel way or any place in the mine that is not safe as required in thecompany regulations for supports shall only be entered by a person who has beengranted the authority to carry out inspection or repair work.

Article 542Stipulation for Road

Ceilings underSpecific Conditions

At any mine where the incline of the rock layer is 40 degrees or more, a section of thecoal layer in the roof shall be left intact. This requirement shall be included in thecompany regulations for supports.

Article 543General Stipulations for

the Installation of Supports

(1) Props.

a. every person installing props to support any roof or sides shall do so in orderthat the support is sturdy and that is has strong foundations;

311

b. when any person whose duties include installing props sees any brokendamaged or unstable props the said employee shall make the said supportstable or replace it and

c. when any such employee is unable to carry out the stipulations as required inparagraph (1) letter a and letter b the said employee shall make an immediatereport to the supervisor in charge of the installation of supports.

(2) Wooden Lids

a. any person who installs props must insert wedges of an appropriate thicknessin between the top of the props and the bar or the roof in order to completelyclose the top of the props and where a bar is not installed above a prop, thesaid wedge shall be as wide as the top of the props and the length shall be noless than two times size of the top of the props and

b. Wedges shall not be required to be inserted between the top of a props and abar where :

1) it is inserted underneath a wooden bar;

2) the prop installed is fitted with a friction cap the function of which is tosupport the bar to ensure that it stays above the props;

3) the prop is set to induce a roof break; and

4) a rigid steel prop fixed to a girder in a place that is not a working face orroadhead.

(3) Installation of Powered Roof Supports.

a. any employee installing powered roof supports shall ensure that every supporthas been securely installed. Where any powered roof support is found to bedamaged a report shall made immediately to the supervisor in charge of theinstallation of supports and

b. the supervisor in charge of the installation of supports shall ensure that everydamaged powered roof support is repaired or replaced and the ceiling in thesaid place is properly supported.

(4) The installation of rock bolts shall be carried out in accordance with thestipulations as required in Article 353.

(5) Chocks.

312

a. chocks shall be installed on strong foundations and must be tight to the roofand sides an

b. chocks shall be made of timber with flat surfaces.

(6) When any packing is incorporated into system of supports in a mine the saidpacking shall be made and installed so that is tight to the roof and when thepacking is made manually it shall be made on strong foundations and be filledwith debris.

(7) Arch girders and Girder Sets.

Every arch girder or girder set installed to support the roof and sides shall beinstalled on sturdy foundations and shall provide strong support for the roof andbetween supports a bar shall be tied securely to each of the supports.

Article 544Installation of Replacement

Supports

(1) Support employees shall ensure that any damaged support or any support that isnot functioning is hastily replaced with a new support and unstable supports shallbe made stable.

(2) Any worker who finds any damaged support shall where possible carry outrepairs of the said support or any such find shall be reported immediately to theoperational supervisor.

(3) When any roof has collapsed or any wall has shifted, is broken or causes supportsto not function at any part in the mine where people travel or people work, anyperson on duty at the time shall ensure that :

a. any open roof or side or any roof or side close to any open area shall besupported immediately;

b. safety measures shall be taken prior to any debris being cleared away and

c. when any employee, as required in letter a and letter b, is not capable of themeasures as specified in this paragraph, the said employee shall ensure that noperson crosses into or works in the said area except on the instructions of theunderground operational supervisor.

Article 545Removing Supports

313

It is prohibited to remove any support at any section in any mine except where such workis being carried out from a safe position.

Article 546Delaying Installationor Moving Supports

(1) Delaying installation or moving supports shall only be carried out under thefollowing circumstances :

a. in order that operations are not disrupted regarding advancing, turning of, ormaking room for coal shearers, loaders or conveyors and

b. when the operation of any shearing machine is disrupted due to the presenceof any bar at the ceiling the said bar may be moved.

(2) Delaying installation or moving support shall be made for as short a period aspracticable.

(3) Where circumstances are different than the requirements of paragraph (1) letter a,the said stipulations shall cover sustained supports using single bars the length ofwhich must be greater than the distance between two props or where the distanceis less than 2.0 metres coupled bar may be used.

(4) Every single bar shall be supported no less than one prop at each end and everycoupled bar shall be supported by no less than one prop.

Article 547Installing and ReleasingPowered Roof Supports

(1) A installation diagram shall be made for every mine that uses powered roofsupports as well as a diagram that shows the method of removal andtransportation of such supports.

(2) The powered roof supports installation diagram shall include :

a. the method of transportation from the surface to the work face and withparticular emphasis on handling and transportation safety;

b. stipulations of appropriate transportation vehicles in any special form wherenecessary;

c. stipulations regarding appropriate winches fitted with load limitationfacilities;

314

d. stipulations for transport equipment designed for adequate size and strength;

e. support methods at work faces during installation of powered roof supports.

(3) The diagram showing the release and transportation of powered roof supportsshall include :

a. support methods at work faces during the removal of supports;

b. transportation methods of powered roof supports from work faces to the newwork faces and

c. the same stipulations as specified in paragraph (2) letter b through letter d.

Part FiveTraining and Supervision

of Manpower inUnderground Coal Mines


(1) The requirements of Article 28 through Article 30, and Article 474 throughArticle 490 shall apply to all underground coal mines.

Article 550Manpower Training

(1) Mine workers permitted to work at underground coal excavation work shall be :

a. any worker who has been trained, who has been declared capable and who iscertified and

b. any worker who is undergoing training.

(2) Training given to mine workers shall be in accordance with the curriculumapproved by the Chief Mine Inspector and shall cover :

315

a. basic training for coal excavation work of no less than 90 days which shall beunder the strict supervision of an instructor or mine supervisor or

b. further training for coal excavation work of no less than 30 days afterundergoing basic training and which shall be under the strict supervision of aninstructor or mine supervisor;

(3) The Chief Mine Inspector shall ensure that :

a. a supervisor supervises only one basic trainee and an instructor shall onlytrain a person in only one field of work and

b. at any place used completely for the purposes of training at any specific timeother work shall be stopped.

Article 551Coal Shearing Machine

Operators

Any mine worker who is capable of operating a mechanically, hydraulically orelectrically driven coal shearing machine not including portable such machines inunderground coal mines shall meet the following requirements :

a. shall have been given training as required in Article 550 paragraph (1);

b. shall have had experience in coal excavation work of no less than six months;

c. shall have been given training in the operation of coal shearing machines of thesame type and

d. shall have been declared capable of operating a coal shearing machine.

Chapter XPenalties

Article 552

Any violation of this Ministerial Decree shall be subject to a sentence as intended inArticle 33 of Law Number 11, 1967 on Mining Basic Stipulations.

316

317

Chapter XITransfer Stipulations

Article 553

Mining companies shall put into application the stipulations regarding the qualificationsof the Technical Mine Manager as intended in this Ministerial Decree no later than aperiod of two years after this Ministerial Decree is enacted.

Chapter XIIClosing Stipulations

Article 554

(1) By the enactment of this Ministerial Decree, all regulations that provide forgeneral mining occupational work health and safety to the extent that they areprovided for in this Ministerial Decree shall be deemed no longer valid.

(2) Further stipulations required for the implementation of this Ministerial Decreeshall be provided for by the Director General.

Article 555

This Ministerial Decree shall come into effect on the stipulated date.

Stipulated in JakartaMay 22, 1995

The Minister of Mines and Energy

signature

I.B. Sudjana

Documents

080524 - Indonesian Mines Reg - Decree of the Minister of Mines and Energy 555